manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon iR C6800 Series, Service Manual

The Canon iR C6800 Series Service Handbook is an essential manual for users to efficiently operate and maintain their printer. With step-by-step instructions and troubleshooting tips, this manual ensures smooth performance. Download this comprehensive guide for free from manualshive.com to maximize the potential of your Canon iR C6800 Series printer.

Share
Download
background image

Contents

Contents

12.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ............................................................................................................... 121

12.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1 ..................................................................................................... 121
12.1.2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2 ..................................................................................................... 123
12.1.3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3 ..................................................................................................... 124
12.1.4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4 ..................................................................................................... 125
12.1.5 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 5 ..................................................................................................... 126
12.1.6 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 6 ..................................................................................................... 127
12.1.7 Potential Control Conversion Table ........................................................................................................ 128

12.2 Image Adjustments....................................................................................................................................... 1216

12.2.1 Image Position ....................................................................................................................................... 1216
12.2.2 Checking the Image Position................................................................................................................. 1216
12.2.3 Cassette.................................................................................................................................................. 1217
12.2.4 Manual Feed Tray ................................................................................................................................. 1218
12.2.5 Front Deck ............................................................................................................................................. 1218

12.3 Scanning System .......................................................................................................................................... 1220

12.3.1 After Replacing the CCD Unit .............................................................................................................. 1220
12.3.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass................................................................................................... 1221
12.3.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM .................................................. 1221

12.4 Laser Exposure System ................................................................................................................................ 1223

12.4.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner........................................................................................................ 1223

12.5 Image Formation System.............................................................................................................................. 1223

12.5.1 After Replacing the Black Developing Unit ......................................................................................... 1223
12.5.2 Points to Note When Mounting the Polarity Positioning Plate ............................................................. 1223
12.5.3 Replacing the Color Developing Unit ................................................................................................... 1224
12.5.4 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit ............................................................................. 1226
12.5.5 After Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly................................................................................. 1229
12.5.6 After Replacing the Primary Charging Wire......................................................................................... 1229
12.5.7 After Replacing the PreTransfer Charging Wire ................................................................................. 1229
12.5.8 After Replacing the PreTransfer Charging Wire ................................................................................. 1229
12.5.9 After Replacing the Waste Toner Box .................................................................................................. 1229
12.5.10 After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................ 1229
12.5.11 After Repacking the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade ................................................................ 1231
12.5.12 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum .................................................................................................... 1232
12.5.13 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater .............................................................................. 1233
12.5.14 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater PCB ...................................................................... 1234
12.5.15 After Repacking the ITB  .................................................................................................................... 1235
12.5.16 After Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller ...................................................................................... 1235

12.6 Fixing System............................................................................................................................................... 1237

12.6.1 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Assembly .......................................................................... 1237
12.6.2 After Replacing the Fixing Roller ......................................................................................................... 1237
12.6.3 After Replacing the Fixing Web ........................................................................................................... 1237
12.6.4 Position of the Fixing inlet Guide ......................................................................................................... 1238
12.6.5 Points to Note When Mounting the Pressure Roller ............................................................................. 1238
12.6.6 Adjusting the Nip Pressure of the Pressure Roller  ............................................................................... 1238
12.6.7 Adjusting the Position of the Feeding Web Solenoid (SL2) ................................................................. 1239
12.6.8 Points to Note About the Position of the Fixing Thermal Switch......................................................... 1239
12.6.9 Points to Note When Mounting the Shift Thermal Switch ................................................................... 1239
12.6.10 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch .................................... 1240
12.6.11 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor............................................................ 1240

Summary of Contents for iR C6800 Series

Page 1: ...Apr 6 2004 Service Manual iR C6800 Series iR C6800C ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This ma...

Page 4: ...quiring care to avoid combustion fire Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question Provides a descri...

Page 5: ...sed to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed they are explained in terms of from sensors to the in...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ... Mounting the Scanner System 2 9 2 2 5 Locking the Primary Transfer Roller in Place 2 10 2 2 6 Before Mounting the Developing Assembly 2 10 2 2 7 Mounting the Color Developing Assemblies 2 14 2 2 8 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly 2 17 2 2 9 Mounting the Process Unit 2 19 2 2 10 Mounting the Fixing Assembly 2 23 2 2 11 Fitting the Black Toner Bottle 2 24 2 2 12 Checking the Environment Switc...

Page 8: ...e Original Tray 2 51 2 8 1 Checking the Contents 2 51 2 8 2 Installation 2 51 2 9 Installing the Key Switch Unit A1 2 53 2 9 1 Checking the Contents 2 53 2 9 2 Installation 2 53 Chapter 3 Basic Operation 3 1 Construction 3 1 3 1 1 Functional Construction 3 1 3 1 2 Arrangement of the Major PCBs 3 3 3 1 3 DC Controller 3 4 3 2 Basic Sequence 3 6 3 2 1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On 3 6 3 2 ...

Page 9: ...7 8 HDD 4 43 4 7 9 Controller Fan 4 45 Chapter 5 Original Exposure System 5 1 Construction 5 1 5 1 1 Specifications Control Mechanisms and Functions 5 1 5 1 2 Major Components 5 2 5 1 3 Construction of the Control System 5 4 5 1 4 Reader Controller PCB 5 4 5 2 Basic Sequence 5 6 5 2 1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On 5 6 5 2 2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start ...

Page 10: ...0 7 4 Image Stabilization Control 7 11 7 4 1 Overview of Image Stabilization Control 7 11 7 4 2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control 7 12 7 4 3 Potential Control 7 15 7 4 4 ATVC Control 7 19 7 4 5 ATR Control 7 21 7 4 6 ACR Control Auto Carrier Refresh Control 7 24 7 4 7 D max Control 7 25 7 4 8 D half Control 7 26 7 4 9 PASCAL control 7 29 7 5 Charging Meachanism 7 32 7 5 1 Controlling the Prima...

Page 11: ...Array 7 78 7 11 3 Primary Charging Assembly 7 84 7 11 4 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor 7 86 7 11 5 Pre transfer Charging Assembly 7 89 7 11 6 Pre transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor 7 90 7 11 7 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 7 90 7 11 8 Photosensitive Drum 7 96 7 11 9 Drum Motor 7 108 7 11 10 Drum Heater 7 111 7 11 11 Drum Heater PCB 7 123 7 11 12 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Bl...

Page 12: ...the Start key 8 10 8 2 2 Interval Acceleration 8 12 8 2 3 Stopping the Paper Before Registration 8 16 8 3 Detecting Jams 8 17 8 3 1 Delivery Jams 8 17 8 3 2 Stationary Jams 8 19 8 3 3 Other Jams 8 21 8 4 Cassette 8 22 8 4 1 Overview 8 22 8 4 2 Identifying Paper Sizes 8 23 8 4 3 Setting the Universal Cassette 8 25 8 4 4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper 8 26 8 5 Cassette Pick Up Unit 8 28 8 5 1...

Page 13: ...on Roller 8 72 8 11 20 Manual Feed Pre Regustration Motor 8 73 8 11 21 Horizontal Registration Assembly 8 77 8 11 22 Registration Motor 8 79 8 11 23 Horizontal Registration Motor 8 81 8 11 24 Duplex Reversal Motor 8 84 8 11 25 Duplex Left Motor 8 84 8 11 26 Duplex Middle Motor 8 86 8 11 27 Duplex Right Motor 8 87 8 11 28 Outside Delivery Motor 8 88 Chapter 9 Fixing System 9 1 Construction 9 1 9 1 ...

Page 14: ... 10 1 1 Overview 10 1 10 1 2 LCD Processing 10 2 10 1 3 LCD Contrast Adjustment 10 2 10 1 4 Control Panel CPU 10 2 10 2 Counters 10 3 10 2 1 Overview 10 3 10 2 2 Increasing the Count 10 6 10 3 Fans 10 7 10 3 1 Overview 10 7 10 3 2 Sequence of Operations 10 9 10 4 Power Supply 10 10 10 4 1 Power Supply 10 10 10 4 2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB 10 14 10 4 3 Protection Function 10 15 10 4 4 Ba...

Page 15: ... and Transparency Sensor 11 22 Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments 12 1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 12 1 12 1 1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1 12 1 12 1 2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2 12 3 12 1 3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3 12 4 12 1 4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4 12 5 12 1 5 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 5 12 6 12 1 6 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 6 12 7 12 1 7 ...

Page 16: ...ft Thermal Switch 12 39 12 6 10 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch 12 40 12 6 11 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor 12 40 12 6 12 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor 12 40 12 6 13 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat Thermistor 12 41 12 7 Electrical Components 12 41 12 7 1 When Replacing the Reader Controller ...

Page 17: ... 95 13 4 6 Lamps Heaters and Others 13 97 13 4 7 PCBs 13 100 13 4 8 Variable Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes LED and Check Pins by PCB 13 103 Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis 14 1 Error Code Table 14 1 14 1 1 Error Code 14 1 14 2 Error Codes SEND 14 4 14 2 1 Self Diagnostic Display 14 4 14 2 2 List of Error Codes without Messages 14 7 14 3 Error Code Details 14 14 14 3 1 Error Code Description 14 14 1...

Page 18: ...14 35 14 3 45 E531 14 36 14 3 46 E532 14 36 14 3 47 E535 14 37 14 3 48 E537 14 37 14 3 49 E540 14 38 14 3 50 E542 14 38 14 3 51 E584 14 39 14 3 52 E590 14 39 14 3 53 E591 14 40 14 3 54 E592 14 40 14 3 55 E593 14 41 14 3 56 E5F0 14 41 14 3 57 E5F1 14 41 14 3 58 E5F2 14 42 14 3 59 E5F3 14 42 14 3 60 E5F4 14 42 14 3 61 E5F5 14 43 14 3 62 E5F6 14 43 14 3 63 E5F8 14 44 14 3 64 E5F9 14 44 14 3 65 E602 1...

Page 19: ...15 2 15 1 3 Ending Service Mode 15 3 15 1 4 Back Up 15 3 15 1 5 Initial Screen 15 4 15 1 6 2nd 3rd Item Screen 15 4 15 1 7 4th Item Screen 15 5 15 2 DISPLAY Status Display Mode 15 6 15 2 1 COPIER 15 6 15 2 2 FEEDER 15 26 15 2 3 DISPLAY Status Display Mode Level2 15 28 15 3 I O I O Display Mode 15 34 15 3 1 Overview 15 34 15 3 2 DC CON 15 35 15 3 3 R CON 15 42 15 3 4 FEEDER 15 45 15 3 5 SORTER 15 4...

Page 20: ... 2 Making Connections 16 11 16 3 Formatting the HDD 16 17 16 3 1 Formatting All Partitions 16 17 16 3 2 Formatting Selected Partitions 16 18 16 3 3 Formatting the Procedure 16 20 16 4 Downloading System Software 16 27 16 4 1 Batch Downloading 16 27 16 4 2 Downloading the System Software 16 40 16 4 3 Downloading the RUI and Language Module 16 48 16 4 4 Downloading the BOOT Software 16 56 16 4 5 Dow...

Page 21: ...Chapter 1 Introduction ...

Page 22: ......

Page 23: ...ommon Settings 1 11 1 2 3 2 Setting the Timers 1 13 1 2 3 3 Adjustment and Cleaning 1 13 1 2 3 4 Report 1 14 1 2 3 5 System Control Settings 1 15 1 2 3 6 Copier Settings 1 15 1 2 3 7 Common Transmission Settings 1 16 1 2 3 8 Box Settings 1 17 1 2 3 9 Printer Settings 1 17 1 2 3 10 Address Book Settings 1 18 1 2 4 User Maintenance 1 18 1 2 4 1 Cleaning 1 18 1 2 4 2 Inspection 1 20 1 2 5 Safety 1 22...

Page 24: ......

Page 25: ...be configured as follows with pickup delivery accessories F 1 1 1 Finisher R1 2 Saddle Finisher R2 3 Additionary Finisher Tray A1 4 Puncher Unit L1 5 Shift Tray C1 6 Delivery Tray K1 7 Side Paper Deck U1 If any of the accessories 1 through 3 is used the accessories 5 and 6 cannot be used as part of the system 3 5 7 6 4 3 1 2 ...

Page 26: ...P D1U dongle for extended functions 3 Image Conversion Board A2 4 USB Interface Board A3 or TokenRing Board optional for 120V model 5 UFR Board standard for N model 6 Ethernet Board standard 7 Super G3 Fax Board P1 optional for 100V model 8 PS Print Sever Unit D1 9 Color iR 256 MB Expansion RAM optional for 100V 10 PDL Expansion Kit LIPS C1 for 100V model LIPS model boot ROM 3 4 5 6 8 10 2 1 7 9 ...

Page 27: ... DIP DIU adds a transmission function the setup work calls for a PC requiring the selection of DIP parallel port or DIU USB port depending on the type of connection offered by the PC Image Conversion Board A2 needed when a transmission fax function is added USB Interface Board A3 adds a printing function by connection to a PC in a local configuration USB requires a UFR board Super G3 Fax Board P1 ...

Page 28: ...External View 0002 7878 F 1 3 1 Original pickup tray 2 Manual feed tray 3 Main power switch 4 Right front paper deck 5 Cassette 4 6 Cassette 3 7 Left front paper deck 8 Front cover 9 Black toner supply cover 10 Control panel LCD touch panel 11 ADF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10 11 ...

Page 29: ...ter 1 1 5 F 1 4 1 Copyboard glass 2 Control panel 3 Feeding assembly release lever 4 Door switch assembly 5 Service book case 6 Leakage breaker 7 Cassette heater switch 8 Environment switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 30: ...r developing assembly 7 Black developing cylinder 8 Copyboard glass 9 CCD unit 10 Laser scanner assembly 11 Primary charging assembly 12 Photosensitive drum 13 Drum cleaner assembly 14 Primary transfer roller 15 ITB intermediate transfer belt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 29 55 ...

Page 31: ... 30 Cassette 3 feed roller 31 Cassette 3 separation roller 32 Cassette 3 33 Cassette 4 feed roller 34 Cassette 4 separation roller 35 Cassette pickup roller 36 Cassette 4 37 Left deck 38 Left deck separation roller 39 Left deck feed roller 40 Left deck pickup roller 41 Feeding assembly 42 ITB cleaner assembly 43 Pressure roller 44 Fixing roller 45 External heating roller 46 Fixing web 47 Color ton...

Page 32: ...achine goes on when the main power switch is turned on i e other than in power save mode low power mode sleep mode F 1 6 1 Control panel power switch 2 Main power switch 3 Main power indicator lamp Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated during which access is made to the HDD If deprived of power the HDD can suffer a fault E602 F 1 7 3 1 2 ON Starting up Please wait ...

Page 33: ...witch 2 before turning off the main power switch 1 F 1 8 When Sending Data to the Printer or Using the Fax Unit Be sure that the Execution Memory lamp 2 on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch Turning off the main power while a job is under way can cause loss of the data being processed F 1 9 2 1 1 2 OFF ...

Page 34: ...ch 2 or the main power switch 1 Turning off the main power switch while downloading is under way can disable the machine F 1 10 1 2 2 3 Control Panel 0002 9566 F 1 11 1 Control panel LCD touch panel 2 User mode key 3 Guide key 4 Reset key 2 1 10 11 12 13 17 16 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 35: ...1 2 Item Description initial function initial function copy transmit fax box system initial screen ON OFF priority on system device ON OFF function after auto clear return do not return buzzer ON OFF input sound ON OFF input invalid sound ON OFF supply alert sound ON OFF warning sound ON OFF job end sound ON OFF paper level message ON OFF auto color w BW selected priority on text on photo inch inp...

Page 36: ...andard mode paper select auto cassette 1 thorough 5 print quantity 1 to 2000 sorter if w finisher non sort sort rotation sort group rotation group sorter w finisher non sort sort shift sort group shift group rotation group staple double sided print on left right spread top bottom spread off file delete after printing ON OFF file merge ON OFF display language ON OFF screen color reversal ON OFF bet...

Page 37: ...0 min 2 3 4 hr Item Description zoom fine adjustment XY individually 1 0 to 1 0 in 0 1 increments 0 center bind staple edging if w saddle finisher start key center bind position change if w saddle finisher size A3 11X17 B4 A4R LTRR auto gradation correct full correction read test print x 3 times quick correction no test print density correct copy transmit 9 steps each set to 5 at time of shipment ...

Page 38: ...eparate yes no fax specifications fax transmission results report only if error on off transmitted original display on off fax communications control report auto print every 40 communications ON OFF specified time ON OFF time 00 00 to 23 59 transmission reception separate toggle on off fax reception results report only if error on off fax box reception report ON OFF list print transmit address lis...

Page 39: ... method condition on off settings bulletin delete delete auto on line offline shift auto on line shift ON OFF auto off line shift ON OFF LDAP server register register detail edit delete list print limit to function with control key Off limit some limit all Item Description preference key 1 no setting magnification sorter page separation may be enabled preference key 2 no setting magnification sort...

Page 40: ... attach do not attach color transmission gamma y1 0 y1 4 y1 8 y2 2 transmission function initialize yes no common reception functions setup double sided print on off cassette all on off image reduce on off reception info add do not add 2 on 1 ON OFF fax basic setup user telephone No No input line type 20 pps 10 pps touch tone volume adjust alarm sound communication sound volume adjust alarm sound ...

Page 41: ...ind margin margin 0 between 30 and 30 m layout horizontal correction 0 vertical correction 0 between 50 and 50 mm error skip yes no print delete time length 1 2 3 6 12 24 hr time out x sec between 5 and 300 RIP yes no sorter no rotation sort rotation group transparency interleaf no blank paper interleaf printed paper interleaf printer operation mode auto or one of 6 emulation no or 1 or 4 auto swi...

Page 42: ...ch components 1 Copyboard Cover Wipe the copyboard cover 1 using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent well wrung then dry wipe it with a soft cloth F 1 12 halftone image resolution gradation error diffusion printer initialize yes no LIPS emulation 12 items utility printer initialize yes no Item Description address register various times address list name register register one...

Page 43: ...ding Glass Wipe the copyboard glass 1 and the DF reading glass 2 using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent well wrung thereafter dry wipe them with a soft cloth F 1 14 4 DF Glass Retainer Edge Guide Wipe the DF glass retainer 1 and the edge guide 2 using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent well wrung thereafter dry wipe them with a soft cloth F 1 15 1 ...

Page 44: ...ine is equipped with a breaker to protect against over current and leakage current and it is important to check the operation of the leakage breaker to ensure a higher level of safety Advise the user to check the breaker as follows on a periodical basis about once a month and keep a record of the checks 1 Turn on the main power switch 2 Push the test button 1 of the breaker using the tip of a ball...

Page 45: ...ain power switch 5 Shift the breaker switch 1 back to the ON side F 1 19 After the check be sure that the breaker switch has shifted fully to the ON side If it has stopped between the ON and the OFF sides push it over to the OFF side and then back to the ON side 6 Turn on the main power switch ON I side OFF side 1 ON I side OFF side 1 ...

Page 46: ...98 The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put input force a set of regulations to govern laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations apply to laser products that are manufactured on and after August 1 1976 and the sale of laser products is prohibited inside the US without indicating compliance with the regulations The following label is used to ...

Page 47: ...you must remove any of these covers be sure to work while paying full attention to the laser light The machine s laser unit is not designed for servicing in the field F 1 21 1 2 5 4 Safety of Toner 0002 9601 The machine s toner is a non toxic material made of plastic iron and small amounts of dye Do not throw toner into fire It may cause explosion Toner on Clothing or Skin 1 If your clothing or sk...

Page 48: ...Transfer method by intermediate transfer belt Transfer method primary transfer by charging roller Transfer method secondary transfer by charging roller Separation method by curvature separation static eliminator Pickup method from cassette manual feeder paper deck Cassette pickup method separation retard Paper deck pickup method separation retard Multifeeder pickup method separation retard Drum cl...

Page 49: ...h left right 2 5 1 5 1 5 w ADF 2 5 2 5 2 0 Number of gradations reader unit 256 engine unit 256 Reading resolution 600 600dpi Printing resolution 1200 equivalent x 600 dpi North American model only 9600 equivalent x 600 dpi non North American models First print time mono color 53 sec A4 plain paper 64 to 105 g m2 full color 12 2 sec A4 plain paper 64 to 105 g m2 Print speed A4 mono color 68 prints...

Page 50: ...0 g m2 50 sheets transparency Continuous reproduction 9999 prints max Memory main controller RAM512 MB 768 MB max Hard disk 40GB Low power mode default 15 min between 10 and 240 min Auto power off default 60 min between 10 and 240 min Auto gradation correction yes Operating environment temperature range 15 to 30 deg C Operating environment humidity range 25 to 80 Operating environment atmospheric ...

Page 51: ...3 9 17 12 18 305mm 458mm 5 2 25 5 2 17 2 6 15 13 19 330mm 482mm 5 2 25 5 2 17 2 6 15 B4 LGL 7 8 34 7 8 23 3 9 18 A4R LTRR B5R 7 8 42 7 8 29 3 9 19 A4 LTR B5 15 5 68 7 8 35 7 8 34 A5R 15 5 68 7 8 35 7 8 34 Heavy paper mode 1 105 to 163 g m2 A3 4 0 21 4 0 20 2 0 10 11 17 279mm 432mm 4 0 21 4 0 20 2 0 10 12 18 305mm 458mm 3 0 18 3 0 17 1 5 9 13 19 330mm 482mm 3 0 17 3 0 17 1 5 8 B4 LGL 4 0 25 4 0 23 ...

Page 52: ...2 36 2 8 35 18 Heavy paper mode 3 210 to 253 g m2 A3 2 8 20 11 17 279mm 432mm 2 8 20 12 18 305mm 458mm 2 3 17 13 19 330mm 482mm 2 3 17 B4 LGL 2 8 22 A4R LTRR B5R 2 8 27 A4 LTR B5 2 8 35 A5R 2 8 35 Transparency A4 LTR 2 8 40 2 8 35 Postcard 2 pane postcard 2 8 35 Gvn postcard 2 8 35 Tab sheet A4 LTR 4 0 Under 163g m2 2 8 164g m2 to 203g m2 42 Paper type Paper size Cassette deck single sided Manual ...

Page 53: ...5 LTR yes yes yes B5R yes no yes A5R yes no yes 305mm 457mm 12 18 330mm 482mm 13 19 yes no yes Executive yes no yes Executive R no no no Heavy paper mode 3 210 to 250g 2m A3 B4 A4R 279mm 432mm 11 17 LGL LTRR no no yes 305mm 457mm 12 18 330mm 482mm 13 19 no no yes Special paper trans parency A4 LTR yes no yes Postcard gvn postcard 2 pane postcard no no yes label sheet A4 A4R LTR LTRR no no yes inde...

Page 54: ... Printer Expansion Kit C1 non Japanese model only 11 SEND Expansion Kit D1P 12 SEND Expansion Kit D1U Japanese and European models only 13 UFR Scanner Kit C1 14 Color Network Multi PDL Printer Kit C1 non Japanese model only 15 Card Reader C1 16 Card Reader Mounting Kit C1 17 Delivery Tray K1 18 Original Holder K1 19 Stamp Unit A1 20 Key Switch Unit A2 21 Security Kit A1P A1U 22 256 MB Expansion RA...

Page 55: ...Chapter 2 Installation ...

Page 56: ......

Page 57: ...oner 2 29 2 2 18 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Belt 2 29 2 2 19 Supplying Color Toner 2 29 2 2 20 Setting Auto Gradation Correction 2 30 2 2 21 Checking the Image Operation 2 30 2 2 22 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration 2 30 2 2 23 Adjusting the Leading Edge Registration 2 33 2 2 24 Securing the Machine in Place 2 33 2 2 25 If Not Connected to a Network 2 34 2 3 Checking the Connection to ...

Page 58: ...2 8 1 Checking the Contents 2 51 2 8 2 Installation 2 51 2 9 Installing the Key Switch Unit A1 2 53 2 9 1 Checking the Contents 2 53 2 9 2 Installation 2 53 ...

Page 59: ...f fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas If the area is exposed to the direct rays of the sun the windows must be furnished with curtains The site must be well ventilated However the machine must not be installed near the air vent of the room The ozone generated by the machine while in operation is not of a level that can harm the health of the individuals around the machine Neverthele...

Page 60: ...Chapter 2 2 2 Copier 1 F 2 1 Copier 1 Punch Unit 2 Finisher 3 Side Deck 4 F 2 2 1 10cm 50cm 50cm 50cm 200cm 210cm min 4 1 3 10cm 50cm 50cm 50cm 200cm 310cm 2 ...

Page 61: ... plate having a pin hole left is where the delivery side of the machine will be with the front of the machine facing the side indicated by the arrow F 2 3 2 1 2 Installation Environment 0002 6399 Be sure that the environment of the site meets the following requirements F 2 4 1 Humidity 2 Temperature 1 Front RH 80 60 40 20 10 0 10 15 20 30 C 32 50 59 68 86 F 2 75 25 1 ...

Page 62: ...230V AU model 1 pc 2 Color toner cartridge cyan magenta yellow only for 100V 230V AU model 1 pc each 3 Black developing assembly black 1 pc 4 Color developing assembly cyan magenta yellow 1 pc each 5 Black developing assembly locking plate 1 pc 6 Process unit cover 1 pc 7 Touch pen 1 pc 8 Service book case 1 pc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ...

Page 63: ...book 1 pc 15 User s Manual 1 pc 16 Grip 2 pc 17 Pickup assembly face place 2 pc 18 Delivery assembly face plate 2 pc 19 Binding screw M4x8 2 pc 20 RS tightening screw M4x8 3 pc 21 Left deck locking plate 1 pc 22 No Copy label non 100 V model 3 pc 23 Glass Cleaning instructions label non 100 V model 1 pc 24 Original holder 120V model only 1 pc Found inside the cassette 3 upper cassette ...

Page 64: ... work in a group of 4 persons when lifting it 3 Be sure to turn the 2 adjusters front found on the bottom of the machine clockwise to release them These adjusters can slip off the machine when the machine is moved Take care not to lose them 2 2 2 Unpacking the Machine 0002 6411 1 Open the shipping box and remove the plastic covers 2 Fit the 2 included grips 2 into the grip slots 1 found on the pic...

Page 65: ...tch the skid and the slope plate by their pin holes and fit the pin 2 1 pc each F 2 10 Check to make sure that the caster 1 has not rolled off the skid 2 Also be sure that it has not ridden over the edge 3 of the skid F 2 11 8 While holding the grips on the delivery side of the machine move the machine along the slope plates and off the skid 9 Remove the packing tape from the machine 10 Remove the...

Page 66: ...ou removed in the foregoing step in the compartment 2 found at the rear right of the machine F 2 15 14 Fix the right cover lower rear 2 in place with 2 screws 1 F 2 16 15 Shift down the 2 grips 1 on the delivery side as shown so that they are inside the machine F 2 17 16 Fit the 2 included delivery assembly face plates over the holes 1 in which you have fitted the grips F 2 18 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 67: ...t the deck assembly by hand 5 Open the front cover 6 Match the included left deck locking plate 1 against the 2 holes in the left deck rear side plate then secure it in place using a screw RS tightening M4x8 2 F 2 21 When mounting the left deck locking plate take care not to trap the left deck cable by the plate To facilitate the work try lightly pushing down on the deck cable Pull lightly on the ...

Page 68: ...ace using the included binding screw M4x8 2 F 2 23 2 2 6 Before Mounting the Developing Assembly 0002 6569 1 Pull the grip 1 toward the front to fully open the upper right cover 2 F 2 24 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 2 25 3 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 2 26 4 Remove the screw 1 found at the lower right then detach the f...

Page 69: ...right deck 7 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 2 29 8 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 2 30 9 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 2 31 10 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 2 32 11 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 found at the upper left F 2 33 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 70: ... detach the drum stop tool 2 fitted to its back F 2 35 14 Hold the drum fixing member 1 in place using the drum stop tool 2 Then using a screwdriver remove the drum fixing screw 3 As shown in the figure be sure to remove the screw on the protrusion 4 of the drum stop only after matching it against the notch 5 in the drum flange F 2 36 15 Remove the drum fixing member 1 using precision pliers F 2 3...

Page 71: ...2 41 20 Lift both ends 1 of the process unit slightly then fully slide out the process unit 2 to the front F 2 42 1 Be sure to take care not to deform the joint plate found at the left end when drawing out the process unit 2 When drawing out the process unit be careful not to lift the process unit more than necessary The unit may slip off the rails not permitting detachment 3 When you have slid ou...

Page 72: ...ng assembly can come off by friction against the photosensitive drum Be sure to turn the developing rotary always in counterclockwise direction F 2 43 3 Turn the developing rotary so that its partition side 1 is vertical i e position for mounting the developing assembly If you keep pushing the lever of the developing rotary solenoid the developing rotary will not stop to permit mounting the develo...

Page 73: ...oping assembly so that the sponge side faces upward 9 Remove the tape 1 and detach the sponge Toner and starter can start to leak when the sponge has been detached Do not keep the supply mouth facing down during the work F 2 49 10 Check for scratches on the developing cylinder while turning the developing cylinder gear 1 5 to 6 times in the direction of the arrow The work also serves to even out t...

Page 74: ...n the figure marked NG turn the developing rotary so that it is positioned as shown in the figure marked OK F 2 53 15 Loosen the screw 2 used to hold the torque limiter 1 of the developing rotary in place then slide it upward to release F 2 54 16 Fix the torque limiter in place using a screw 1 F 2 55 If you fail to release the torque limiter you will not be able to mount the locking plate of the b...

Page 75: ...ct to prevent damage to the potential sensor as by dropping it Be sure to place paper before placing the black developing assembly on the floor or a table F 2 57 3 Turn the developing cylinder gear 1 by hand to check for scratches on the cylinder Do not touch the area 2 of the developing cylinder cover indicated in the diagram otherwise the blade can leave its trace on the cylinder F 2 58 4 Turn t...

Page 76: ...able 1 on top of the assembly Otherwise the cable can get trapped when the assembly is put inside the machine F 2 61 7 Route the cable 1 having the tube of the black developing assembly through the hole 2 indicated in the figure F 2 62 8 Route the high voltage cable 1 of the black developing assembly along the side of the toner supply mouth 2 F 2 63 9 Connect the connector 1 found at the inside fr...

Page 77: ...re not to trap the cable found at the right front of the machine by the process unit Be sure to close the process unit while the front cover is fully open If you cannot fit the process unit al the way to the rear go through the following Slide out the process unit and turn the developing rotary drive gear found on the host side slightly thereafter be sure to close the process unit 2 2 9 Mounting t...

Page 78: ...into the 4 cable guides 2 and the 2 cable clamps 3 F 2 70 5 Connect the 4 connectors at the upper front right F 2 71 6 Fix the cable 1 of the black developing assembly in place using the harness guide 2 F 2 72 7 Connect the connector 1 coming from the black developing assembly F 2 73 8 Secure the process unit 1 in place using 3 binding screws M4x8 F 2 74 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 79: ...w while matching it against the notch 6 of the drum flange F 2 75 1 If the photosensitive drum is let to turn clockwise during the work the scoop up sheet can become soiled to cause stray toner Be sure to hold the drum stop tool firmly in place when tightening the drum fixing screw 2 Check to be sure that the protrusion of the drum fixing member is between he markings 1 and of the drum flange F 2 ...

Page 80: ...re transfer charging assembly 3 Check the pre transfer charging wire and the shielding plate for soiling If it is soiled with dirt or paper lint clean it using alcohol F 2 79 15 Mount the primary charging assembly and the pre transfer charging assembly 16 Close the hopper assembly 17 Open the black toner supply cover 1 18 Secure the hopper assembly 1 in place using 3 screws 2 F 2 80 19 Close the b...

Page 81: ...ws M4x8 2 27 Close the color toner supply cover F 2 84 28 Fix the right cover upper 1 in place with 2 screws 2 F 2 85 29 Close the right upper cover 2 2 10 Mounting the Fixing Assembly 0002 6697 1 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly fully 2 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 F 2 86 3 Open the middle cover 1 F 2 87 4 Peel off the tape 2 used to keep the tag 1 in place F 2 88 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 82: ...r and the fixing knob by reversing the work in step 7 10 Close the middle cover 11 Close the reversal delivery cover 12 Close the fixing feeding assembly 13 Lock the releasing lever in place then close the front cover 2 2 11 Fitting the Black Toner Bottle 0002 6699 1 Take out the black toner bottle from its packaging box 2 Open the black toner supply cover 1 then push down the lock lever 2 F 2 92 ...

Page 83: ...F 2 95 6 Close the black toner supply cover 2 2 12 Checking the Environment Switch 0002 6701 1 Set the environment switch to suit the site of installation If the site is in a high humidity environment turn on the environment switch 1 so that the drum heater will go on regardless of the state of the main power switch 2 F 2 96 At time of shipment from the factory the environment switch is off 1 2 1 ...

Page 84: ... item after turning on the power to disable initial rotation If the power is turned off and then on the machine will start initial rotation possibly causing an error in its image stabilization mechanism F 2 97 2 2 14 Setting Up the Paper Cassette 0002 6732 1 Press the cassette release button and slide out the cassette to the front 2 Check with the user to find out the type of paper to use then che...

Page 85: ...lacement supply tab 1 F 2 102 12 Fit the color toner cartridge replacement supply tab to the back of the front cover then close the front cover 2 2 15 Changing the Deck Paper Size right left 0002 6733 1 Open the front cover 2 Push the release button and slide out the right deck 3 Remove the screws 4 3 pc in total and detach the rear end guide plate 1 left guide plate 2 and right guide plate 3 Then...

Page 86: ...it in the direction of the arrows 10 times to even out the toner inside it F 2 105 When turning the color toner cartridge be sure not to touch the shutter assembly or turn the knob otherwise the toner can start to leak F 2 106 3 Check to see that the control panel indicates the message Set the Toner Cartridge 4 Open the front cover 5 Open the color toner supply cover 1 F 2 107 6 Fit the Y toner ca...

Page 87: ... end of the service mode item 2 2 19 Supplying Color Toner 0002 6729 1 Execute the following service mode item to set up color toner settings FUNCTION INSTALL INSET 3 about 14 minutes Do not turn off the power switch while the machine is in operation If the machine is turned off the ITB may carry a deposit of toner which can cause image faults As necessary execute COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING TBLT CLN...

Page 88: ...t Print 3 When a message has appeared asking you to remove the printout remove it from the copyboard 12 Press the Reset key to end User mode 2 2 21 Checking the Image Operation 0002 6730 1 Place the Test Chart on the copyboard glass and make copies using the cassettes and the deck as the source of paper then check the output images be sure there is no abnormal noise be sure that images produced at...

Page 89: ... in Cassette 4 1 Perform the steps given for the cassette 3 to adjust the horizontal registration for the cassettes 4 Left Deck 1 Press the release button and slide out the left deck 2 Remove the left face cover 1 using a flat blade screwdriver F 2 112 3 Loosen the 2 screws 1 and insert a screwdriver through the hole in the front left stay then turn the adjusting screw to adjust the horizontal reg...

Page 90: ...d the lower right cover 3 Loosen the 2 screws 1 and insert a screwdriver 2 through the hole in the front right stay then turn the adjusting screw to adjust the horizontal registration F 2 116 4 Check to make sure that the horizontal registration left right marking L1 of the copy made on paper from the right deck is 2 5 1 5 mm F 2 117 1 Paper feed direction 5 If the output is not as indicated make ...

Page 91: ... the deck is 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm If not go through the following Make the following selections in service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST Then change the setting to make adjustments A change of 1 moves the leading edge registration by 0 1 mm A higher setting will move the image toward the leading edge F 2 121 1 Paper feed direction 2 2 24 Securing the Machine in Place 0002 6736 1 If the machine is a...

Page 92: ...sary settings in user mode date time and service mode COPIER OPTION USER When shipped from the factory the 230 V model is set to English for its language of display If needed change the setting 7 Execute the following service mode item and store the output away in the service book case COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT In the course of installing the machine be sure to record the various adjustment v...

Page 93: ...e IP address of the machine using the keypad on the control panel then press OK 3 Press the Start key The machine will indicate OK if the result of the check is good and NG if not good F 2 126 1 Result OK NG 2 IP address field 2 3 3 Using a Remote Host Address 0002 6747 You can also use a remote host address and run the PING utility to find out if the connection to the network is correct or not Th...

Page 94: ... correct by executing PING using a loopback address 1 Enter a loopback address 127 0 0 1 in the appropriate PING field If the result of the check is not good check the machine s TCP IP settings once gain and execute PING once again If the result of the check is good go to the following check 2 4 4 Using a Local Host Address 0002 6752 A local host address is the machine s IP address and it comes ba...

Page 95: ... in place as soon as developing assemblies have been removed Also be sure to fix the developing assembly fixing arm in place using a screw F 2 127 6 Tape the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever in place to protect against vibration 7 Secure the covers decks and cassettes in plase using tape 8 Place A3 copy paper on the copyboard glass and tape the ADF in place 1 If you must use a flight of sta...

Page 96: ...ou need a Card Reader Mounting Kit C1 for the installation 2 6 2 Checking the Contents 0003 0860 Card Reader C1 1 Card Reader C1 1 pc 2 RS tightening screw M4x10 1 pc 3 Toothed washer 1 pc F 2 128 Card Reader Mounting Kit C1 1 Card reader base 1 pc 2 RS tightening screw M4x10 2 pc F 2 129 C 1 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 97: ...cards that will be used by the usered As many as 300 cards starting with the number you enter will be registered 2 Turn off the host machine s main power switch 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 2 130 4 Mount the card reader base 1 using the 2 included screws 2 F 2 131 5 Route the harness 1 of the card reader through the hole 2 in the card reader base F 2 132 1 2 2 1 1 2...

Page 98: ...ddle and connect the connector 1 F 2 134 8 Cut the section 1 of the right cover upper indicated in the figure using nippers F 2 135 9 Mount the right cover upper you removed in step 3 10 Turn on the main power switch and check that a message has appeared asking for a control card 11 Insert a control card and check to see that the machine is ready to make copies 1 2 3 1 1 ...

Page 99: ...LL CARD 2 Make the following selections in Additional Function system control settings network settings TCP IP settings IP address then set up the following IP address gateway address subnet mask Take care If you fail to register system control group and system control ID No you will not be able to perform register card to device as part of NSA setup work 3 Under system administrator info of Addit...

Page 100: ... the local authorities 2 The host machine must have properly been installed 3 The host machine s power plug must be disconnected 4 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 5 The setup data for the controller must be saved to a PC at the service station 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the top cover 1 of the controller and detach the cover F 2 136 2 Connect the connector 1 of th...

Page 101: ...e host machine s rear cover upper F 2 138 4 Connect the cable 1 of the controller to the host machine s connector 2 F 2 139 5 Mount the controller 1 to the host machine s rear cover upper using 4 screws 2 Use the screws that come with the controller F 2 140 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 ...

Page 102: ...und on the PCB to the ON side so that the communication between the controller and the host machine will be in IPC mode F 2 142 8 If IC6 1 is found on the PCB shift bit 7 of the DIP switch SW2 7 2 to the ON side otherwise shift the bit to the OFF side F 2 143 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1...

Page 103: ...el to 16 dBm ON OFF set the modem signal transmission level to 14 dBm SW3 1 see right OFF ON set the modem signal transmission level to 12 dBm SW3 2 ON ON set the modem signal transmission level to 10 dBm SW3 3 OFF keep it to OFF at all tiems SW3 4 ON use it to set the line setting to touch tone OFF use it to set the line setting to dial pulse SW3 5 ON use it to set the dial pulse speed to 20 PPS ...

Page 104: ...the PCB as shown in the table then press the push switch SW4 2 A press on the push switch SW4 2 causes LED 3 3 red to go on T 2 2 F 2 146 SW2 bits Setting SW2 1 OFF SW2 2 OFF SW2 3 ON SW2 4 ON SW2 5 OFF SW2 6 OFF SW2 7 See step 8 SW2 8 OFF LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 ...

Page 105: ...cating that the RAM has been initialized T 2 3 F 2 147 13 Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch SW2 6 1 on the PCB to the OFF position F 2 148 SW2 bits Settings SW2 1 OFF SW2 2 OFF SW2 3 OFF SW2 4 ON SW2 5 OFF SW2 6 ON SW2 7 See step 8 SW 8 OFF LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 2 3 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4...

Page 106: ...ller F 2 149 15 Call the service station and ask for initial setup work for the controller When a call arrives LED4 red 1 starts to flash F 2 150 16 Call the service station and check if the initial setup for the controller has ended If the work has failed go through steps 10 through 12 to initialize the RAM and start the setup work once again Be sure to contact the service station to find out if ...

Page 107: ...lashing will cancel the transmission F 2 151 18 Check to see that the communication between the controller and its host machine is normal Connect the host machine s power plug and turn on the power switch then check to see that LED2 orange 2 flashes F 2 152 19 Press the Start key on the host machine then check that LED3 pink flashes each time delivery is made F 2 153 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 I...

Page 108: ...r and record the new switch settings 21 Fix the top cover 2 of the controller in place using 2 screws 3 When doing so check to be sure that the cable of the power supply unit is fixed in place to the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the top cover 2 F 2 154 3 2 3 1 ...

Page 109: ...nstalling the Original Tray 2 8 1 Checking the Contents 0002 6801 1 Original holder 1 pc 2 Stepped screw M4 2 pc F 2 155 2 8 2 Installation 0002 6754 1 Fit the 2 stepped screws 2 in the right cover upper 1 F 2 156 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 110: ...Chapter 2 2 52 2 Hook the original holder 1 on the stepped screws you fitted in step 1 F 2 157 1 ...

Page 111: ...it 1 pc 2 Control key 1 pc 3 Binding screw M4x6 1 pc F 2 158 2 9 2 Installation 0002 6756 1 Turn off the control panel power switch 2 Turn off the main power switch 3 Disconnect the power plug 4 Disconnect the reader communications cable 1 5 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the right cover upper rear 3 F 2 159 1 2 3 1 2 3 ...

Page 112: ... the right cover upper rear indicated in the figure F 2 160 7 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the plate 2 F 2 161 8 Fit the protrusion 1 of the key switch into the plate 2 then fix it in place using the included screw 3 F 2 162 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 113: ...Chapter 2 2 55 9 Route the harness 1 of the key switch through the wire saddle 2 F 2 163 10 Connect the connector 1 of the key switch F 2 164 1 2 1 ...

Page 114: ... Connect the power plug and turn on the main power switch 14 Start service mode and make the following selections COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL KEY then enter 1 15 Turn off and then on the main power switch 16 Check to see that a message has appeared asking for the control key 17 Insert the control key and check to make sure that the machine is ready to make copies 2 1 2 ...

Page 115: ...Chapter 3 Basic Operation ...

Page 116: ......

Page 117: ... 3 1 3 1 2 Arrangement of the Major PCBs 3 3 3 1 3 DC Controller 3 4 3 2 Basic Sequence 3 6 3 2 1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On 3 6 3 2 2 Basic Sequence of Control During Printing full color 3 8 3 2 3 Basic Sequence of Operation During Printing mono color 3 9 ...

Page 118: ......

Page 119: ...d consists of the following 5 functional blocks laser exposure system image formation system pickup feed system fixing delivery system printer control system F 3 1 1 Reader Unit A Original Exposure System 1 original 2 scanning lamp 3 optical system 4 CCD analog processor PCB B Reader Control System 5 reader controller PCB 7 8 9 11 10 12 6 22 5 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 17 21 System HDD 3 2 1 4 A B G H ...

Page 120: ...assembly 12 intermediate transfer belt ITB E Pickup Feeding System 13 pickup control assembly 14 transfer assembly 15 lower feeding assembly 16 left deck 17 right deck 18 cassette 3 19 cassette 4 F Fixing Delivery System 20 fixing assembly 21 reversing assembly G Printer Control System 22 DC controller PCB 3 System Unit H System Control Block 23 Main controller PCB Accessory I optional board J sid...

Page 121: ...aser drive PCB 9 BD PCB 10 HVT1 PCB 11 HVT2 PCB 12 HVT3 PCB 13 Pickup driver PCB 14 Fixing feeding driver PCB The arrows in the figure indicate connections of PCB not the direction of signals J1802 J1105 J116 J1135 J1130 J1301 J1204 J1203 J122 J252 253 J1201 1202 J1810 J251 J121 J250 J119 J115 J123 J127 J1212 J2118 J1101 J1104 J353 J1102 1134 J1901 1902 J1601 1603 J1111B J1501 J1133 J1119B J1701 J...

Page 122: ...ssed by pulse width modulation IC29 ASIC1 controls the laser driver high voltage mechanisms fixing control mechanisms and motors IC35 CPU controls printing sequence high voltage mechanisms finisher interface with the controller and various loads sensor clutch solenoid IC40 Flash ROM stores firmware IC41 ASIC2 controls communication between finisher and CPU IC47 RAM stores settings data e g service...

Page 123: ...cessory 2 Side paper deck accessory 3 Motors 4 Main controller PCB 5 Loads sensor clutch solenoid 6 Laser drive PCB 7 BD PCB 8 HVT 9 Fixing assembly IC35 CPU IC29 ASIC1 BATI IC47 IC40 Flash ROM IC41 ASIC2 IC21 PWM IC 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 ...

Page 124: ...C SREADY scanner ready from when shading correction ends unit the Start key is pressed or the main power switch is turned off WMUPR warm up rotation with the drive system starting up until the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C that of the pressure roller reaches 140 deg C and that of the external heating roller reaches 225 deg C PSTBY print standby the machine is ready to accept t...

Page 125: ...ature the fixing roller is lower than 100 deg C potential control primary transfer ATVC secondary transfer ATVC D max control D half control when the power is turned on with its color print counter reading 500 or higher WMUP WMUPR PSTBY 200 degrees 2 1 6 About 510sec Shading correction SREADY STBY Shading position 1 1 3 4 5 Scanner motor M501 Scanning lamp LA1 Scanner HP sensor PS501 Fixing main h...

Page 126: ...Y Y M M C Bk C Bk PRINT LSTR 6 1 2 4 5 200 degrees 170 degrees 225 degrees 8 9 10 7 3 reading book 1 A4 original printing A4 plain paper single sided full color 1 print Start key ON Laser scanner motor M1 PVREQ signal Laser Drum ITB motor M2 Primary charging bias Grid bias Developing rotary motor M5 Black developing bias Color developing bias Pre transfer charging bias Primary transfer bias Second...

Page 127: ...ng roller 9 external heating roller brought into contact with the fixing roller 10 external heating roller moved away from the fixing roller 3 2 3 Basic Sequence of Operation During Printing mono color 0004 7834 A4 Mono color 1 print Right deck T 3 3 Period Description PSTBY print standby The machine is ready to accept the copy print request signal PINTR initial rotation from when the machine has ...

Page 128: ...STR 5 1 3 4 200 degrees 170 degrees 225 degrees 7 8 9 6 2 Laser scanner motor M1 PVREQ signal Laser Drum ITB motor M2 Primary charging bias Grid bias Developing rotary motor M5 Black developing bias Color developing bias Pre transfer charging bias Primary transfer bias Secondary transfer bias Right deck pickup motor M17 Deck right pickup solenoid SL6 Right deck pull off motor M14 Manual feed pre r...

Page 129: ...Chapter 4 Main Controller ...

Page 130: ......

Page 131: ...ge Data fax transmission 4 25 4 6 5 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions 4 26 4 6 6 Flow of Image Data PDL function 4 27 4 7 Parts Replacement Procedure 4 28 4 7 1 Controller Box 4 28 4 7 1 1 Removing the Left Cover upper 4 28 4 7 1 2 Removing the Delivery Cover 4 28 4 7 1 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 4 28 4 7 1 4 Removing the Rear Cover upper 4 28 4 7 1 5 Removing the Controller Box Co...

Page 132: ...r upper 4 40 4 7 6 2 Removing the Delivery Cover 4 40 4 7 6 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 4 40 4 7 6 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 4 41 4 7 6 5 Removing the UFR Board 4 41 4 7 7 Ethernet Board 4 41 4 7 7 1 Removing the Rear Cover upper 4 41 4 7 7 2 Removing the Delivery Cover 4 42 4 7 7 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 4 42 4 7 7 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 4 42 4 7 7 5 Removing t...

Page 133: ...r PCB main controls the system memory and printer output image processing Main controller PCB sub processes reader input images Expansion bus PCB controls the color LCD and card reader interface SRAM PCB retains service mode settings and HDD control data using SRAM Image memory SDRAM stores image data temporarily BOOTROM stores the boot program HDD stores the system software retains Box fax functi...

Page 134: ...ain controller PCB main DC control PCB Main controller PCB sub Expansion bus PCB HDD Image memory SDRAM system control printer output image processing BOOT ROM Reader unit Printer unit SRAM PCB Reader input image processing ...

Page 135: ...B sub connection slot J1103 image conversion board connection slot J1104 USB interface board TokenRing connection slot J1105 UFR board OPEN I F board connection slot J1106 Ethernet board connection slot J1107 image memory SDRAM 512 MB standard J1108 image memory SDRAM 256 MB optional for 100 V model or standard for 120 230 V model J1112 boot ROM connection slot HDD0 hard disk connection connector ...

Page 136: ...olution conversion function and binary processing function IC15 controls the conversion of 4 bit serial image data coming from IC9 into 8 bit parallel image data keeps track of video count IC23 CPU system control raster JPEG compression decompression network controller PCI bus controller ROM RAM controller serial communication controller IC31 I O processing of signals IC35 HDD controller ...

Page 137: ...he main controller PCB sub grouped according to jack IC F 4 3 T 4 4 T 4 5 Jack No Description J1302 connector for reader unit communication IC No Description IC15 controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit IC17 controls indication of images read by the scanner IC17 IC15 J1302 ...

Page 138: ...SRAM PCB 0002 0690 The following is a discussion of the major control functions of the SRAM indicated with reference to ICs F 4 5 Jack No Description J1403 connector for the SRAM PCB IC No Description IC8 LCD controller IC10 NE controller coin vendor interface ASIC for card reader connection BAT backup battery for SRAM IC8 IC12 IC10 J1403 BAT1 Face Back IC3 IC2 IC1 ...

Page 139: ...ion settings data Partition Description DOSDEV stores general use data FSTDEV stores image data DOSDEV2 stores thumbnail display data for image data FSTPDEV stores image data DOSDEV3 stores general use files temporarily e g PDL spool PDLDEV stores PDL related files font registration form ICCProfile PDL color correction information file DOSDEV4 stores user data address book transfer settings BOOTDE...

Page 140: ...le LCD indication control HDD BOOTDEV RUI language module remote UI control HDD BOOTDEV Boot machine startup BootROM DIMM G3FAX G3 fax control G3 fax board DIMM Dcon DC controller control DC control PCB hardwired flash ROM Rcon reader controller control reader controller PCB hardwired flash ROM HDD Main controller PCB main RCON BOOT G3FAX DCON BOOTDEV BOOTDEV SYSTEM RUI Language G3 fax unit DC con...

Page 141: ... memory SDRAM of the main controller PCB for use as instructed by the boot program of the boot ROM The following screen remains on the control panel white the CPU is reading the system memory from the HDD into the image memory SDRAM with the bar indicating the progress of the startup sequence F 4 8 Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated The CPU is accessing the HDD and t...

Page 142: ...al 2 When the self diagnostic program ends normally the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the boot program to read the system software from the HDD writing it to the system area of the image memory SDRAM Image Memory SDRAM Area interval 3 The machine initializes its various parts using the system software written into memory by the boot program i e I F settings for the main controller When a...

Page 143: ...access to program at time of execution Main controller PCB main Self diagnosis program being executed Image memory SDRAM CPU HDD System area Image data area Boot ROM Main controller PCB main Self diagnosis program Boot program access to program at time of execution flow of system program System software Boot Program in Execution ...

Page 144: ... at time of startup Remedy Turn off the main power and check the connection of the 2 types of cables power IDE connecting to the HDD then turn on the power When doing so check to see if the HDD rotates and if the power is supplied 02 The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the main controller main in BOOT DEV Remedy 03 The machine detects a read error sector while it is reading ...

Page 145: ...red an HDD contact fault or operating system error Remedy Turn off the main power and check the 2 types of cable power IDE connecting to the HDD then turn on the main power While doing so check to see if the HDD rotates and if power is supplied 11 21 The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault Remedy Turn off the main power and check the 2 types of cable power IDE connecting to the HDD then t...

Page 146: ...atting of DOSDEV4 using the Service Support Tool 3 When done turn off and then on the main power D 1 Replace the main controller main board 2 Remove the image memory SDRAM and the boot ROM from the previous board and mount them on the new board E 1 Start up the machine in safe mode i e turn on the power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys 2 Format the HDD ALL using the Service Support Tool and downloa...

Page 147: ...selections and enter CHK TYPE 2 Make the selections and press the OK key to execute COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CHECK 3 When done turn off and then on the main power J 1 Make the following selections and enter 4 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 2 Make the following selections and press the OK key to execute COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CHECK 1 to 5 min 3 When done turn off and then on the main power Tak...

Page 148: ... 4 14 Code Detail Possible Cause Description Remedy E609 Samsung HDD related error code 0000 at time of start up there is no increase in temperature to a specific level Replace the HDD 0001 at time of sleep recovery the temperature does not reach a specific level Turn off and then on the main power supply If resetting fails replace the HDD ...

Page 149: ...1 Overview of the Flow of Image Data 0003 2506 The following shows the flow of image data when the foregoing functions are used F 4 12 SEND FAX PullScan E Mail PDL Print BOX PC Original Copy A A A Print output Scan Image data Other iR machine ...

Page 150: ...uction of the modules associated with these mechanisms F 4 13 SRAM PCB Expansion bus PCB Reader controller PCB Interface PCB Main controller PCB main Processes image data collected by the reader unit image memory program temporary storage DC control PCB Main controller PCB sub Reader Input Image Processing Block Reader unit SDRAM HDD Processes image data from the reader unit for output to the prin...

Page 151: ...onventional input masking executes color correction for the CCD RGB filters Hereafter Bk signals only in the case of mono color mode anti see through BE Bk generation mono color framing blanking frame erasing Input direct mapping edge emphasis smoothing RGB phase correction Input y correction ACS identification black character identification Image area image signal generation IC15 IC17 IC12 Main c...

Page 152: ...us data F 4 15 RGB 24 4 image area signal SDRAM HDD PC PDL input Rotation Color conversion Binary processing JPEG compression JPEG compression JPEG decompression JPEG decompression Main controller PCB main IC23 IC9 RGB 24 IC12 Main controller PCB sub Reader unit Y M C Bk for fax transmission Resolution conversion magnification ...

Page 153: ...tion framing blanking background removal AE Bk generation output direct mapping RGB to CMY conversion output gamma correction Best screen selection Smoothing RGB 24 area signal Y M C Bk 24 area signal If ACS identifies the original as being black and white the machine generates the Bk signal here Otherwise the data is let to pass through the block The text area is subjected to UCR processing The c...

Page 154: ...0 7755 The following shows the flow of image data when copier functions are used F 4 17 RGB 24 RGB 24 SDRAM HDD Reader unit Main controller PCB sub Main controller PCB main DC controller PCB image area signal JPEG compression Rotation Color conversion JPEG decompression Magnification ...

Page 155: ...e following shows the flow of image data when Box functions are used F 4 18 RGB 24 RGB 24 SDRAM HDD Reader unit Main controller PCB sub Main controller PCB main DC controller PCB image area signal JPEG compression JPEG decompression Decompression conversion Rotation ...

Page 156: ...age data when SEND functions are used F 4 19 RGB 24 RGB 24 SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB main Main controller PCB sub Reader unit Image conversion board for B Wimage image area signal Rotation Resolution conversion JPEG compression JPEG decompression Ethernet board Binary processing MMR compression ...

Page 157: ... of image data when fax transmission functions are used F 4 20 RGB 24 RGB SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB main Main controller PCB sub Reader unit Image conversion board Fax board image area signal JPEG decompression MMR compression JPEG compression Resolution conversion Rotation Binary processing ...

Page 158: ...w for Fax Reception Functions 0000 7766 The following is the flow of image data used for fax reception functions F 4 21 SDRAM HDD DC controller PCB Main controller PCB main Resolution conversion Rotation Image conversion board Fax board ...

Page 159: ...ons are used F 4 22 JPEG compression UFR board Open interface board 1 SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB main IC23 IC12 Main controller PCB sub Reader unit JPEG compression DC controller PCB Printer output image processing block IC9 LIPS data RGB RGB RGB CMYK CMYK Display list data GDI UFR LIPS PS PS pint server unit 1 PS data ...

Page 160: ...Removing the Delivery Cover 0003 8279 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 4 24 4 7 1 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 8289 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 4 25 4 7 1 4 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 8309 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 4 26 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 ...

Page 161: ...emoving the Controller Box Cover 0003 5527 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the controller box cover 2 F 4 28 F 4 29 4 7 1 6 Removing the Controller Box 0002 9795 1 Disconnect the 9 connectors 1 F 4 30 F 4 31 2 Free the harness from the 3 harness retainers 1 F 4 32 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 162: ...in controller box in place F 4 34 F 4 35 F 4 36 4 Slide the main controller box 1 toward the delivery side to detach F 4 37 During removal mounting be sure to take care not to damage the connector 2 found at the joint to the DC controller PCB F 4 38 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 163: ...4 7 2 2 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 8290 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 4 40 4 7 2 3 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 8310 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 4 41 3 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 4 42 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 ...

Page 164: ...oller PCB main 0003 6139 1 Disconnect the connector 1 of the controller fan F 4 45 2 Remove the boot ROM 1 and the image memory SDRAM 2 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 3 F 4 46 4 Remove the 2 screws each 1 3 5 and detach the following expansion bus PCB 2 main controller PCB sub 4 Ethernet board 6 F 4 47 5 Disconnect the 9 connectors 1 F 4 48 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 4 6 5 1 1 ...

Page 165: ...Chapter 4 4 33 F 4 49 6 Free the harness from the 3 harness retainers 1 F 4 50 F 4 51 7 Remove the 9 screws 1 used to hold the main controller box in place F 4 52 F 4 53 F 4 54 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 166: ...he DC controller PCB F 4 56 9 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the main controller PCB 2 F 4 57 F 4 58 4 7 2 6 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB main 0003 6168 After mounting the main controller PCB main be sure to attach all PCBs you may have removed before replacement 1 boot ROM 2 image memory SDRAM 3 expansion bus PCB 4 main controller PCB sub 5 Ethernet board F 4 59 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 167: ... detach the delivery cover 2 F 4 61 4 7 3 2 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 8291 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 4 62 4 7 3 3 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 8311 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 4 63 4 3 5 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 ...

Page 168: ... 1 and detach the controller box cover 2 F 4 65 F 4 66 4 7 3 5 Removing the Main Controller PCB sub 0003 5504 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the main controller PCB sub 2 F 4 67 4 7 4 Expansion Bus PCB 4 7 4 1 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 8312 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 4 68 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 ...

Page 169: ...rews 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 4 70 4 7 4 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 8292 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 4 71 4 7 4 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0003 5531 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the controller box cover 2 F 4 72 F 4 73 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 170: ...move the 2 screws 1 and detach the expansion bus PCB 2 F 4 75 4 7 4 7 After Replacing the Expansion PCB 0003 5557 Mount the SRAM PCB 1 removed from the existing PCB to the newly mounted expansion bus PCB 2 F 4 76 4 7 5 SRAM PCB 4 7 5 1 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 8313 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 4 77 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 ...

Page 171: ...l image data in Box to be lost Be sure to obtain the user s consent before starting the work Be sure that the SRAM board you are using is a new one The machine will be likely to malfunction if you use a RAM that has been used in a different printer unit 1 Replace the SRAM board and turn on the main power The machine will execute automatic initialization 2 See that the machine indicates the message...

Page 172: ... F 4 82 3 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 4 83 4 7 6 2 Removing the Delivery Cover 0003 8284 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 4 84 4 7 6 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 8293 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 4 85 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 173: ...4 87 4 7 6 5 Removing the UFR Board 0003 5555 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the UFR board 2 F 4 88 4 7 7 Ethernet Board 4 7 7 1 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 8315 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 4 89 3 Remove the 6 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 4 90 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 ...

Page 174: ...003 8294 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 4 92 4 7 7 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0003 5549 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the controller box cover 2 F 4 93 F 4 94 4 7 7 5 Removing the Ethernet Board 0003 5550 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the Ethernet board 2 F 4 95 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 175: ... Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 4 97 4 7 8 2 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0003 5852 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the controller box cover 2 F 4 98 F 4 99 4 7 8 3 Removing the HDD 0003 5853 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove heater 6 screws 2 then detach the HDD box 3 F 4 100 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 ...

Page 176: ...ad the system software as for A above thereafter you need to perform additional steps 1 Format the HDD 2 Download the system software 3 Make the following selections COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD 4 Enter a card number Enter the number of the first card of those to be used for group control and press the OK key For instance if the group will be using numbers between 1 through 1000 enter 1 5 Turn off...

Page 177: ...he operation is normal Using a user card that has been registered to the NSA make copies then check that the number of copies you have made are associated with the card you have used in the machine 4 7 9 Controller Fan 4 7 9 1 Removing the Delivery Cover 0003 8286 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 4 103 4 7 9 2 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 8295 1 Disconnect the conne...

Page 178: ...Chapter 4 4 46 ...

Page 179: ...Chapter 5 Original Exposure System ...

Page 180: ......

Page 181: ... Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification 5 13 5 3 4 3 Overview of Operation 5 15 5 3 5 Dirt Sensor Control 5 16 5 3 5 1 Stream Reading Dust Detection Control 5 16 5 3 5 2 White Plate Dust Detection Control 5 18 5 3 6 Image Processing 5 20 5 3 6 1 Overview 5 20 5 3 6 2 CCD Drive 5 21 5 3 6 3 CCD Gain Correction Offset Correction 5 21 5 3 6 4 CCD Output A D Conversion 5 21 5 3 6 ...

Page 182: ...7 5 4 8 ADF Open Close Sensor 5 37 5 4 8 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 5 37 5 4 8 2 Removing the ADF Open Closed Sensor 5 38 5 4 9 Scanner HP Sensor 5 39 5 4 9 1 Removing the Rear Cover 5 39 5 4 9 2 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor 5 40 5 4 10 Original Sensor 5 41 5 4 10 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 5 41 5 4 10 2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover 5 41 5 4 10 3 Removing the Original Siz...

Page 183: ... scanner HP sensor PS501 scanner HP Lens single focus fixed Magnification copyboard mode 100 ADF mode 100 main scanning direction image processing by controller block sub scanning direction image processing by controller block Scanner drive control No 1 No 2 mirror base by pulse motor M501 Original scanning lamp 1 activation control by inverter circuit Activation control 2 error detection control ...

Page 184: ...using the ADF open closed sensor 5 deg ADF open closed sensor 2 PS503 detects the size with the ADF at 25 deg or less Original size sensor AB configuration detects the size in sub scanning direction AB configuration Original size sensor inch configuration detects the size in sub scanning direction inch configuration Mirror No 1 No 2 No 3 mirror Interface PCB Anti condensation sensor Original scann...

Page 185: ... CCD No 1 mirror No 1 mirror base No 2 mirror No 2 mirror base No 3 mirror HP Image HP leading edge Size detection Stream reading position start position forward reverse Scanner motor Light blocking plate No 2 mirror base Original scanning lamp No 1 mirror base Scanner HP sensor ...

Page 186: ... Original scanning lamp Original scanning lamp activation control CCD unit Scanner motor Scanner motor drive control Scanner HP sensor ADF open closed sensor 1 ADF open closed sensor 2 Reader controller PCB Interface PCB To printer main controller Reader cocling FAN To ADF J203 J202 J210 J209 IC1 CPU IC2 J201 DF J204 J207 J205 J206 J208 IC3 Original size sensor AB configuration CCD unit Inverter P...

Page 187: ...he ADF image signal input J204 used for connection with the CCD unit J205 used for communication with the CCD unit J206 used for connection with the inverter PCB J207 used for connection with the original size sensor AB configuration J208 used for connection with the original size sensor inch configuration J209 not used J210 not used IC Description IC1 CPU holds boot program IC2 ASCI built in RAM ...

Page 188: ...ding fixed shading white plate dust detection control shading correction HP shading position 1 HP positioning 2 CCD LIVE control gain correction 3 move to shift shading start position Start position Shading position Image leading edge Original size detection position 1 shifts only if the copyboard ADF is open 4 shift shading 5 fixed shading white plate dust detection shading correction 2 controls ...

Page 189: ... KILL control 1 Forward Reverse shift shading fixed shading white plate dust detection control shading correction 1 controls by turning on off the power of the CCD and the circuitry around it for power saving and for protection against overheating 1 HP positioning 2 move to shift shading start position 6 Original scann 7 HPposition move to shift Start position Shading position Image leading edge S...

Page 190: ... detection control shading correction 1 controls by turning on off the power of the CCD and the circuitry around it for power saving and for protection against overheating CCD KILL control 1 1 HP positioning 2 move to shift shading start position 6 original stream reading scan 7 shifts to point of dust detection Stream reading position Shading position Image leading edge Stop position Original siz...

Page 191: ...n reference to the detection of the state open closed of the ADF 4 ADF Open Closed Sensor 2 PS503 Detection Signal used in reference to the detection of the state open closed of the ADF 5 3 1 2 Controlling the Scanner Motor 0002 5138 The following shows the construction of the mechanisms used to control the scanner motor The motor driver on the interface PCB controls the rotation activation deacti...

Page 192: ...ite 234 mm sec full color 234 mm sec SEND black and white 468 mm sec full color 234 mm sec Reader controller PCB Motor driver Interface PCB 24V 15V J306 A A B B CPU 1 2 3 4 6 5 J308 J307 J202 J203 Scanner motor M501 1 1 Scanner motor control signal Start position Acceleration Image leading edge Normal speed Image trailing edge Deceleration Stop Shift speed Shift length 1 2 3 4 1 Acceleration Zone ...

Page 193: ...erating as follows 1 Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp The scanning lamp is turned on or off by the drive signal XE ON generated by the CPU of the reader controller PCB When the signal is generated the inverter PCB generates high frequency high voltage using the activation control circuit from the drive voltage 24V supplied by the reader controller PCB thus turning on the scanning lamp 2 Detect...

Page 194: ...5 3 4 1 Identifying the Size of Originals 0002 5146 The machine identifies the size of an original based on combinations of measurements taken of the light reflected by specific points using a reflection type sensor and CCD In consideration of possible displacement of the original when the ADF is closed the machine uses a 2 point CCD check Main Scanning Direction by CCD AB configuration 8 point me...

Page 195: ...ing direction the machine checks the presence absence of an original with reference to the CCD output at 2 points near the point of measurement F 5 18 T 5 6 Result of measurement Result of detection A B no no original absent yes no original present no yes original present yes yes original present Point of original detection 3 Point of original detection 4 Point of original detection 1 Print of ori...

Page 196: ...d at the rear while the presence of an original is indicated at the front the machine will give priority to the indication at the front i e presence of an original F 5 19 T 5 7 Note Change in the Signal ADF open to closed change no other yes Point of detection yes no Size identified 1 yes yes 2 no yes 3 yes yes 4 no no Result B5 Document size sensor 1 CCD original detection position Point of detec...

Page 197: ...rnal search The ADF open closed sensor 2 identifies the condition as being closed and the machine starts original size identification At this position B5 B4 A44 and A3 are excluded from the list of possible sizes The machine executes an external light search for main scanning direction it turns on the xenon lamp to check its light reflected at 4 points using the CCD for the sub scanning direction ...

Page 198: ... 5 25 F 5 26 5 3 5 Dirt Sensor Control 5 3 5 1 Stream Reading Dust Detection Control 0002 5159 The machine checks the stream reading glass and the ADF platen roller for the presence absent of dust It then changes the point of reading or executes image correction depending on the result of detection thereby avoiding reproduction of dust particles in its output images The machine executes the detect...

Page 199: ...of a job makes a change to the point of stream reading dust reading position The machine checks the light reflected by the platen roller at the reading position to see if there is dust moving to the next point if it finds dust from A to B C D and then to E 5 points max It uses the first point that is free of dust as the reading point for the next job F 5 28 Dust detection Dust detection Dust detec...

Page 200: ... OPTION BODY DFDST L2 level 1 adjustment of dust detection at job end 5 3 5 2 White Plate Dust Detection Control 0003 4293 1 Overview The machine uses a fan to cool the inside of the reader unit to prevent overheating otherwise caused by the xenon lamp in stream reading mode The fact however can cause stray dust inside the reader unit to collect on the white plate showing up as lines in output ima...

Page 201: ...on If the result of white plate dust detection indicates the presence of dust the shading coefficient of the area in question will be corrected by the coefficients of its adjacent areas during shading correction with the aim of reducing the effects of the presence of dust Thereafter shading correction will be executed using the corrected coefficient F 5 30 Detection Algorithm Correction Algorithm ...

Page 202: ...performs image processing for every RGB line using the reader controller PCB and the major functions involved are as follows 1 Analog Image processing CCD drive CCD output gain correction offset correction CCD output A D conversion F 5 32 CCD AP PCB Reader controller PCB CCD A D conversion Shading processing Analog image processing Analog image processing block Controller block Digital image proce...

Page 203: ...pixel voltage levels 5 3 6 5 Outline of Shading Correction 0002 5172 The output of the CCD may not always be uniform because of the following reasons even when the density of the original in question is uniform 1 variation in the sensitivity among individual pixels of the CCD 2 difference in the level of transmission between the center and the edge of the lens 3 difference in the intensity of ligh...

Page 204: ...ght into a digital signal by the analog image processing block on the CCD AP PCB The result i e a digital signal representing the intensity of the reflected light is sent to the shading correction circuit of the reader controller PCB as a shading coefficient The shading correction circuit in turn compares the coefficient against the target value it holds and offers the difference as the shading co...

Page 205: ...led clean it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol 5 4 2 Exposure Lamp 5 4 2 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0003 5445 1 Open the ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 37 When detaching the copyboard glass take care not to touch the white plate attached to its back Soiling can cause lines in the image If soiled clean it using ...

Page 206: ... Cover upper 0003 8274 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the left cover upper 2 F 5 40 5 4 2 5 Removing the Reader Left Cover 0003 8228 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the reader left cover 2 F 5 41 5 4 2 6 Removing the Reader Front Cover 0003 8231 1 Remove the screw 2 1 pc each from the left and right of the reader front cover 1 F 5 42 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 ...

Page 207: ...2 7 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0003 8336 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 5 45 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 3 Remove the 2 screws 2 F 5 46 4 Bend up the edge of the rubber cover 1 and remove the screws 2 pc each 2 then detach the angle guide plate F 5 47 F 5 48 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3 ...

Page 208: ...ke care not to damage the ADF open closed sensor arm 3 F 5 49 5 4 2 8 Removing the CCD Unit Cover 0003 5455 1 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the CCD unit cover 2 F 5 50 F 5 51 5 4 2 9 Removing the Scanning Lamp 0003 3135 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the cable 2 from the cable guide 3 F 5 52 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 209: ... 5 4 3 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0003 3123 1 Open the ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 55 When detaching the copyboard glass take care not to touch the white plate attached to its back Soiling can cause lines in the image If soiled clean it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol 5 4 3 2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover 00...

Page 210: ...Reader Controller PCB 0003 3122 1 Disconnect the 5 flat cables 1 and the connector 2 then remove the 4 screws 3 and detach the reader controller PCB 4 F 5 60 Disconnecting the Flat Cable Slide the locking lever 1 in the direction of the arrow then disconnect the flat cable 2 F 5 61 5 4 3 5 After Replacing the Reader Controller 0003 5467 Be sure to print out the settings using P PRINT before replac...

Page 211: ...ain scanning position adjustment COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y DF b 5 ADF stream reading CCD read position adjustment COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY STRD POS b 6 CCD unit RG GB sub scanning direction color displacement correction COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG GB b 7 factory default CD unit RG GB sub scanning color displacement correction COPIER ADJUST CCD FCCDU RG GB b 8 auto gradation correction target value COPI...

Page 212: ... Interface PCB 5 4 4 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0003 8337 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 5 64 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 3 Remove the 2 screws 2 F 5 65 4 Bend up the edge of the rubber cover 1 and remove the screws 2 pc each 2 then detach the angle guide plate F 5 66 F 5 67 5 Open the ADF fully 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3 ...

Page 213: ...d remove the 2 binding screws 2 then detach the interface PCB cover 3 F 5 69 2 Disconnect the 7 connectors 1 detach the 2 flat cables 2 and remove the 5 screws 3 then detach the interface PCB unit 4 F 5 70 How to Disconnect the Flat Cable Slide the locking lever 1 in the direction of the arrow and disconnect the flat cable 2 F 5 71 3 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the interface PCB 2 F 5 72 1 1 ...

Page 214: ... 5 73 5 4 5 Inverter PCB 5 4 5 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0003 3126 1 Open the ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 74 When detaching the copyboard glass take care not to touch the white plate attached to its back Soiling can cause lines in the image If soiled clean it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol 5 4 5 2 Removi...

Page 215: ...4 6 CCD Unit 5 4 6 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0003 3139 1 Open the ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 78 When detaching the copyboard glass take care not to touch the white plate attached to its back Soiling can cause lines in the image If soiled clean it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol 5 4 6 2 Removing the CCD U...

Page 216: ...riginal size detection unit 2 F 5 83 2 Disconnect the 2 flat cables 1 from the reader controller PCB then remove the 2 screws 2 detach the 2 leaf springs 3 and detach the CCD unit 4 F 5 84 5 4 6 5 After Replacing the CCD Unit 0003 3143 If you have replaced the CCD unit be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG to enter the correction va...

Page 217: ... the reader unit front cover with the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit 5 4 7 Scanner Motor 5 4 7 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0003 8338 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 5 86 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 3 Remove the 2 screws 2 F 5 87 4 Bend up the edge of the rubber cover 1 and remove the screws 2 pc each 2 then detach the angle guide plate F 5 88 F 5 89 2 1 30524101 C...

Page 218: ...g the Scanner Motor 0003 3130 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F 5 91 2 Detach the 2 harness retainers 2 from the back of the cover 1 to free the cover F 5 92 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the 2 springs 2 then shift the scanner motor 3 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 5 93 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the scanner motor 2 F 5 94 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1...

Page 219: ...wrap 1 of the scanner motor harness is closer to the motor side than the wire guide 2 the harness can come into contact with the rotor of the scanner motor and suffer damage Be sure that the tie wrap is closer to the interface PCB than the wire guide when mounting the scanner motor F 5 97 5 4 8 ADF Open Close Sensor 5 4 8 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0004 5163 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 5 ...

Page 220: ... each 2 then detach the angle guide plate F 5 100 F 5 101 5 Open the ADF fully 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and slide the reader rear cover 2 toward the rear to detach Take care not to damage the ADF open closed sensor arm 3 F 5 102 5 4 8 2 Removing the ADF Open Closed Sensor 0004 5164 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 5 103 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 221: ... plate 2 F 5 104 3 Free the hook 1 and detach the ADF open closed sensor 1 2 F 5 105 5 4 9 Scanner HP Sensor 5 4 9 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0004 4318 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 5 106 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 3 Remove the 2 screws 2 F 5 107 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 222: ...der rear cover 2 toward the rear to detach Take care not to damage the ADF open closed sensor arm 3 F 5 110 5 4 9 2 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor 0003 3128 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the plate 2 F 5 111 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the sensor mounting plate 2 F 5 112 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the home position sensor 1 F 5 113 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 223: ... attached to its back Soiling can cause lines in the image If soiled clean it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol 5 4 10 2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover 0003 3147 1 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the CCD unit cover 2 F 5 115 F 5 116 5 4 10 3 Removing the Original Size Sensor Unit 0003 3136 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and slide the original size detection unit 2 F 5 117 2 Disconnect the connec...

Page 224: ...sensor 1 F 5 119 5 4 11 Cooling Fan 5 4 11 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0003 8340 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 5 120 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 3 Remove the 2 screws 2 F 5 121 4 Bend up the edge of the rubber cover 1 and remove the screws 2 pc each 2 then detach the angle guide plate F 5 122 F 5 123 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 3 ...

Page 225: ...Scanner Drive Cable 5 4 12 1 Outline 0004 1353 Be sure to keep the following on hand when replacing the scanner drive cable mirror positioning tool 5 4 12 2 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0004 1355 1 Open the ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 126 When detaching the copyboard glass take care not to touch the white plate attached to...

Page 226: ...ving the Right Cover 0004 1357 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the reader right cover 2 F 5 128 5 4 12 5 Removing the Left Cover upper 0004 1359 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the left cover upper 2 F 5 129 5 4 12 6 Removing the Reader Left Cover 0004 1360 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the reader left cover 2 F 5 130 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 227: ...ont cover 1 F 5 131 F 5 132 2 Detach the reader front cover 1 in upward direction 1 F 5 133 5 4 12 8 Removing the ADF 0004 1376 1 Disconnect the communications cable 1 of the ADF from the host machine F 5 134 2 Bend up the edge of the rubber cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the angle guide plate 3 F 5 135 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 ...

Page 228: ...he machine toward the front and lift it to detach F 5 136 5 4 12 9 Removing the Control Panel 0004 1423 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 5 137 2 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the control panel 2 together with the cover F 5 138 F 5 139 F 5 140 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 229: ...ch the left glass retainer 5 F 5 141 When fitting it be sure to hold down both ends of the leaf spring A with your fingers Take care not to bend the leaf spring Be sure to fit it while forcing the left glass retainer B against the reading glass C Check to make sure that the side of the reading glass and the leaf spring D of the left glass retainer are in firm contact Otherwise dust from the readin...

Page 230: ...interface PCB cover F 5 146 7 Disconnect the 9 connectors 1 and remove the 5 screws 2 then detach the interface PCB 3 together with its base F 5 147 8 Disconnect the reader communications cable F 5 148 9 Disconnect the connector 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 10 Remove the 4 screws 3 and detach the motor cover 4 together with the harness F 5 149 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 3 4 ...

Page 231: ...sensor cover 2 F 5 151 13 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and detach the snap open band 2 then free the harness from the wire saddle 3 F 5 152 14 Free the harness from the wire saddle 1 and remove the 6 screws 2 then detach the ADF open closed sensor base 3 F 5 153 15 Remove the 24 screws 1 and detach the reader upper frame 2 F 5 154 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 232: ...ball of the cable in the hole of the drive pulley 1 and wind the cable 4 times inside 5 times outside then fix it in place using tape or the like At this time be sure that the cable fixing 2 is on the inside 2 Engage the cable on the pulleys then engage one end of the cable on the hook 3 of the left side and the other end on the hook of the right side 3 Temporarily fix the cable fixing plate 2 in ...

Page 233: ... such a way so that the tool may be used for the machine F 5 159 2 Fit the pins of the mirror positioning tool front 2 rear 3 of the mirror positioning tool into the holes 1 of the No 1 mirror base No 2 mirror base and rail F 5 160 F 5 161 3 Fully secure the ends of the cable you have temporarily fixed to the hooks of the reader frame previously 5 Detach the mirror positioning tool front rear 6 Pu...

Page 234: ...Chapter 5 5 52 ...

Page 235: ...Chapter 6 Laser Exposure ...

Page 236: ......

Page 237: ...g Direction 6 7 6 3 2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6 8 6 3 2 1 APC Control 6 8 6 3 2 2 PWM Control 6 8 6 3 3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6 9 6 3 3 1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6 9 6 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 10 6 3 4 1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 10 6 4 Parts Replacement Procedure 6 11 6 4 1 Laser Scanner Unit 6 11 6 4 1 1 Removing the Left Cover upper 6 ...

Page 238: ......

Page 239: ...ength 645 to 665 mm visible light Output 35mW Number of beams 1 Laser Scanner Motor Type of motor DC brushless Revolution 32000 rpm approx Type of bearing oil Polygon Mirror Number of facets 12 29 mm dia Control Mechanism Synchronization main scanning direction sub scanning direction Light intensity APC PWM Others laser activation deactivation 1 exposes light areas laser scanner motor laser shutte...

Page 240: ...light directing it to the BD PCB 4 BD PCB generates the BD signal 5 Laser mirror 1 reflects laser light directing it to the photosensitive drum 6 Laser mirror 2 reflects laser light directing it to the photosensitive drum 7 Laser mirror 3 reflects laser light directing it to the photosensitive drum 8 Routing mirror reflects laser light directing it to the photosensitive drum 1 5 2 Drum 6 4 7 3 8 ...

Page 241: ...PCB to form a latent static image on the photosensitive drum through the following 6 control mechanisms F 6 3 1 turns on off the laser unit 2 controls the laser light in main scanning direction 3 performs APC control 4 performs PWM control 5 controls the laser scanner motor 6 controls the laser shutter MN CON main controller PCB DC CON DC controller PCB MN CON MN CON 1 2 3 4 5 6 ASIC IC29 DC CON V...

Page 242: ...key print request signal 2 ready for image formation Memo The sub scanning direction sync signal PVREQ is used to match the leading edge of the toner image on the drum and the leading edge of the print paper The timing at which the PVREQ signal is generated differs depending on the selected color mode Full Color Mode In the case of full color mode an image must be formed in 4 colors Y M C Bk All i...

Page 243: ... by the laser driver PCB in response to the laser control signal CONT0 CNT1 coming from the DC controller PCB T 6 6 F 6 5 In standby mode the intensity setting selected in APC is canceled Laser control signal State of operation State of laser CNT0 CNT1 0 0 standby OFF 0 1 printing video signal input enabled 1 0 APC ON 1 1 forced OFF OFF DC CON J1102 CNT1 CNT0 J1901 ...

Page 244: ...following shows how the circuit operates The VIDEO signal from the main controller PCB is sent to FIFO of ASIC1 at the same time the BD sync control circuit generates the printer sync signal WCK based on the BD signal and sends the result to PWMIC and FIFO Thereafter FIFO reads the image signals in sync with the printer synch signal and sends them to PWM1C which converts the image signals into a l...

Page 245: ...ted by the ITB home position sensor is detected by the sub scanning synch control circuit at the same time the circuit generates the PVREQ signal for each color and sends the result to the main controller PCB In response the main controller PCB sends video signals to the DC controller PCB which will form an image starting at a specific point on the ITB F 6 7 1 Sub scanning sync control circuit 2 I...

Page 246: ...de until a specific level of intensity is reached F 6 8 1 Laser driver IC1 DC CON DC controller 6 3 2 2 PWM Control 0002 9880 The machine uses PWM control to determine how long the laser unit must remain on to suit the image data coming from to the main controller PCB The length of time see Memo is determined by the DC controller PCB 16 step activation patterns for each pixel Memo The relationship...

Page 247: ... specific speed The machine checks different references for speed detection to suit the state of the printer unit ultimately reducing the length of time used to control the scanner motor speed The FG signal is a detection signal used to roughly adjust the scanner motor speed and it is used at power on or during last rotation The BD signal on the other hand is a detection signal used to finely adju...

Page 248: ...y is opened When the black toner hopper assembly is opened the protrusion found on the hopper assembly releases the laser shutter causing the laser shutter to close so that the laser path is closed If the DC controller PCB identifies the front cover right cover or black toner supply cover as being open controller PCB forces the laser scanner motor and the laser unit to go off F 6 11 1 Laser light ...

Page 249: ...1 2 Removing the Delivery Cover 0003 8366 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 6 13 6 4 1 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 8367 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 6 14 6 4 1 4 Removing the HV2 PCB 0003 8368 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the cable guide 3 F 6 15 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 ...

Page 250: ...and detach the HV2 PCB 5 F 6 17 6 4 1 5 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 0003 8369 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and open the wire guide 2 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the 2 locking plates 4 F 6 18 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the grounding wire 2 4 Open the wire guide 3 and free the harness 4 5 Remove the 5 screws 5 and detach the laser driver cover 6 F 6 19 2 1 1 3 4 4 5 1 4 3 2 1 5 4 5 5...

Page 251: ...r is mounted to the hopper assembly F 6 22 Be sure to keep the hopper assembly open when fitting the laser scanner unit into the machine so that the laser shutter will not interfere with the actuator After replacing the laser scanner unit be sure to go through the following 1 Make the following selections in service mode and press the OK key COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC 2 Turn off and then on the main ...

Page 252: ...revent damage to the surface of th front cover when the cover is released F 6 25 4 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 5 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 6 26 6 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in position 7 Press the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 6 27 8 Remove the screw 1 from the lower right and detach the fr...

Page 253: ...lack toner supply cover 1 F 6 30 12 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 6 31 13 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 6 32 14 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 6 33 15 Slide out the grip 1 found on the edge of the dust blocking glass to detach the glass for the machine F 6 34 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 254: ...uring the work F 6 37 19 Take out the process unit cover 1 from the shipping box and detach the drum stop tool 2 from the back of the cover F 6 38 20 While forcing the drum stop tool 3 against the drum fixing member 2 of the drum shaft 1 remove the fixing screw 4 Be sure to match the protrusion 5 of the drum fixing member and the protrusion 6 of the drum stop tool F 6 39 21 Using a pair of precisi...

Page 255: ...e arrow F 6 42 24 Slide o out the fixing feeding assembly 1 F 6 43 25 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 6 44 26 While lifting both ends 1 of the process unit slightly fully slide out the process unit 2 to the front F 6 45 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 256: ...he screw 1 and detach the grounding wire 2 31 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach th side plate 4 F 6 48 32 While holding the mirror cleaning tool 1 as shown insert it into the slit 2 F 6 49 33 Turn the mirror cleaning tool 1 90 deg clockwise as shown step 1 34 Move the mirror cleaning tool 1 to the front and the rear as shown to clean the laser mirror 2 step 2 F 6 50 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 3 4 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 257: ...Chapter 7 Image Formation ...

Page 258: ......

Page 259: ...leaning Mechanism 7 34 7 5 5 Pre Exposure LED 7 36 7 6 Developing Rotary 7 37 7 6 1 Overview of the Developing Rotary 7 37 7 6 2 Controlling the Developing Rotary 7 38 7 7 Developing Unit 7 41 7 7 1 Construction of the Color Developing Assembly 7 41 7 7 2 Controlling the Color Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism 7 42 7 7 3 Controlling the Color Developing Bias 7 43 7 7 4 Color Toner Supply 7 44 7 ...

Page 260: ...ng Assembly 7 84 7 11 3 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 7 84 7 11 3 2 Freeing the Front Cover 7 84 7 11 3 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 7 85 7 11 3 4 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 7 86 7 11 4 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor 7 86 7 11 4 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 7 86 7 11 4 2 Freeing the Front Cover 7 87 7 11 4 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 7 88 7 11 4 4 Removing the P...

Page 261: ...Process Unit 7 115 7 11 10 9 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 7 118 7 11 10 10 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 7 118 7 11 10 11 Removing the Black Developing Unit 7 119 7 11 10 12 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 7 120 7 11 10 13 Points to Note When Mounting the Photosensitive Drum 7 121 7 11 10 14 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater 7 121 7 11 10 15 Removing the Dru...

Page 262: ...he Right Cover upper 7 154 7 11 16 2 Releasing the Front Cover 7 155 7 11 16 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 7 156 7 11 16 4 Removing the Hopper Assembly 7 156 7 11 16 5 Removing the Hopper Stirring Motor 7 157 7 11 17 Color Developing Assembly 7 157 7 11 17 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 7 157 7 11 17 2 Releasing the Front Cover 7 157 7 11 17 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 7 158 7 11 17 4 Slid...

Page 263: ... 23 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Drive Assembly 7 197 7 11 23 6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 7 198 7 11 23 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 7 198 7 11 23 8 Sliding Out the Process Unit 7 199 7 11 23 9 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Scoop Up Sheet 7 202 7 11 23 10 Mounting the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Scoop Up Sheet 7 202 7 11 24 Secondary Transf...

Page 264: ...or 7 225 7 11 31 Primary Transfer Roller 7 226 7 11 31 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 7 226 7 11 31 2 Releasing the Front Cover 7 226 7 11 31 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 7 227 7 11 31 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 7 228 7 11 31 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 7 228 7 11 31 6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 7 229 7 11 31 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Int...

Page 265: ...atic Eliminator 7 254 7 11 36 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 7 254 7 11 36 2 Releasing the Front Cover 7 254 7 11 36 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 7 255 7 11 36 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 7 256 7 11 36 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 7 256 7 11 36 6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 7 257 7 11 36 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 7...

Page 266: ...41 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 7 284 7 11 41 8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 7 285 7 11 41 9 Remove the Patch Image Reading Unit 7 285 7 11 41 10 Removing the Idler Roller 7 286 7 11 41 11 Remove the Idler Roller 7 286 7 11 42 Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid 7 287 7 11 42 1 Remove the Right Cover upper 7 287 7 11 42 2 Releasing the Front Cover 7 287 7 11 4...

Page 267: ...ning mechanism by blade in contact Speed of process 276 mm sec Primary Charging Assembly Method of charging by corona Method of cleaning wire auto cleaning Pre Exposure system Method of exposure by LED array Mono Color Developing Assembly Diameter of developing cylinder 24 5 mm Method of development dry 1 component Toner magnetic negative Toner level detection inside developing assembly yes ...

Page 268: ... Toner non magnetic negative Toner level detection inside developing assembly no Toner Cartridge Toner level detection mono color by piezoelectric oscillator sensor Toner level detection color by optical sensor Toner amount Y 210g approx M 210g approx C 210g approx Bk 2000g Bk Intermediate Transfer Assembly Component intermediate transfer belt ITB Source of drive by drum ITB motor Cleaning mechani...

Page 269: ...harging Assembly Method of charging by corona Method of cleaning wire auto cleaning Image Stabilization Control Item Description Dmax control determines best developing bias ATR control determines toner supply amount ATVC control determines best transfer bias level Potential control determines best primary grid bias level Dhalf control determines best gradation control printer PASCAL control deter...

Page 270: ...nit 6 Pre transfer charging assembly 7 Secondary transfer outsider roller 8 ITB cleaner assembly 9 Color toner cartridge Y 10 Color developing assembly Y 11 Color toner cartridge C 12 Color developing assembly C 13 Color developing assembly M 14 Color toner cartridge M 15 Black developing assembly 16 Toner collection roller 17 Potential sensor 18 Black toner hopper 19 ITB inside cleaner end scrape...

Page 271: ... p p DC bias level 290V Stray Toner Collection Roller Bias method of charging by roller target of charging toner collection roller DC bias level 1 0kV Pre Transfer Charging Bias method of charging by corona target of charging pre transfer charging wire AC bias level 8 3kV Vp p DC bias level 1 8kV 300yA Primary Transfer Bias method of charging by corona target of charging primary transfer roller DC...

Page 272: ...e transfer charging wire 2 Color developing cylinder 3 Stray toner collection roller 4 Black developing cylinder 5 Primary charging wire 6 Grid wire 7 Primary transfer static eliminator 8 Primary transfer roller 9 Secondary transfer outside roller 4 5 6 1 2 3 7 8 9 ...

Page 273: ...nsitive drum thus turning the latent image into a visible image The machine s black toner is a magnetic 1 component developer while its color toner is non magnetic 2 component developer development of both makes is based on toner projection 3 Transfer Block In this block the toner image on the surface of the photosensitive drum is moved to print paper by way of the ITB Step 5 pre transfer charging...

Page 274: ...emoved from the photosensitive drum by way of cleaning the photosensitive drum F 7 3 4 Fixing Block 3 Transfer Block 1 Static Image Formation Block Delivery 9 Registration Pickup ITB Photosensitive drum 7 5 ITB Cleaning Block 10 8 4 6 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block 2 Developing Block 11 5 1 3 2 6 ...

Page 275: ... tuned on with the color print counter reading 500 or higher F 7 4 if the main power switch is turned on with the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 deg C or higher It takes about 2 min or less before the machine enters the standby state after its main power switch has been pressed i e the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C In principle image stabilization cont...

Page 276: ...the difference being that the machine reduces the process speed after primary transfer to 2 3 thus increasing fixing on heavy paper The machine uses 1 3 speed when it makes full color prints and uses heavy paper 163 g or more or transparency This sequence is also identical to normal speed sequence the difference being that the machine reduces the process speed to 1 3 speed after primary transfer T...

Page 277: ... designed to execute the following control mechanisms to be sure of stable image production in the presence of changes in the site environment and deterioration of components associated with image formation over the product life F 7 6 Ganma LUT Printer Reader MN CON 1 3 4 2 DC CON PRINTER READER Ganma LUT Printer 5 6 ...

Page 278: ...n control mechanism at power on or toner container replacement only when the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100 deg C 2 The machine executes D half control when the power is turned on with its color print counter reading 500 or higher and the temperature of the fixing upper roller being 100 deg C or lower Item Description 1 Dmax control determines the best Color developing b...

Page 279: ...executes this control mechanism in response to every incidence of an image ratio of 200 or every 20 full color prints LSTR PRINT STBY INTR Start key ON Primary transfer ATVC control Secondary transfer ATVC control Primary transfer ATVC control Mono color print for every 240 prints Secondary transfer ATVC control LSTR PRINT STBY INTR Start key ON Potential control Primary transfer ATVC control Seco...

Page 280: ...asts a maximum of about 100 sec F 7 12 1 The machine executes this control mechanism when the temperature of the fixing upper roller is less than 100 deg C 2 The machine executes this control mechanism in response to a history of making 500 or more color prints with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C STBY Jam recovery WMUPR Potential control Primary transfer ATVC ...

Page 281: ...roller being less than 100 deg C after jam recovery after return from a sleep state with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C every 120 full color prints made continuously stops printing for execution every 20 full color prints or during last rotation in response to every incidence of an image ratio of 200 as converted during execution of PASCAL control in response ...

Page 282: ...t various points of development black developing cylinder position color cylinder position for the photosensitive drum T 7 12 F 7 14 Order Item Description 1 Application of Vg applies Vg Vg1 through Vg3 to the drum 2 creation of the target Vd Vg curve measures the VD in response to the foregoing Vg Vg1 through Vg3 using the potential sensor to create a VD Vg curve 3 determination of a target Vg co...

Page 283: ...d creates a VL LP curve for the sensor position 3 creation of a VL LP curve points of black development color development creates a VL LP curve for points of black and color development based on the result of computation on the VL curve for the sensor position 4 monitoring of the environment sensor computes the target VL potential for individual colors based on the output of the environment sensor...

Page 284: ...Chapter 7 7 18 F 7 16 0 VL V Laser power E0h VL LP Curve sensor position Control of No 4 to 5 90h Target VL Bk Target VL Color VL LP Curve Bk cylinder position VL LP Curve color cylinder position ...

Page 285: ...e photosensitive drum to the ITB and from the ITB to paper This control may be of 2 types primary transfer ATVC and secondary transfer ATVC F 7 17 1 Primary transfer roller 2 Secondary transfer outside roller DC CON DC controller UN 12 environment sensor DC CON HVT2 HVT3 J1133B J1605 J1119B J1701 J1606 1 2 TR1_OUT TR2_OUT J1120A UN 12 J470 ENV_TEMP ...

Page 286: ...r voltage so that the target transfer current may be obtained at time of transfer Conditions of Execution when the power is turned on when the toner cartridge is replaced with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C after jam recovery after return from a sleep state with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C during initial rotation in res...

Page 287: ...mage read sensor to measure the toner image created on the ITB and imposes correction on the amount of toner to be supplied so that the density will be identical to the target density 3 result of detection by the ATR sensor executed for every 10 color prints The machine uses the ATR sensor to measure the developer on the cylinder of each color developing assembly and increases decrease the toner s...

Page 288: ...is lower than 62 E020 xx12 the SGNL value for INIT control at time of initial setup is 960 or higher E020 xx13 the REF value for INIT control at time of initial setup is 960 or higher E020 xx81 the P SENS P value at time of reading the background drum surface for patch detection is lower than 255 E020 xx90 the result of computation by patch reading for patch detection is lower than 16 E020 xx91 th...

Page 289: ...ariation among the SGNL values for patch detection is 400 or higher E020 xxD0 the average of the SGNL values for INIT control at time of initial setup is 200 or lower E020 xxD1 the average of the REF value for INIT control at time of initial setup is 200 or lower E020 xxD2 the average of the patch detection SGNL values for INIT control at time of initial setup is 200 or lower E020 xxD4 the average...

Page 290: ...the feedscrew inside the buffer assembly rotates the DC controller turns on the development motor M3 and the color toner supply clutch CL2 when a shortage of toner is expected Once inside the developing assembly the toner is moved forward by the feedscrew inside it the deteriorating carrier in the assembly on the other hand is discharged outside the assembly falling on its own weight for collectio...

Page 291: ... density of the patches to determine a developing bias that will bring about a desirable density for each color The machine executes D max control for the following conditions when the power is turned on when the toner cartridge is replaced with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C after jam recovery after return from a sleep state with the temperature of the fixing...

Page 292: ...atch pattern using the patch image read sensor PS2 and sends the result to the main controller where gradation correction is executed so that ideal halftone images may be obtained The machine executes D half control for the following when the power is turned on when the toner cartridge is replaced 1 after jam recovery after return from a sleep state 1 in response to changes in the environment duri...

Page 293: ... patch image read sensor DC CON DC controller MN CON main controller Flow of Operation The following shows the flow of operation that takes place during the control DC CON PS2 MN CON Patch pattern data output Density data input ...

Page 294: ... half correction table M Y C EX D max Correction Table for M Actual gradation characteristics image characteristics 0 100 density data DC CON M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 density data MN CON M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 Generates patch pattern data Main controller DC controller Main controller Generates density data 100 ...

Page 295: ...e control The printer uses the data stored in the main controller to generate 3 types of test patterns 1 when the printouts of the test patterns are placed in the reader unit one after another the machine reads them in sequence to enable the main controller to execute gradation correction that will lead to ideal image characteristics The machine executes PASCAL control for the following conditions...

Page 296: ...it one after another The machine reads the test patterns Reader unit The machine uses the main controller to prepare an image correction table MYCBk EX Image Correction Table for M Actual gradation characteristics Ideal image characteristics 0 100 Data output reader unit M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 Data output MN CON M63 M64 The main controller generates test patterns 3 types Printer unit The machine generates...

Page 297: ...ows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a low num ber of lines which is suitable for the expression of gradation and there fore is used for print film photo mode and when priority is placed on PDL Test Print 3 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a high number of lines which is suitable for the achievement of a high resolu tion and is therefore used when prior...

Page 298: ...be either of 2 types of biases primary charging DC bias grid DC bias The bias is generated by the high voltage PCB 1 in response to a command from the DC controller and is applied to the primary charging wire or the grid wire The level of the grid bias is determined based on the result of potential control F 7 27 1 Grid charging wire 2 Grid wire HVT1 high voltage PCB 1 DC CON DC controller DC CON ...

Page 299: ...e DC controller and the cleaning operation is as follows when PRIM_CLN_MTR0 is 0 the wire cleaner moves to the rear when PRIM_CLN_MTR0 is 1 the wire cleaner moves to the front F 7 28 1 Primary charging assembly 2 Charging wire 3 Cleaner screw 4 Wire cleaner 5 Primary charging wire cleaner motor DC CON DC controller The cleaning operation starts in response to the following 1 the temperature of the...

Page 300: ...ng wire HVT1 high voltage PCB 1 DC CON DC controller 7 5 4 Controlling the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism 0003 1040 The machine is equipped with a mechanism to clean the charging wire found inside the pre transfer charging assembly thus preventing soiling of the wire The pre transfer charging wire cleaner motor M27 rotates in normal and reverse directions to turn the cleaner scr...

Page 301: ...t DC CON DC controller The cleaning operation takes place in response to the following 1 the temperature of the fixing roller is 100 deg C or less at power on 2 wire cleaning is executed in user mode 3 as many as 2000 images have been made copy count if mono color 2000 pages if full color 500 pages 1 1 the intervals at which cleaning takes place may be changed using the following service mode item...

Page 302: ...ensitive drum and the LEDs are turned on during printing to remove residual changes from the drum surface and forming stable images The DC controller controls the pre exposure LED array drive signal EXP_LED to turn on and off the LED array The DC controller generates the following drive signal EXP_LED if 0 the pre exposure LED array goes on if 1 the pre exposure LED array goes off F 7 31 1 Pre exp...

Page 303: ...photosensitive drum in sequence The rotary is locked in or out of place by the work of the developing rotary locking solenoid SL10 The rotary is equipped with 2 sensors PS19 PS8 serving to detect the position of the rotary assembly and to turn on and off SL10 The machine uses the DC controller to control these electrical loads M5 SL10 PS19 PS8 F 7 32 DC CON DC controller M5 developing rotary motor...

Page 304: ...tors the state of PS19 to check on the position of the rotary On the back of the rotary is the home position detecting flag used to cause the DC controller to assume that the rotary is in home position when the flag moves past PS19 The DC controller rotates the rotary with reference to the rotary home position making sure that the rotary stops only at specific points There are as many as 6 points ...

Page 305: ...a color developing cylinder will never be opposite the photosensitive drum The following shows the position of Y toner cartridge access and point of M development F 7 34 M developing assembly M toner cartridge Flag Y developing assembly C developing assembly M developing assembly Y toner cartridge M toner cartridge PS8 C toner cartridge Y developing assembly C toner cartridge PS8 Point of Y Toner ...

Page 306: ...osition Timing of Operation developing rotary mono color F 7 36 E021 0001 developing rotary rotation error indicates that any of the following 2 conditions exits 1 the home position flag cannot be detected 2 an error occurred in the intervals at which the home position flag is detected while the developing rotary is rotating STBY INTR PRINT 1 2 Y M C Bk 3 4 LSTR Start key ON Rotary HP sensor PS8 D...

Page 307: ...of the same construction the only difference being the color of toner dye supplied by individual toner cartridges The following shows the construction and the functions of the color developing assemblies T 7 16 F 7 37 Item Description 1 Developing cylinder holds toner toner carrier 2 Blade forms an even layer of toner on the developing cylinder 3 Developer stirring screw stirs the toner and suppli...

Page 308: ...er stirring screw A and toner stirring screw B These loads are driven when the color developing clutch CL1 goes on and are designed so that they go on only when development takes place F 7 38 1 Developing cylinder 2 Toner stirring screw A 3 Toner stirring screw B M3 development motor CL1 color developing clutch DC CON DC controller DC CON J1109A J1109B M3 CL1 1 2 3 ...

Page 309: ... of biases color developing DC bias color developing AC bias These biases are generated by the high voltage PCB 2 in response to a command from the DC controller and are applied to the color developing cylinder at specific timing The level of the bias is determined based on the result of potential control F 7 39 1 Color developing cylinder DC CON DC controller HVT2 high voltage PCB 2 DC CON DEV_CL...

Page 310: ...to the buffer assembly The latter on the other hand is done when the toner feedscrew found inside the buffer assembly rotates the feedscrew is controlled by the DC controller which turns on the development motor M3 and the color toner supply clutch CL2 according to the amounts of toner needed as indicated by the result of ATR control The toner feedscrew inside the buffer assembly is driven to rota...

Page 311: ...ipment The timing of indicating the message may be changed in service mode between toner levels of 5 and 10 COPIER OPTION BODY T LW LVL Detention by the Optical Sensor The machine uses a penetration type sensor color toner level sensor PS25 to check the presence absence of color toner specifically the DC controller monitors the state of PS25 which consists of a light emitting segment LED and a lig...

Page 312: ...detection F 7 41 1 Toner cartridge 2 Light emitting segment 3 Light receiving segment 4 Light guide 5 Toner PS25 color toner level sensor DC CON DC controller CL_TNR_SNS_ON CL_TNR_REMAIN DC CON 1 2 3 4 5 4 PS25 Much Toner Left Little Toner Left 4 PS25 ...

Page 313: ...If color toner is absent the user message Add Toner is indicated and the printing is stopped Detection starts Counter1 1 Counter2 2 PS25 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 Detection starts Counter1 1 Counter2 2 PS25 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Much Toner Left Little Toner Left 1 cycle 1 cycle 1 cycle 1 cycle Light emitting segent Light receiving segent Light emitting segent Light receiving segent ...

Page 314: ...ping assembly F 7 43 T 7 17 Item Description 1 Toner feedscrew moves toner supplied by the hopper assembly to the inside of the developing unit 2 Toner stirring plate 1 supplies toner to the developing cylinder 3 Toner stirring plate 2 supplies toner to the developing cylinder 4 Blade forms an even layer of toner on the developing cylinder 5 Developing cylinder retains toner 6 Toner colleting roll...

Page 315: ...ents in terms of drive loads which are driven when the development motor M3 and the black developing clutch CL3 go on F 7 44 1 Toner feedscrew 2 Toner stirring plate 1 3 Toner stirring plate 2 4 Developing cylinder 5 Toner colleting roller M3 development motor CL3 black developing clutch DC CON DC controller DC CON J1109A M3 CL3 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 316: ...nd inside the hopper determining the amount of toner to supply to the hopper assembly or to the black toner developing assembly When the toner starts to run out the DC controller drives M25 or M23 to make up for the shortage if the level of toner is high it keeps M23 and M25 still F 7 45 1 Black toner bottle 2 Hopper assembly 3 Toner stirring plate 4 Toner feedscrew 5 Toner feed pipe 6 Black devel...

Page 317: ...toner assembly have been detected Memo The following user messages are used in relation to black toner supply Toner Running Short condition TS1 0 exists 1 min after the black toner supply motor M25 is started no toner inside the hopper assembly state of printer ready to print Add Toner condition TS1 and TS2 0 exists 20 sec after the hopper stirring motor M23 is driven no toner inside the black dev...

Page 318: ...and there are 2 types of black developing biases black developing DC bias and black developing AC bias These biases are generated by the high voltage PCB 2 in response to a command from the DC controller for application to the black developing cylinder F 7 48 1 Black developing cylinder DC CON DC controller HVT2 high voltage PCB 2 DC CON DEV_BK_AC_ON DEV_BK_DC_ON DEV_BK_DC_CONT J1133A J1601 J1611 ...

Page 319: ...to it onto paper The major components of the transfer assembly include the following ITB cleaning screw ITB cleaning blade ITB drive roller ITB primary transfer static eliminator primary transfer roller tension roller ITB inside cleaner end scraper secondary transfer outside roller F 7 49 1 ITB cleaning screw 2 ITB cleaning blade 3 ITB drive roller 4 ITB 5 Primary transfer static eliminator 6 Prim...

Page 320: ... DC reverse bias These biases are generated by the high voltage PCBs 2 and 3 according to the instructions of the DC controller and are applied to their respective loads primary transfer roller primary transfer static eliminator secondary transfer outside roller F 7 50 1 Primary transfer roller 2 Primary transfer static eliminator 3 Secondary transfer outside roller HVT2 high voltage PCB 2 HVT3 hi...

Page 321: ...aner 3 Primary Transfer Static Eliminator Bias application bias DC The primary transfer static eliminator is arranged to the side of the primary transfer roller serving to prevent the toner image from flying astray as the result of discharge between the ITB and the primary transfer downstream roller 4 Secondary Transfer Bias application bias DC DC The secondary transfer bias is used to transfer th...

Page 322: ...t motor M21 on the other hand is used to move the ITB cleaner to and from the ITB belt The rollers are moved when the DC controller operates the 2 motors the DC controller also checks the home position of the ITB cleaner for use when it moves the ITB cleaner to and from the ITB F 7 51 1 ITB drive roller 2 ITB cleaning screw 3 ITB cleaner PS23 ITB cleaning home position sensor M2 drum ITB motor M21...

Page 323: ... shift motor drive signal so that M21 rotates clockwise for about 0 8 sec 2 the shift cam rotates clockwise raising the shift arm thereby locking the ITB cleaner in place against the ITB 3 when cleaning of the ITB is done the DC controller generates the ITB center shift motor drive signal so that M21 rotates clockwise for about 0 8 sec 4 the shift cam rotates clockwise so that the shift arm lowers...

Page 324: ...cks to find out if the home position flag attached to the drive shaft of the ITB cleaner shift motor M21 blocks M23 F 7 53 1 ITB cleaner 2 ITB cleaner home position flag PS23 ITB cleaner home position sensor M21 ITB cleaner shift motor DC CON DC controller E078 0001 ITB cleaner shift motor error indicates that the ITB cleaner remains locked in position PS23 1 5 sec after the ITB cleaner shift moto...

Page 325: ...secondary transfer assembly The DC controller controls the operation of M26 for the movement it also runs a check on the secondary transfer outside roller for its location i e to see if it is in contact with the belt F 7 54 1 Secondary transfer outside roller 2 Shift arm 3 Shift cam PS22 secondary transfer outside roller home position sensor M20 secondary transfer outside roller shift motor DC CON...

Page 326: ...ller shift motor drive signal so that M20 rotates clockwise for about 0 8 sec 2 the shift cam rotates clockwise to move down the shift arm thereby locking the secondary transfer outside roller in place against the ITB 3 after secondary transfer the DC controller generates the secondary transfer outside roller shift motor drive signal so that M20 rotates clockwise for about 0 8 sec 4 the shift cam ...

Page 327: ...ks on the output of the secondary transfer outside roller home position sensor PS22 When the power is turned on or the front cover is opened closed the DC controller checks the location of the secondary transfer outside roller with reference to whether the home position flag attached to the drive shaft of M20 is blocking PS22 F 7 56 PS22 1 PS22 0 1 SEC_TRANS_HP_SNS 1 Feeding driver PCB DC CON M20 ...

Page 328: ...e edge of the ITB using the following sequence of operation 1 when a print command arrives the DC controller rotates the ITB upon detention of a reflecting surface PS1 and PS30 send their respective home position detection signal to the DC controller 1_TOP_SNS_A 1_TOP_SNS_B 2 in response the DC controller assumes that the detection signal that first arrives represents the home position 1_TOP1A see...

Page 329: ... the PVREQ request signal for individual colors with reference to the ITB home position detection signal I_TOP1A of side A used for the formation of an image F 7 58 Full Color 2 Prints Continuous 2 page placement see Note The machine generates the PVREQ request signal for individual colors based on the ITB home position detection signal I_TOP1B of side B and the home position detection signal I_TO...

Page 330: ... machine determines the home position based on the reading of the timer of the DC controller and generates the PVREQ requires signal used for the formation of an image F 7 60 7 8 10 Separation 0003 1259 The machine uses the curvature separation method in which the rigidity of paper is used for its separation form the ITB To assist the separation the machine uses the static eliminator to reduce the...

Page 331: ...e photosensitive drum The unit consists of 4 components serving to clean the photosensitive drum in preparation for the next print cycle The residual toner collected by the unit is moved forward by the waste toner feedscrew for collection in the waste toner case fitted to the back fort the machine The following shows the arrangement of the major components F 7 62 1 Cleaning blade 2 Magnet roller 3...

Page 332: ...e Mechanism 0003 6412 The drum cleaning unit possesses 2 drive loads they are controlled by the DC controller and turned on when the ITB drum motor M2 goes on F 7 63 1 Magnet roller 2 Waste toner feedscrew M2 ITB drum motor DC CON DC controller DC CON J1109B M2 ...

Page 333: ...t The mechanism of collection involves the DC controller which drives the development motor M3 to turn the screw inside the waste toner pipe The waste toner pipe is connected to the toner discharge outlet so that the rotation of M3 automatically moves the waste toner through the waste toner pipe to the waste toner bottle F 7 64 1 Drum cleaning unit discharge opening 2 Waste toner tube 3 Waste tone...

Page 334: ...color toner developing assembly and ITB cleaning unit The amount of waste toner is checked with reference to the soft counter reading kept by the DC controller and the soft counter reading is based on computations of the following data 1 paper size 2 color mode full or mono 3 image ratio The DC controller monitors the soft counter at all times and executes the following operation when the reading ...

Page 335: ...dscrew 4 Color developing unit discharge opening 5 ITB cleaning unit discharge opening 6 Waste toner bottle 7 Waste toner 8 Waste toner feedscrew gear M3 developing motor SW1 waste toner lock detecting switch DC CON DC controller M3 DC CON J1117B J1109A WASTE_TNR_ERR0 1 2 3 SW1 4 6 7 Rear view 5 8 ...

Page 336: ...shed in the direction of the arrow thus turning on SW1 1 The reading of the waste toner may be checked or reset using the following service mode item COPIER COUNTER MISC WASTE TNR 2 The timing of messages waste toner full pre warning waste toner full warning may be changed using the following serve mode item to change the timing of indicating the waste toner full pre warning COPIER ADJUST MISC WT ...

Page 337: ...ver 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 67 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 68 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 69 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide ...

Page 338: ...Close the right deck 7 11 1 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 8203 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 73 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 74 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 75 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 76 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 339: ...sembly 3 from the machine F 7 78 7 11 1 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003 8214 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 79 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 80 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 81 5 Remove the screw 1 and shift d...

Page 340: ...sembly 3 Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 85 7 11 1 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0326 1 P...

Page 341: ...ing blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring causing toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 89 7 11 1 8 Removing the Process Unit 0003 2410 1 Disconnect the 2 connecto...

Page 342: ...stop only after matching it against the notch 5 in the drum flange F 7 94 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreo...

Page 343: ...F 7 97 9 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 toward the front F 7 98 10 While pushing on the 2 drawer hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly pull out the fixing feeding assembly 2 fully F 7 99 11 Lift both ends 1 of the process unit slightly and fully pull out the process unit 2 toward the front F 7 100 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 344: ... cleaning faults Be sure also to hold the drum stop tool in place while removing the drum fixing screw The drum stop tool is attached to the back of the process unit cover 7 11 2 Pre exposure LED Array 7 11 2 1 Preventing Right Cover upper 0003 8247 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 102 7 11 2 2 Freeing the Front Cover 0003 2510 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling o...

Page 345: ...e button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 106 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 107 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 108 9 Close the right deck 7 11 2 3 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0003 2508 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 109 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1...

Page 346: ...to match the protrusion 5 of the drum fixing member and the protrusion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 113 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of...

Page 347: ...F 7 115 8 Shift down the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever 1 in the direction of the arrow F 7 116 9 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 toward the front F 7 117 10 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 118 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 348: ...rface of the deck top panel 1 front bend of the deck top panel 2 lower rear sheet 4 locations of the fixing feeding assembly 3 F 7 120 F 7 121 7 11 2 4 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2511 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 122 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 123 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth...

Page 349: ...crew 2 and slide the primary charging assembly stopper 3 in the direction of the arrow then tighten the screw 2 3 Detach the primary charging assembly 4 from the machine F 7 127 7 11 2 6 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0003 2507 1 Open the 2 cable clamps 1 and lead the harness 2 through the opening 3 in the process unit F 7 128 2 Open the 8 cable clamps 1 and move the harness 2 out ...

Page 350: ...e pre exposure LED unit F 7 132 7 11 3 Primary Charging Assembly 7 11 3 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8248 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 133 7 11 3 2 Freeing the Front Cover 0003 2476 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 134 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch pl...

Page 351: ...sh the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 137 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 138 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 139 9 Close the right deck 7 11 3 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2477 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 140 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 352: ...ply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 144 7 11 3 4 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 0002 6213 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Loosen the screw 2 and slide the primary charging assembly stopper 3 in the direction of the arrow then tighten the screw 2 3 Detach the primary charging assembly 4 from the machine F 7 145 7 11 4 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor 7 11 4 1 Removi...

Page 353: ...the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 148 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 149 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 150 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 151 1 2 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 354: ...ck toner supply cover 1 F 7 153 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 154 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 155 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 156 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 157 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 355: ...ws 3 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the motor cover 3 F 7 159 2 Turn over the motor cover and disconnect the connector 1 then detach the primary charging wire cleaning motor 2 F 7 160 7 11 5 Pre transfer Charging Assembly 7 11 5 1 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0002 6224 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the p...

Page 356: ...nector 2 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 164 7 11 6 2 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor 0002 6226 1 Free the 3 claws 1 and detach the motor cover 2 F 7 165 2 Turn over the motor cover and detach the pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor from the motor cover F 7 166 7 11 7 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 7 11 7 1 Removing the Right Co...

Page 357: ...e 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 169 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 170 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 171 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 172 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 358: ...ck toner supply cover 1 F 7 174 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 175 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 176 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 177 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 178 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 359: ...rom the back of the cover F 7 182 5 While forcing the drum stop tool 3 against the drum fixing member 2 of the drum shift 1 remove the fixing screw 4 1 Be sure to match the protrusion 5 of the drum fixing member and the protrusion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 183 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the mar...

Page 360: ... fixing member 1 F 7 184 7 Remove the 3 binding screws M4x8 1 F 7 185 8 Shift down the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever 1 in the direction of the arrow F 7 186 9 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 toward the front F 7 187 10 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 188 11 Slightly lift both ends ...

Page 361: ...eding assembly 3 F 7 190 F 7 191 7 11 7 5 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 0004 6627 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Loosen the screw 2 and slide the primary charging assembly stopper 3 in the direction of the arrow then tighten the screw 2 3 Detach the primary charging assembly 4 from the machine F 7 192 7 11 7 6 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0003 2495 1 Open the 2 cable cla...

Page 362: ... mounting the photosensitive drum cleaning unit take care not to rotate it in reverse direction to prevent soiling by the scoop up sheet The drum is designed to rotate counterclockwise 7 11 8 Photosensitive Drum 7 11 8 1 Removing the Right Color upper 0003 8251 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 197 7 11 8 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2487 1 Open the front cover 2 W...

Page 363: ...sembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 201 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 202 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 203 9 Close the right deck 7 11 8 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2488 1 Open the black toner supply ...

Page 364: ...7 206 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 207 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 208 7 11 8 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0003 2837 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 209 7 11 8 5 Removing the Transfer Charging Drive Assembly 0003 2457 1 Open the color toner ...

Page 365: ...Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 212 5 Remove the screw 1 and shift down the locking plate 2 F 7 213 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 5 screws 2 then detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly 3 F 7 214 7 11 8 6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0005 5592 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 7 215 3 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 366: ...intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 216 7 11 8 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0339 1 Place the ITB unit 1 on paper for protection F 7 217 2 Turn the drive gear 1 by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt 2 about 50 mm F 7 218 3 If there is any toner 3 on the surface of th...

Page 367: ...sfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 220 7 11 8 8 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0003 2460 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 221 2 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper left F 7 222 3 After freeing the high voltage connector cable 1 from the 2 wire saddles 2 fix the cable in place using the cable hook 3 F 7 223 4 Take out the...

Page 368: ...ange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreover when you close the process unit it is important that the spatial relationship between the protrusion of the drum fixing member and the marking on the drum flange is as it was before you drew out the unit 6 Using a pair of fine p...

Page 369: ...11 Slightly lift both ends 1 of the process unit and fully slide out the process unit 2 F 7 231 When you have slid out the process unit check to see if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in if soiled dry wipe the part entire surface of the deck top panel 1 front bend of the deck top panel 2 lower rear sheet 4 locations of the fixing feeding assembly 3 F 7 232 F ...

Page 370: ...he primary charging assembly 4 from the machine F 7 234 7 11 8 10 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0003 2497 1 Open the 2 cable clamps 1 and lead the harness 2 through the opening 3 in the process unit F 7 235 2 Open the 8 cable clamps 1 and move the harness 2 out of the way F 7 236 3 Disconnect the connector 1 F 7 237 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the photosensitive drum cleani...

Page 371: ...per under the process unit for the work 2 The machine s black developing unit is equipped with a potential sensor Do not touch the sensor window 1 indicated in the figure Moreover take care not to drop the black developing assembly or otherwise subject it to impact so as to avoid damage to the potential sensor F 7 239 1 Open the harness guide used to fix the high voltage cable 1 in place F 7 240 2...

Page 372: ...ping assembly be sure to work with the high voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive drum F 7 245 7 11 8 12 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 0003 2841 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the charging assembly rail 2 F 7 246 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the charging assembly rail fixing plate 2 3 Remove the screw 3 and d...

Page 373: ... drum heater and the drum heater PCB then mount them to the new photosensitive drum 2 Mount the photosensitive drum so that the lot number label 1 attached to its inner side is toward the front of the machine F 7 250 Memo There is a light difference in the inside diameter of the photosensitive drum between its front and its rear The front and rear drum flanges are designed in relation to the photo...

Page 374: ...e the 5 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 7 252 7 11 9 2 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0004 1052 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 7 253 7 11 9 3 Removing the Right Cover upper rear 0004 1053 1 Detach the reader communications cable 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the right cover upper rear 3 F 7 254 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 ...

Page 375: ... DC controller box 2 to the left F 7 256 7 11 9 5 Removing the DC Controller Box 0004 1055 1 Open the 3 cable guides 1 and free the harness 2 F 7 257 2 Disconnect the 33 connectors 1 and open that 13 cable guides 2 then free the harness 3 F 7 258 3 Lift the DC controller box 1 to detach F 7 259 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 376: ...the wire saddle 3 so that the harness 1 is on the left side of the harness 2 F 7 260 Supplementary Information If the harness 1 is away from the side plate 4 of the DC controller box wrong detection E070 0102 of the ITB home position tends to occur because of noise 7 11 9 7 Removing the Drum Motor 0004 1056 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fly wheel 2 F 7 261 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 ...

Page 377: ...ling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 264 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 265 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 266 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the righ...

Page 378: ...lose the right deck 7 11 10 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0004 4608 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 270 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 271 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 272 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 273 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 379: ...ach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 275 7 11 10 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0004 4623 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 276 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 277 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7...

Page 380: ...rmediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 282 7 11 10 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0334 1 Place the ITB unit 1 on pa...

Page 381: ...iate transfer belt by the work of a spring causing toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 286 7 11 10 8 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0004 4628 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 287 2 Disconnect the ...

Page 382: ...usion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 291 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreover when you close the process unit ...

Page 383: ...e fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 296 11 Slightly lift both ends 1 of the process unit and fully slide out the process unit 2 F 7 297 When you have slid out the process unit check to see if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in if soiled dry wipe the part entire surface of the deck top panel 1 front bend of the deck top ...

Page 384: ...of the arrow then tighten the screw 2 3 Detach the primary charging assembly 4 from the machine F 7 300 7 11 10 10 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0004 4634 1 Open the 2 cable clamps 1 and lead the harness 2 through the opening 3 in the process unit F 7 301 2 Open the 8 cable clamps 1 and move the harness 2 out of the way F 7 302 3 Disconnect the connector 1 F 7 303 1 2 3 4 1 3 2 3 ...

Page 385: ...xing feeding assembly through the outlet be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work 2 The machine s black developing unit is equipped with a potential sensor Do not touch the sensor window 1 indicated in the figure Moreover take care not to drop the black developing assembly or otherwise subject it to impact so as to avoid damage to the potential sensor F 7 305 1 Open the harness g...

Page 386: ...work with the high voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive drum F 7 311 7 11 10 12 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 0004 4651 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the charging assembly rail 2 F 7 312 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the charging assembly rail fixing plate 2 3 Remove the screw 3 and detach the bearing stoppe...

Page 387: ...um If you mount the photosensitive drum in the wrong orientation the gap between the developing cylinder and the photosensitive drum will be uneven possibly causing uneven density 7 11 10 14 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater 0006 2080 Drum memory can occur if the phase of the drum is changed as when replacing the drum heater Take full care not to change the phase of the drum during the...

Page 388: ...lation to the phase location indicated on the drum phase label F 7 320 7 11 10 15 Removing the Drum Heater 0002 6234 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the flange found at the front 2 F 7 321 2 Disconnect the connector 1 F 7 322 1 COPIE R TEST PG TYPE 16 2 COPIE R FUNCTION INSTALL AINR OFF 1 3 4 COPIE R FUNCTION MISC P DR P ADJ OK 5 COPIE R FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT OK 6 PASCA L 1 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 3 4 ...

Page 389: ...er 2 F 7 324 7 11 11 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0004 4606 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 325 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 326 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 327 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly an...

Page 390: ... cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 330 9 Close the right deck 7 11 11 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0004 4609 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 331 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 332 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner ...

Page 391: ...ctor 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 336 7 11 11 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0004 4624 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 337 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 338 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the w...

Page 392: ...slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 343 7 11 11 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Interme...

Page 393: ...g blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring causing toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 347 7 11 11 8 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0004 4631 1 Disconnect the 5 conne...

Page 394: ...usion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 352 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreover when you close the process unit ...

Page 395: ...of the arrow F 7 355 9 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 toward the front F 7 356 10 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 357 11 Slightly lift both ends 1 of the process unit and fully slide out the process unit 2 F 7 358 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 396: ... Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 0004 4639 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Loosen the screw 2 and slide the primary charging assembly stopper 3 in the direction of the arrow then tighten the screw 2 3 Detach the primary charging assembly 4 from the machine F 7 361 7 11 11 10 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0004 4635 1 Open the 2 cable clamps 1 and lead the harness 2 through th...

Page 397: ... waste toner collecting inside the machine can move into the fixing feeding assembly through the outlet be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work 2 The machine s black developing unit is equipped with a potential sensor Do not touch the sensor window 1 indicated in the figure Moreover take care not to drop the black developing assembly or otherwise subject it to impact so as to av...

Page 398: ...e high voltage cable 1 in place as shown detach the black developing assembly 2 in upward direction When detaching the black developing assembly be sure to work with the high voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive drum F 7 372 7 11 11 12 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 0004 4652 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the c...

Page 399: ... front side plate F 7 376 7 11 11 13 Points to Note When Mounting the Photosensitive Drum 0006 0364 Mount the photosensitive drum so that the lot number label 1 attached to its inner side is toward the front of the machine F 7 377 Memo There is a light difference in the inside diameter of the photosensitive drum between its front and its rear The front and rear drum flanges are designed in relatio...

Page 400: ...7 379 3 Lift the drum heater upright from the photosensitive drum then detach the drum heater F 7 380 7 11 11 15 Removing the Drum Heater PCB 0002 6236 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the drum heater PCB together with the flange F 7 381 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 7 382 3 Remove the 4 edge saddles 1 and detach the drum heater PCB 2 F 7 383 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 401: ...g the drum flange be sure to fix it in place with a screw where it was found in step 1 F 7 384 3 Check the drum phase label 1 attached behind the process unit cover F 7 385 See the following sample The cell with a check mark 1 indicates the present drum phase location In this case the marking 3 is located in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member with its left at and right at F 7 3...

Page 402: ... 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 388 7 11 12 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2500 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 389 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 390 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 391 5 Push ...

Page 403: ... cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 394 9 Close the right deck 7 11 12 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2501 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 395 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 396 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner ...

Page 404: ...the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 400 2 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper left F 7 401 3 After freeing the high voltage connector cable 1 from the 2 wire saddles 2 fix the cable in place using the cable hook 3 F 7 402 4 Take out the process unit cover 1 from the shipping box and detach the drum stop tool 2 from the back of the cover F 7 403 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 405: ...ange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreover when you close the process unit it is important that the spatial relationship between the protrusion of the drum fixing member and the marking on the drum flange is as it was before you drew out the unit 6 Using a pair of fine p...

Page 406: ...11 Slightly lift both ends 1 of the process unit and fully slide out the process unit 2 F 7 410 When you have slid out the process unit check to see if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in if soiled dry wipe the part entire surface of the deck top panel 1 front bend of the deck top panel 2 lower rear sheet 4 locations of the fixing feeding assembly 3 F 7 411 F ...

Page 407: ...he primary charging assembly 4 from the machine F 7 413 7 11 12 6 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0003 2499 1 Open the 2 cable clamps 1 and lead the harness 2 through the opening 3 in the process unit F 7 414 2 Open the 8 cable clamps 1 and move the harness 2 out of the way F 7 415 3 Disconnect the connector 1 F 7 416 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the photosensitive drum cleani...

Page 408: ...2 Clean the area 1 of the retainer plate coming into contact with the cleaning blade and the blade plate 2 using alcohol then dry wipe it to remove any toner The fine particle of toner under the blade edge can put the blade out of alignment allowing toner on the photosensitive drum to remain on the drum in the form of residual toner F 7 420 3 Be sure to mount the cleaning blade 1 so that the lot N...

Page 409: ...t you execute service mode immediately after the control panel screen has appeared after turning on the main switch COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITR ROT 7 11 13 Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper 7 11 13 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0004 1090 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 425 7 11 13 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0004 1092 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling o...

Page 410: ...eck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 429 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 430 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 431 9 Close the right deck 7 11 13 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0004 1091 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 432 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle ...

Page 411: ...4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 436 7 11 13 4 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0004 1093 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 437 2 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper left F 7 438 3 After freeing the high voltage connector cable 1 from the 2 wire saddles 2 fix the cable in place using the cable hook 3 F 7 439 1 1 2 ...

Page 412: ...ind out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreover when you close the process unit it is important that the spatial relationship between the protrusion of the drum fixin...

Page 413: ...slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 446 11 Slightly lift both ends 1 of the process unit and fully slide out the process unit 2 F 7 447 When you have slid out the process unit check to see if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in if soiled dry wipe the part entire surface of the deck top panel 1 front bend of the deck top panel 2 lower rear sheet 4 locat...

Page 414: ...he primary charging assembly 4 from the machine F 7 450 7 11 13 6 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 0004 1094 1 Open the 2 cable clamps 1 and lead the harness 2 through the opening 3 in the process unit F 7 451 2 Open the 8 cable clamps 1 and move the harness 2 out of the way F 7 452 3 Disconnect the connector 1 F 7 453 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the photosensitive drum cleani...

Page 415: ...e of adhesive 7 11 14 Hopper Assembly 7 11 14 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8253 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 456 7 11 14 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2466 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 457 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 458 3 Sli...

Page 416: ...e 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 462 9 Close the right deck 7 11 14 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 0967 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 463 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 464 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be...

Page 417: ... Assembly 0002 6266 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and pick and detach the wire saddle 2 F 7 468 2 Close the hopper assembly 3 Remove the E ring 1 F 7 469 4 Open the hopper assembly and lift it to detach 7 11 15 Hopper Supply Motor 7 11 15 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8254 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 470 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 418: ...e fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 473 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 474 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 475 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the...

Page 419: ...ed the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 479 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 480 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 481 7 11 15 4 Removing the hopper Assembly 0003 2472 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and pick and detach the wire saddle 2 F 7 482 1 1 2 1 1 2 2...

Page 420: ...pen the black toner supply cover 1 then remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the hopper inside cover 3 F 7 484 2 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 1 then detach the black toner supply motor 3 F 7 485 7 11 16 Hopper Strring Motor 7 11 16 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8256 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 486 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 421: ...e fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 489 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 490 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 491 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the...

Page 422: ...ed the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 495 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 496 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 497 7 11 16 4 Removing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2469 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and pick and detach the wire saddle 2 F 7 498 1 1 2 1 1 2 2...

Page 423: ...and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the hopper stirring motor 3 F 7 500 7 11 17 Color Developing Assembly 7 11 17 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8257 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 501 7 11 17 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2524 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 502 1 3 1 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 424: ...sembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 505 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 506 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 507 9 Close the right deck 7 11 17 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2525 1 Open the black toner supply...

Page 425: ...the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 510 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 511 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 512 7 11 17 4 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0003 2526 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 513 2 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper left F 7 514 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 426: ...usion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 517 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreover when you close the process unit ...

Page 427: ...of the arrow F 7 520 9 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 toward the front F 7 521 10 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 522 11 Slightly lift both ends 1 of the process unit and fully slide out the process unit 2 F 7 523 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 428: ...therefore not to damage the developing cylinder when you have detached the developing unit The waste toner collecting inside the machine can move into the fixing feeding assembly through the outlet be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work 2 The machine s black developing unit is equipped with a potential sensor Do not touch the sensor window 1 indicated in the figure Moreover tak...

Page 429: ...lack developing assembly 2 in upward direction When detaching the black developing assembly be sure to work with the high voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive drum F 7 532 7 11 17 6 Removing the Color Developing Unit 0002 5816 1 Open the color toner supply cover 1 F 7 533 2 Loosen the screw 2 used to fix the torque li...

Page 430: ...se with a color developing assembly inside it the anti stray sheet attached to the sleeve of the color developing assembly can interfere with the photosensitive drum and become detached Be sure always to rotate the developing rotary counterclockwise F 7 536 5 Rotate the developing rotary until the developing cylinder 1 of the color developing unit you are removing faces upward F 7 537 6 Remove the...

Page 431: ...ks 2 then remove the developing assembly lid 3 F 7 541 3 Even out the starter by shaking the container about 10 times 4 Open the lid 2 of the starter bottle 1 then remove the middle lid 3 and close the lid F 7 542 5 Supply half the starter so that it is even in the lengthwise direction around the stirring screw inside the color developing unit F 7 543 6 Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times by han...

Page 432: ... prevent insertion of a transparency F 7 548 When tightening the screw take full care so that no shavings caused by turning the screw into the lid of the developing assembly and the container will move into the container 11 Cut off the appropriate tab 1 to suit the color of the starter you have supplied The tab A in the figure is an extra tab F 7 549 12 Fit the color developing unit by going throu...

Page 433: ...away the generated printout in the service book case If there is a previous printout dispose of it 17 End service mode and start user mode on the Auto Gradation Correction screen follow the instructions to execute auto gradation correction full 7 11 17 8 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit 0005 8346 1 Remove the color developing unit 2 Remove the screw 1 and free the 4 hooks 2 then ...

Page 434: ...s normal direction 5 to 6 by hand to even out the starter inside it 11 Pour the rest of the starter around the string screw inside the color developing unit 12 Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times once again to even out the starter inside the unit 13 Move the starter that may remain on the inner side of the unit wall 1 into the developing assembly F 7 555 14 Attach the developing assembly lid you...

Page 435: ...on the screen while this mode item is under way At the end the screen will show OK This mode uses ATVC control possibly taking a while depending on the site environment The count on the screen for this reason may loop between 690 and 620 19 Execute the following in service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT Then put the generated printout in the service book case If there is any previous printout...

Page 436: ...t cover 2 F 7 562 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 563 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 564 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 565 9 Close the right deck 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 437: ...leased the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 568 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 569 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 570 7 11 18 4 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0003 2519 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 571 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 ...

Page 438: ... to match the protrusion 5 of the drum fixing member and the protrusion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 575 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 o...

Page 439: ...F 7 577 8 Shift down the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever 1 in the direction of the arrow F 7 578 9 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 toward the front F 7 579 10 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 580 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 440: ...developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover Take full care therefore not to damage the developing cylinder when you have detached the developing unit The waste toner collecting inside the machine can move into the fixing feeding assembly through the outlet be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work 2 The machine s black developing unit is equipped wi...

Page 441: ... Push in the high voltage cable 1 through the opening 2 indicated in the figure F 7 589 6 While holding the high voltage cable 1 in place as shown detach the black developing assembly 2 in upward direction When detaching the black developing assembly be sure to work with the high voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive d...

Page 442: ... one as follows 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the potential sensor holder 2 F 7 592 When setting the black developing unit in the machine be sure of the following 1 The developing rotary must be rotated counterclockwise so that the developing cylinder of the color developing assembly is kept facing the direction indicated in the figure F 7 593 2 If you put the high voltage cable of the black ...

Page 443: ...he machine Be sure also to match the rib 4 found at the front of the developing assembly against the right guide 5 found at the front of the machine F 7 595 7 11 19 Black Developing Cylinder 7 11 19 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 6698 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 596 7 11 19 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 6699 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the...

Page 444: ...t cover 2 F 7 599 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 600 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 601 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 602 9 Close the right deck 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 445: ...leased the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 605 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 606 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 607 7 11 19 4 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0003 6704 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 608 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 ...

Page 446: ... to match the protrusion 5 of the drum fixing member and the protrusion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 612 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 o...

Page 447: ...F 7 614 8 Shift down the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever 1 in the direction of the arrow F 7 615 9 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 toward the front F 7 616 10 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 617 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 448: ...developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover Take full care therefore not to damage the developing cylinder when you have detached the developing unit The waste toner collecting inside the machine can move into the fixing feeding assembly through the outlet be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work 2 The machine s black developing unit is equipped wi...

Page 449: ... Push in the high voltage cable 1 through the opening 2 indicated in the figure F 7 626 6 While holding the high voltage cable 1 in place as shown detach the black developing assembly 2 in upward direction When detaching the black developing assembly be sure to work with the high voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive d...

Page 450: ...mage to the potential sensor F 7 628 1 Remove the black developing assembly 2 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the cylinder cover 2 F 7 629 3 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the developing cartridge lid 2 F 7 630 4 Remove the screw 1 and detach the magnetic positioning plate 2 F 7 631 5 Remove the screw 1 and detach the lower guide plate 2 6 Remove the 3 screws 2 and pull out the gear box 4 F 7 6...

Page 451: ...NEVER using water or solvent 7 11 19 8 Points to Note When Mounting the Polarity Positioning Plate 0006 0539 Go through the following steps in strict sequence when mounting the polarity positioning plate 1 Let go of your hand so that the developing cylinder moves and stops on its own 2 Shift the polarity positioning plate 1 counterclockwise as much as the length of the play of the D cut notch 2 th...

Page 452: ...er upper 2 F 7 639 7 11 20 2 Removing the Right Cover upper rear 0004 1060 1 Detach the reader communications cable 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the right cover upper rear 3 F 7 640 7 11 20 3 Sliding the DC Controller Box 0004 1063 1 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the DC controller cover 2 F 7 641 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and slide the DC controller box 2 to the left F 7 642 2 1 3 1 1 2 1...

Page 453: ...18 During assembly work be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows Connect the connector of the harness 1 first and then the other harness 2 Fix the harnesses 1 2 in place using the wire saddle 3 so that the harness 1 is on the left side of the harness 2 F 7 646 Supplementary Information If the harness 1 is away from the side plate 4 of the DC controller box wrong detection...

Page 454: ...the screw 1 and loosen the screw 2 then turn the tensioner 3 counterclockwise 3 Detach the timing belt 4 F 7 648 4 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 and free the 3 harnesses 2 from the 6 cable guides 3 5 Remove the 3 screws 4 and detach the side plate 5 F 7 649 6 Remove the black developing cylinder 1 F 7 650 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 4 5 4 3 2 1 1 ...

Page 455: ...over upper 2 F 7 652 7 11 21 2 Removing the Right Cover upper rear 0004 1061 1 Detach the reader communications cable 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the right cover upper rear 3 F 7 653 7 11 21 3 Sliding the DC Controller Box 0004 1064 1 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the DC controller cover 2 F 7 654 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and slide the DC controller box 2 to the left F 7 655 2 1 3 1 1 2...

Page 456: ...to the DC controller PCB as follows Connect the connector of the harness 1 first and then the other harness 2 Fix the harnesses 1 2 in place using the wire saddle 3 so that the harness 1 is on the left side of the harness 2 F 7 659 Supplementary Information If the harness 1 is away from the side plate 4 of the DC controller box wrong detection E070 0102 of the ITB home position tends to occur beca...

Page 457: ...r 1 and free the 3 harnesses 2 from the 6 cable guides 3 5 Remove the 3 screws 4 and detach the side plate 5 F 7 662 6 Remove the color toner supply clutch 1 F 7 663 7 11 22 Color Developing Clutch 7 11 22 1 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0004 1059 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 7 664 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 4 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 ...

Page 458: ... Detach the reader communications cable 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the right cover upper rear 3 F 7 666 7 11 22 3 Sliding the DC Controller Box 0004 1065 1 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the DC controller cover 2 F 7 667 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and slide the DC controller box 2 to the left F 7 668 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 459: ...20 During assembly work be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows Connect the connector of the harness 1 first and then the other harness 2 Fix the harnesses 1 2 in place using the wire saddle 3 so that the harness 1 is on the left side of the harness 2 F 7 672 Supplementary Information If the harness 1 is away from the side plate 4 of the DC controller box wrong detection...

Page 460: ... 1 and loosen the screw 2 then turn the tensioner 3 clockwise 3 Detach the timing belt 4 F 7 674 4 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 and free the 3 harnesses 2 from the 6 cable guides 3 5 Remove the 3 screws 4 and detach the side plate 5 F 7 675 6 Remove the 2 E rings 1 and detach the color developing clutch 2 F 7 676 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 4 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 ...

Page 461: ... While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 678 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 679 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 680 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide ou...

Page 462: ...lose the right deck 7 11 23 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2854 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 684 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 685 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 686 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 687 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 463: ...mbly 3 from the machine F 7 689 7 11 23 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Drive Assembly 0003 2855 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 690 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 691 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 692 5 Remove the screw 1 and shi...

Page 464: ...ssembly 3 Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 696 7 11 23 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0332 ...

Page 465: ...g blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring causing toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 700 7 11 23 8 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0003 2857 1 Disconnect the 5 conne...

Page 466: ...usion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 705 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreover when you close the process unit ...

Page 467: ... F 7 709 10 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 710 11 Slightly lift both ends 1 of the process unit and fully slide out the process unit 2 F 7 711 When you have slid out the process unit check to see if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in if soiled dry wipe the par...

Page 468: ...e drum scoop up sheet 1 on the hook 2 then pull it toward the front and fix in place with a screw 3 During the work be sure that the tip of the scoop up sheet is not bent between the cartridge and the photosensitive drum F 7 715 Making Checks After Mounting the Photosensitive Drum Scoop Up Sheet 1 Be sure that the scoop up sheet is not bent or broken from below 2 Be sure that the photosensitive dr...

Page 469: ...nnector cover 2 F 7 717 5 Disconnect the connector 1 F 7 718 6 Remove the 2 stepped screws 1 F 7 719 7 While shifting the secondary transfer unit 1 disconnect the 2 connectors 2 then detach the secondary transfer unit F 7 720 7 11 25 ITB Cleaning Unit 7 11 25 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8260 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 721 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 470: ...e fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 724 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 725 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 726 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the...

Page 471: ...pill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 730 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 731 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 732 7 11 25 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005 7255 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from t...

Page 472: ... 7 735 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 736 5 Remove the screw 1 and shift down the locking plate 2 F 7 737 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 5 screws 2 then detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly 3 F 7 738 7 11 25 6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0003 2530 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 7 ...

Page 473: ...ntermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 740 7 11 25 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0005 9861 1 Place the ITB unit 1 on paper for protection F 7 741 2 Turn the drive gear 1 by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt 2 about 50 mm F 7 742 3 If there is any toner 3 on the surface of th...

Page 474: ...ng toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 744 7 11 25 8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0002 6349 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then slide the ITB cleaning unit 2 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 7 745 1 2 3 1 1 2 ...

Page 475: ...le pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 747 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 748 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 749 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out th...

Page 476: ...lose the right deck 7 11 26 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0005 9398 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 753 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 754 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 755 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 756 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 477: ...mbly 3 from the machine F 7 758 7 11 26 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Drive Assembly 0005 9402 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 759 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 760 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 761 5 Remove the screw 1 and shi...

Page 478: ...ssembly 3 Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 765 7 11 26 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0340 ...

Page 479: ...ITB cleaning blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring causing toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 769 7 11 26 8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0005 9401 1 Remove th...

Page 480: ... of double sided tape from the end scraper 1 then attach the 2 end scrapers 1 by aligning their edges against the ends of the ITB cleaner plate F 7 772 Points to Note When Mounting the End Scraper Before starting the work be sure to clean the area with alcohol so that no adhesive will remain 7 11 27 Intermediate Transfer Unit 7 11 27 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8261 1 Remove the 2 screws...

Page 481: ...sembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 777 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 778 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 779 9 Close the right deck 7 11 27 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2485 1 Open the black toner supply...

Page 482: ...7 782 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 783 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 784 7 11 27 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005 7254 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 785 7 11 27 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003 2456 1 Open the color toner...

Page 483: ...Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 788 5 Remove the screw 1 and shift down the locking plate 2 F 7 789 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 5 screws 2 then detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly 3 F 7 790 7 11 27 6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0002 6336 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 7 791 3 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 484: ...nit 1 on paper for protection F 7 793 2 Turn the drive gear 1 by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt 2 about 50 mm F 7 794 3 If there is any toner 3 on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt dry wipe it with lint free paper F 7 795 When you remove the transfer cleaner drive assembly the ITB cleaning blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the interm...

Page 485: ...of print paper under the intermediate transfer unit during the work 7 11 28 Intermediate Transfer Belt 7 11 28 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8264 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 797 7 11 28 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2578 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 798 If a side paper deck exi...

Page 486: ...e 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 803 9 Close the right deck 7 11 28 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2580 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 804 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 805 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be...

Page 487: ...ctor 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 809 7 11 28 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Drive Assembly 0003 2577 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 810 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 811 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the ...

Page 488: ...xing feeding assembly 3 Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 816 7 11 28 7 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0003 2575 1 Remove t...

Page 489: ... by fitting its 2 pints 2 in the 2 holes of the fixing feeding assembly Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been already removed F 7 819 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the cable 3 from the 3 cable clamps 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the patch image reading unit 5 F 7 820 7 11 28 9 Removing the Idler Roller 0003 2655 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the pre transfer guide 2 F 7 82...

Page 490: ... will not be upside down See that the red marking 1 is found on the edge of the intermediate transfer belt Otherwise you must detach the belt turn it over and then attach it To prevent reversed attachment of the intermediate transfer belt there is a number marking 10 digit 2 on its surface edge in addition to the foregoing marking F 7 824 When you have replaced the ITB be sure to execute the follo...

Page 491: ...ing the ITB home position sensor right left take care to avoid touching the sensor widow otherwise wrong detention can occur 7 11 30 Secondary Transfer Roller Shift Motor 7 11 30 1 Secondary Transfer Roller Shift Motor 0002 6348 1 Fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 Remove the 24 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the secondary transfer cam assembly 3 F 7 826 3 Remove th...

Page 492: ...le pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 829 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 830 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 831 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out th...

Page 493: ...lose the right deck 7 11 31 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2587 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 835 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 836 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 837 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 838 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 494: ...mbly 3 from the machine F 7 840 7 11 31 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003 2585 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 841 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 842 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 843 5 Remove the screw 1 and shif...

Page 495: ...front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 847 7 11 31 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0341 1 Place the ITB unit 1 on paper for protection F 7 848 2 Turn th...

Page 496: ...belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 851 7 11 31 8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0003 2583 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then slide the ITB cleaning unit 2 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 7 852 7 11 31 9 Removing the Patch Image Reading Unit 00...

Page 497: ...at the ITB cleaner unit has been already removed F 7 854 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the cable 3 from the 3 cable clamps 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the patch image reading unit 5 F 7 855 7 11 31 10 Removing the Idler Roller 0003 2660 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the pre transfer guide 2 F 7 856 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 ...

Page 498: ...Roller 0002 6343 1 Shift the locking lever 1 in the direction of the arrows then lift the roller arm 2 F 7 859 2 Pick the shaft 1 of the primary transfer roller 2 and detach the roller F 7 860 7 11 31 13 Points to Note When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller 0005 9148 As the machine is used more and more the shavings from the primary transfer roller can start to collect on the rollers behind th...

Page 499: ... figure shows the roller it is only for reference purposes and the roller is not in its indicated position at this point in time F 7 861 Cleaning Procedure 1 Place the ITB cleaner drive unit 1 with its cover facing down then stand the ITB unit 2 F 7 862 2 Clean the rollers 1 and the inside scraper 2 using alcohol F 7 863 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 500: ...ansfer Internal Roller 7 11 32 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8266 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 865 7 11 32 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2592 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 866 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 867 3 Slide out the fixi...

Page 501: ...e 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 871 9 Close the right deck 7 11 32 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2593 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 872 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 873 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be...

Page 502: ...ctor 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 877 7 11 32 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003 2591 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 878 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 879 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the w...

Page 503: ...slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 884 7 11 32 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Interme...

Page 504: ...ITB cleaning blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring causing toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 888 7 11 32 8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0003 2589 1 Remove th...

Page 505: ... by fitting its 2 pints 2 in the 2 holes of the fixing feeding assembly Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been already removed F 7 891 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the cable 3 from the 3 cable clamps 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the patch image reading unit 5 F 7 892 7 11 32 10 Removing the Idler Roller 0003 2662 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the pre transfer guide 2 F 7 8...

Page 506: ...te transfer unit then shift the electrode 2 in counterclockwise direction F 7 896 2 Remove the E ring 1 washer 2 and bearing 3 from the front of the intermediate transfer unit 3 Remove the E ring 4 and the bearing 5 from the rear of the intermediate transfer unit 4 Remove the secondary transfer inside roller 6 F 7 897 7 11 33 Secondary Transfer Roller 7 11 33 1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit...

Page 507: ...01 7 While shifting the secondary transfer unit 1 disconnect the 2 connectors 2 then detach the secondary transfer unit F 7 902 7 11 33 2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Holder 0003 1986 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the secondary transfer guide 2 2 Remove the secondary transfer static eliminator holder 3 F 7 903 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 ...

Page 508: ...sfer roller be sure to hold the roller shaft Also take care not to touch the surface of the roller and not to damage the roller 7 11 34 ITB Cleaning Blade 7 11 34 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8267 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 906 7 11 34 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2597 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed c...

Page 509: ...eck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 910 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 911 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 912 9 Close the right deck 7 11 34 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2598 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 913 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle ...

Page 510: ... open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 917 7 11 34 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005 7259 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 918 7 11 34 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003 2596 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 919 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then ...

Page 511: ...mbly 3 F 7 923 7 11 34 6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0003 2595 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 7 924 2 Fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer as...

Page 512: ...on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt dry wipe it with lint free paper F 7 928 When you remove the transfer cleaner drive assembly the ITB cleaning blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring causing toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primar...

Page 513: ...When Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade 0005 9885 Whenever you need to replace the ITB cleaning blade be sure to go though the following steps to apply blade lubricant TKN 0480 to the edge of he blade 1 Turn the primary transfer roller locking lever 1 in the direction of the arrow to engage the intermediate transfer belt F 7 932 2 Apply an appropriate amount of blade lubricant 1 as if to sprinkle it...

Page 514: ...nd the intermediate transfer belt can cause the ITB home position sensor to make wrong detection 4 Turn the drive gear 1 in he direction of the arrow so that the area of blade lubricant 2 is found as shown F 7 935 5 Mount the ITB cleaning unit 2 to the intermediate transfer unit 1 then fix it in place using 2 screws 3 F 7 936 6 Turn the drive gear 3 until the area 2 of blade lubricant is no longer...

Page 515: ... F 7 938 7 11 35 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 6741 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 939 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 940 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 941 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and se...

Page 516: ...lose the right deck 7 11 35 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 6742 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 945 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 946 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 947 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 948 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 517: ...mbly 3 from the machine F 7 950 7 11 35 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003 6743 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 951 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 952 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 953 5 Remove the screw 1 and shif...

Page 518: ...front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 957 7 11 35 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0343 1 Place the ITB unit 1 on paper for protection F 7 958 2 Turn th...

Page 519: ...ner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 961 7 11 35 8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0003 6738 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then slide the ITB cleaning unit 2 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 7 962 7 11 35 9 Removing the ITB...

Page 520: ...over 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 965 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 966 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 967 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and sl...

Page 521: ...lose the right deck 7 11 36 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2607 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 971 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 972 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 973 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 974 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 522: ...mbly 3 from the machine F 7 976 7 11 36 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003 2605 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 977 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 978 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 979 5 Remove the screw 1 and shif...

Page 523: ...front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 983 7 11 36 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0342 1 Place the ITB unit 1 on paper for protection F 7 984 2 Turn th...

Page 524: ...belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 987 7 11 36 8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0003 2602 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then slide the ITB cleaning unit 2 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 7 988 7 11 36 9 Removing the Patch Image Reading Unit 00...

Page 525: ...at the ITB cleaner unit has been already removed F 7 990 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the cable 3 from the 3 cable clamps 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the patch image reading unit 5 F 7 991 7 11 36 10 Removing the Idler Roller 0003 2664 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the pre transfer guide 2 F 7 992 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 ...

Page 526: ... Static Eliminator 0002 6352 1 Shift down the lock lever 1 in the direction of the arrow then pull up the roller arm 2 2 Free the 2 claws 3 and detach the ITB static eliminator 4 F 7 995 7 11 37 Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator 7 11 37 1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Holder 0003 6734 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and ...

Page 527: ...ng the Potential Control PCB 0004 5166 1 Open the upper right cover 2 Remove the screw 1 and open the upper right cover 1 wider F 7 997 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the filter retainer 2 and the filter 3 4 Remove the screws 4 and detach the connector cover 4 F 7 998 5 Remove the screw 1 and detach the grounding wire 2 6 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the side plate 4 F 7 999 7 Disconnect the ...

Page 528: ... fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 1004 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 1005 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 1006 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open t...

Page 529: ...eased the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 1010 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 1011 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 1012 7 11 38 6 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0004 5171 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 1013 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 530: ...e to match the protrusion 5 of the drum fixing member and the protrusion 6 of the drum stop tool F 7 1017 2 When drawing out the process unit be sure to find out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2...

Page 531: ... 7 1019 8 Shift down the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever 1 in the direction of the arrow F 7 1020 9 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 toward the front F 7 1021 10 While pushing on the 2 hooks 1 found on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly fully slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 1022 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 532: ... developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover Take full care therefore not to damage the developing cylinder when you have detached the developing unit The waste toner collecting inside the machine can move into the fixing feeding assembly through the outlet be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work 2 The machine s black developing unit is equipped w...

Page 533: ... Push in the high voltage cable 1 through the opening 2 indicated in the figure F 7 1031 6 While holding the high voltage cable 1 in place as shown detach the black developing assembly 2 in upward direction When detaching the black developing assembly be sure to work with the high voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive ...

Page 534: ...r Unit 7 11 39 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8270 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 1034 7 11 39 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2673 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 1035 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 1036 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 535: ...k and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 1038 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 1039 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 1040 9 Close the right deck 7 11 39 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2675 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 1041 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottl...

Page 536: ... Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 1045 7 11 39 4 Sliding Out the Process Unit 0003 2672 1 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper right F 7 1046 2 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 found at the upper left F 7 1047 3 After freeing the high voltage connector cable 1 from the 2 wire saddles 2 fix the cable in place using the cable hook 3 F 7 1048 1 1...

Page 537: ...ind out the position of the protrusion 1 of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking 2 on the drum flange In the example in the figure the marking 2 on the drum flange is at on the left and at on the right in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member Moreover when you close the process unit it is important that the spatial relationship between the protrusion of the drum fixin...

Page 538: ...lide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 7 1055 11 Slightly lift both ends 1 of the process unit and fully slide out the process unit 2 F 7 1056 When you have slid out the process unit check to see if any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in if soiled dry wipe the part entire surface of the deck top panel 1 front bend of the deck top panel 2 lower rear sheet 4 loca...

Page 539: ...r under the process unit for the work 2 The machine s black developing unit is equipped with a potential sensor Do not touch the sensor window 1 indicated in the figure Moreover take care not to drop the black developing assembly or otherwise subject it to impact so as to avoid damage to the potential sensor F 7 1059 1 Open the harness guide used to fix the high voltage cable 1 in place F 7 1060 2...

Page 540: ...t at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive drum F 7 1065 7 11 39 6 Removing the ATR Sensor Unit 0002 6228 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Open the clamp 2 and free the harness for the wire guide 3 3 Remove the 2 screws 4 4 Free the 2 lock claws 5 and detach the ATR sensor unit 6 F 7 1066 7 11 40 Patch Image Sensor 7 11 40 1 Removing the Righ...

Page 541: ... fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 1070 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 1071 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 1072 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open t...

Page 542: ...ill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 1076 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 1077 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 1078 7 11 40 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005 7264 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from...

Page 543: ... 1081 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 1082 5 Remove the screw 1 and shift down the locking plate 2 F 7 1083 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 5 screws 2 then detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly 3 F 7 1084 7 11 40 6 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0003 8384 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 F ...

Page 544: ...it 1 on paper for protection F 7 1087 2 Turn the drive gear 1 by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt 2 about 50 mm F 7 1088 3 If there is any toner 3 on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt dry wipe it with lint free paper F 7 1089 When you remove the transfer cleaner drive assembly the ITB cleaning blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the inte...

Page 545: ...1 shown in the figure to lock it in place thus releasing the roller both front and rear F 7 1092 2 Stand the intermediate transfer unit by fitting its 2 pints 2 in the 2 holes of the fixing feeding assembly Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been already removed F 7 1093 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the cable 3 from the 3 cable clamps 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the patch im...

Page 546: ...h the connector 2 then detach the patch image reading sensor 3 F 7 1096 7 11 41 Idle Roller 7 11 41 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 0003 8272 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover upper 2 F 7 1097 7 11 41 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 2647 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 1098 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 547: ...sembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and slide out the right deck 2 F 7 1101 7 Remove the screw 1 from lower right and detach the front cover strap 2 F 7 1102 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 7 1103 9 Close the right deck 7 11 41 3 Removing the Hopper Assembly 0003 2648 1 Open the black toner supp...

Page 548: ...7 1106 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 1107 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 7 1108 7 11 41 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 0005 7262 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 1 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 from the machine F 7 1109 7 11 41 5 Removing Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0003 2646 1 Open the color toner...

Page 549: ...Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 1112 5 Remove the screw 1 and shift down the locking plate 2 F 7 1113 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 5 screws 2 then detach the transfer cleaner driver assembly 3 F 7 1114 7 11 41 6 Remove the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0003 2645 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 7 1115 3 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 550: ...it 1 on paper for protection F 7 1117 2 Turn the drive gear 1 by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt 2 about 50 mm F 7 1118 3 If there is any toner 3 on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt dry wipe it with lint free paper F 7 1119 When you remove the transfer cleaner drive assembly the ITB cleaning blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the inte...

Page 551: ... shown in the figure to lock it in place thus releasing the roller both front and rear F 7 1122 2 Stand the intermediate transfer unit by fitting its 2 pints 2 in the 2 holes of the fixing feeding assembly Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been already removed F 7 1123 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the cable 3 from the 3 cable clamps 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the patch ima...

Page 552: ... F 7 1125 2 Holding the shaft of the idler roller 1 pull the roller upright to detach F 7 1126 When detaching the roller take care not to damage the surface of the ITB by the roller 7 11 41 11 Remove the Idler Roller 0002 6344 1 Remove the 2 bushings 1 bearing 2 and E ring from the idler roller F 7 1127 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 553: ...r 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 7 1129 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 7 1130 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 7 1131 5 Push in the fixing feeding assembly and set the lever in place 6 Push the release button 1 of the right deck and sl...

Page 554: ...ose the right deck 7 11 42 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0004 5889 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 7 1135 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 7 1136 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 7 1137 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 7 1138 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 555: ...ly 3 from the machine F 7 1140 7 11 42 5 Removing the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly 0004 5890 1 Open the color toner supply mouth cover 1 F 7 1141 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the color toner supply cover 3 F 7 1142 3 Slightly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Disconcert the connector 1 to free it from the wire guide 2 F 7 1143 5 Remove the screw 1 and sh...

Page 556: ...ssembly 3 Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly 1 to the front when it stops shift it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to detach Do not touch the surface of the ITB Also be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB F 7 1147 7 11 42 7 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 0328...

Page 557: ...ITB cleaning blade 1 is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring causing toner 2 to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade 3 F 7 1151 7 11 42 8 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0004 5894 1 Remove t...

Page 558: ...ing feeding assembly Make sure that the ITB cleaner unit has been already removed F 7 1154 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the cable 3 from the 3 cable clamps 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the patch image reading unit 5 F 7 1155 7 11 42 10 Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid 0004 5880 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 7 1156 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the pat...

Page 559: ...ame way and the following shows how to string the charging wire of the primary charging assembly 1 Remove the shield plates left right of the charging assembly Be sure to detach the left and right shield plates separately so as to prevent warping of the primary charging assembly At this time be sure NOT to loosen both right and left mounting screws 1 at the same time on the left and right shield p...

Page 560: ...embly 10 Mount the left and right shield plates or 2 lids 11 Mount the wire cleaner At this time be sure to pay attention to the orientation of the wire cleaner 12 Wipe the charging wire with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 7 11 43 4 Stringing the Grid 0002 5849 1 Loosen the 2 mounting screws 1 used to hold the left and right shield plates in place 2 Loosen the 3 mounting screws 2 used to h...

Page 561: ...le making sure that the charging assembly is free of deformation 10 Tighten the mounting screws you loosened in steps 1 and 2 11 Wipe the grid wire with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Note Check to be sure that the grid wire is free of bends and twists Also the lengths of the wire must be at equal intervals The grid wire must be in the groove of the block 7 11 43 5 Adjusting the Primary Ch...

Page 562: ...Chapter 7 7 296 ...

Page 563: ...Chapter 8 Pickup Feeding System ...

Page 564: ......

Page 565: ...ry Jam 8 19 8 3 2 2 Stationary Jam at Power On 8 20 8 3 3 Other Jams 8 21 8 3 3 1 Wrong Paper Size 8 21 8 3 3 2 Wrong Material 8 21 8 4 Cassette 8 22 8 4 1 Overview 8 22 8 4 2 Identifying Paper Sizes 8 23 8 4 3 Setting the Universal Cassette 8 25 8 4 4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper 8 26 8 5 Cassette Pick Up Unit 8 28 8 5 1 Overview 8 28 8 5 2 Basic Sequence 8 29 8 5 3 Movement of the Lifte...

Page 566: ...g the Rear Cover lower 8 58 8 11 6 2 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 8 58 8 11 6 3 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Motor 8 58 8 11 7 Right Deck Pickup Motor 8 59 8 11 7 1 Removing the Right Cover lower rear 8 59 8 11 7 2 Removing the Rear Cover lower 8 59 8 11 7 3 Removing the Waste Toner Bottle Base 8 59 8 11 7 4 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Motor 8 60 8 11 8 Vertical Path Motor 8 60 8 11 8 1 R...

Page 567: ...ox 8 75 8 11 20 7 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller Box 8 75 8 11 20 8 Removing the HV1 PCB 8 76 8 11 20 9 Manual Feed Pre Registration Motor 8 77 8 11 21 Horizontal Registration Assembly 8 77 8 11 21 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 8 77 8 11 21 2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit 8 78 8 11 22 Registration Motor 8 79 8 11 22 1 Removing the Fixing Feeding Driver PCB 8 79 8 11 22...

Page 568: ...Contents 8 11 28 5 Removing the Controller Box Cover 8 89 8 11 28 6 Removing the Controller Box 8 90 8 11 28 7 Removing the Outside Delivery Motor 8 91 ...

Page 569: ...t deck right left 1500 sheets 80 g m2 cassette 3 4 550 sheets 80 g m2 manual feed tray 100 sheets 80 g m2 Size of paper front deck left right A4 B5 LTR cassette 3 4 A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R 305X457mm 320X450mm SRA3 330X483mm 11X17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR EXEC 12X18 12 5 8X17 11 16 13X19 manual feed tray main scanning 100 to 330 mm sub scanning 148 5 to 482 mm Weight of paper front deck left right 64 to ...

Page 570: ...tration roller assembly 2 Manual feed pickup assembly 3 Secondary transfer assembly 4 Right deck pickup assembly 5 Cassette pickup assembly 6 Left deck pickup assembly 7 Duplexing feeding assembly 8 Delivery assembly 9 Fixing assembly 10 Feeding assembly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ...

Page 571: ...aration roller 5 Pre registration roller 6 Duplexing outlet roller 7 Vertical path 1 roller 8 Right deck feed roller 9 Right deck separation roller 10 Vertical path 2 roller 11 Vertical path 3 roller 12 Cassette 3 feed roller 13 Cassette 3 separation roller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 33 ...

Page 572: ...oller 20 Duplexing right roller 21 Secondary transfer roller 22 Duplexing confluence roller 23 Left deck separation roller 24 Left deck feed roller 25 Left deck pickup roller 26 Duplexing left roller 27 Reversing 2 roller 28 Duplexing inlet roller 29 Reversing 1 roller 30 Pressure roller 31 Inside paper roller 32 Outside delivery roller 33 Fixing roller 34 Outside heat roller ...

Page 573: ...he Paper Path 0003 2745 F 8 3 1 Manual feed pickup 2 Side paper deck pickup 3 Cassette 4 pickup 4 Cassette 3 pickup 5 Right deck pickup 6 Left deck pickup 7 Face down delivery 8 Face up delivery 9 Duplexing re pickup 3 4 1 2 5 6 9 8 7 ...

Page 574: ... Inside delivery sensor 4 Fixing inlet sensor 5 Post transfer sensor 6 Duplexing confluence sensor 7 Transparency sensor front PS3 8 Registration sensor 9 Transparency sensor rear PS29 10 Manual feed paper sensor 11 Vertical path confluence sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 16 17 18 19 ...

Page 575: ...ght deck pickup sensor 15 Vertical path 2 sensor 16 Vertical path 3 sensor 17 Cassette 3 pickup sensor 18 Vertical path 4 sensor 19 Cassette 4 pickup sensor 20 Left deck stationary sensor 21 Left deck pickup sensor 22 Duplexing left sensor 23 Reversal vertical path sensor ...

Page 576: ...ual feed pickup solenoid 2 Deck right pickup solenoid 3 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid 4 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid 5 Left deck confluence solenoid 6 Deck left pickup solenoid 7 Reversal shifting solenoid 8 Delivery solenoid SL1 SL6 SL7 SL4 SL5 SL3 SL8 SL9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 577: ...stration motor M9 Outside delivery motor M10 Duplexing reversal motor M11 Duplexing left motor M12 Duplexing middle motor M13 Duplexing right motor M14 Right deck pull off motor M15 Vertical path motor M17 Right deck pickup motor M18 Left deck pickup motor M19 Cassette pickup motor M8 M6 M14 M17 M15 M19 M13 M12 M4 M9 M10 M18 M11 ...

Page 578: ...motor M6 Registration motor M8 Fixing motor M4 Outside delivery motor M9 Delivery solenoid SL7 Transparency sensor front rear PS3 29 acceleration control used rotates at 1 3 speed 92 mm sec Print start STBY PRINT LSTR acceleration control used rotates at 1 3 speed 92 mm sec 1 pre registration stop STBY PRINT LSTR 1 1 1 1 2 3 rotates at 2 3 speed 184 mm sec Right deck pickup motor M17 Right deck pi...

Page 579: ...TBY PRINT LSTR 1 1 1 1 acceleration control used rotates at 1 3 speed 92 mm sec 1 pre registration stop Right deck pull off motor M14 Manual feed pre registration motor M6 Registration motor M8 Fixing motor M4 Outside delivery motor M9 Delivery solenoid SL7 Transparency sensor front rear PS3 29 Print start Manual pickup solenoid SL1 STBY PRINT LSTR Manual feed pre registration motor M6 Registratio...

Page 580: ... mm sec F 8 11 Instead of relying on electromagnetic clutches the machine s feeding system makes use of a number of drive motors for finer control of interval acceleration thus increasing the level of productivity The rate of acceleration in response to transfer speed at respective intervals is as follows heavy paper 1 heavy paper 2 OHP normal 2 3 speed 2 3 speed normal normal 1 3 speed weight 64 ...

Page 581: ...e trailing edge of the preceding paper and the leading edge of the following paper otherwise occurring if the speed was fixed to x1 8 because of the short distance from the point of pickup to the point of registration Transfer speed Normal 276 mm sec 2 3 speed 184 mm sec 1 3 speed 92 mm sec Interval A to D A to D A to D Feed speed Right deck 1 8 times as fast speed partly variable 2 2 2 times as f...

Page 582: ... Delivery T 8 4 Transfer speed Normal speed 276 mm sec Interval A to B B to C C to D Feed speed right deck 1 8 times speed variable speed 1 8 times speed Transfer speed Normal speed 276 mm sec 2 3 speed 184 mm sec 1 3 Speed 92 mm sec Interval E to F to H E to F to H E to F to H Feed speed face up delivery equivalent to transfer speed 3 equivalent to transfer speed equivalent to transfer speed A D ...

Page 583: ...duplexing mode 1 3 speed cannot occur at tune of transfer Transfer speed Normal speed 276 mm sec 2 3 speed 184 mm sc 1 3 speed 92 mm sec Interval E to F F to G to H E to F F to G to H E to F F to G to H Feed speed Face down delivery equivalent to transfer speed 2 3 as fast 4 equivalent to transfer speed 3 4 times as fast 4 equivalent to transfer speed 3 4 times as fast 4 Transfer speed Normal spee...

Page 584: ... if the source of paper is the right deck and at the same time while the normal transfer speed is used i e variable speed control is executed paper will not be stopped before registration T 8 7 F 8 16 Source of paper Point of stopping paper Right deck 1 about 10 mm ahead of the vertical path 0 sensor PS31 Left deck 2 about 25 mm ahead of the duplexing confluence sensor PS18 Cassette 3 3 about 24 m...

Page 585: ...p motor goes on F 8 17 T 8 8 Source of paper Motor Sensor used Right deck right deck pickup motor M17 right deck pickup sensor PS33 Left deck left deck pickup motor M18 left deck pickup sensor PS40 Cassette 3 cassette pickup motor M19 cassette 3 pickup sensor PS48 Cassette 4 cassette pickup motor M19 cassette 4 pickup sensor PS54 Jam check Sensor N Feed motor Normal 1 specific length of time feed ...

Page 586: ... 8 9 Sensor Remarks Vertical path confluence sensor PS32 Vertical path 0 sensor PS31 Vertical path 1 sensor PS60 Vertical path 2 sensor PS61 Vertical path 3 sensor PS62 Vertical path 4 sensor PS63 Transparency sensor front PS3 if not transparency Transparency sensor rear PS29 if not transparency Registration sensor PS9 if transparency Post transfer sensor PS10 Inside delivery sensor PS12 Reversal ...

Page 587: ... PS61 Vertical path 3 sensor PS62 Vertical path 4 sensor PS63 Transparency sensor front PS3 if not transparency Transparency sensor rear PS29 if not transparency Registration sensor PS9 if transparency Reversal sensor PS14 if face down delivery Outside delivery sensor PS13 Reversal vertical path sensor PS15 Duplexing left sensor PS17 Duplexing confluence sensor PS18 Jam check Sensor N Normal L pap...

Page 588: ...ertical path 0 sensor PS31 Vertical path 1 sensor PS60 Vertical path 2 sensor PS61 Vertical pith 3 sensor PS62 Vertical path 4 sensor PS63 Transparency sensor front PS3 Transparency sensor rear PS29 Registration sensor PS9 Reversal sensor PS14 Outside delivery sensor PS13 Reversal vertical path sensor PS15 Duplexing left sensor PS17 Duplexing confluence sensor PS18 Fixing inlet sensor PS11 Left de...

Page 589: ...3 2 Wrong Material 0003 2810 The machine identifies a jam if it detects paper of a material not indicated by the transparency sensor T 8 13 Sensor Remarks Transparency sensor front PS3 if not transparency Transparency sensor rear PS29 if not transparency Registration sensor PS9 if transparency Sensor Ttansparency sensor front PS3 Ttansparency sensor rear PS29 ...

Page 590: ...te by means of the side guide plate and the rear guide plate The index special guide must be fitted before using an index sheet The cassette is set to a specific paper size using the cassette size dial F 8 20 1 Rear guide plate 2 Side guide plate 3 Cassette size dial 4 Index special guide 3 2 1 4 ...

Page 591: ...es on off of the 4 actuators enabling the identification of as many as 15 paper sizes If the cassette is absent all 4 actuators are off causing the machine to identify the absence of a cassette The cassette is set to AB configuration or Inch configuration by means of the switch mounted to the side of the dial When the cassette is fitted to the machine the switch goes off or on to indicate that the...

Page 592: ...FF OFF OFF A5R ON OFF ON ON OFF A4 ON ON ON ON OFF A4R OFF ON ON ON OFF A3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF B5 ON ON OFF ON OFF B5R OFF OFF OFF ON OFF B4 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 305x457mm ON ON OFF OFF OFF 320x450mm SRA3 ON ON ON OFF OFF 330x483mm OFF OFF ON OFF OFF U1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF U2 OFF ON ON OFF OFF Inch Configuration Size SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 no cassette OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF STMTR ON OFF ON ON ON LTR ON ON ON ...

Page 593: ...ult sizes identified in relation to U1 through U4 T 8 16 In addition to the foregoing default sizes the following may be assigned in service mode T 8 17 U1 G LTR U2 FLSC U3 G LGL U4 A LTR Universal U1 thorough U4 Size FLSC OFI E OFI B OFI A OFI M OFI FOLI A FLS G LTR G LGL A LTR LTR A LTRR LTRR ...

Page 594: ...evel of remaining paper T 8 18 F 8 22 1 Tray 2 Paper level sensor flag 3 Cassette paper level sensor A 4 Cassette paper level sensor B 5 Lifter motor 6 Lifter gear 7 Cassette paper sensor 8 Flag Sensor Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper level sensor A PS52 PS58 Paper level sensor B PS53 PS59 Paper sensor PS50 SP56 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 595: ... to about 10 of capacity ON ON OFF about 10 or less of capacity ON no paper Full of paper Empty of paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Paper Paper Paper Paper tray Flag Cassette paper sensor OFF OFF Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A ON OFF Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A ON ON View Front the Front of the Machine ...

Page 596: ... moved ahead to the feed path to reach the vertical path roller The pickup roller feed roller and separation roller of the cassette 3 4 are driven by the cassette pickup motor M19 and its drive is switched from the cassette 3 pickup assembly to the cassette 4 pickup assembly by reversing the rotation of the cassette pickup motor F 8 24 1 Cassette 3 4 pickup solenoid SL8 SL9 2 Cassette 3 4 limit se...

Page 597: ...ckup solenoid SL8 Vertical path 2 sensor PS61 Vertical path motor M15 Right deck pickup motor M17 STBY PRINT LSTR 1 1 1 1 acceleration control used rotates at 1 3 speed 92 mm sec 1 pre registration stop Right deck pull off motor M14 Manual feed pre registration motor M6 Registration motor M8 Fixing motor M4 Outside delivery motor M9 Delivery solenoid SL7 Transparency sensor front rear PS3 29 Print...

Page 598: ... surface of paper on the other hand the lifter stops to move up The limit sensor is used to prevent damage in the event that the lifter motor fails to stop F 8 26 1 Cassette 3 4 pickup solenoid SL8 SL9 2 Cassette 3 4 limit sensor PS49 PS55 3 Cassette 3 4 lifter sensor PS51 PS57 4 Cassette 3 4 pickup sensor PS48 PS54 5 Vertical path 3 4 sensor PS62 PS63 6 Cassette 3 4 feed roller 7 Cassette 3 4 sep...

Page 599: ...ller and manual feed pull off roller are driven by the pre registration motor The paper on the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is monitored using the manual feed paper sensor PS6 The last sheet of the tray on the other hand is identified using the last paper sensor PS7 F 8 27 F 8 28 1 Manual feed pull off upper roller 2 Manual feed separation roller 3 Manual feed pickup roller 4 Last paper sen...

Page 600: ...e movement of the side guides The width of the side guide on the manual feed tray is adjusted by the user by manually moving the guides F 8 30 1 Slide guide rear 2 Variable resistor 3 Manual feed tray 4 Slid guide front Manual pickup solenoid SL1 STBY PRINT LSTR Manual feed pre registration motor M6 Registration motor M8 Fixing motor M4 Outside delivery motor M9 Delivery solenoid SL7 Transparency ...

Page 601: ...7 to take on a pulse wave form The last paper pickup roller rotates only when the last sheet is picked up and remains stationary at other times if 4 or more output pulses are detected from the last paper sensor therefore the machine automatically assumes that the paper in question is the last sheet F 8 31 Manual feed last paper sensor Manual feed last paper sensor Last paper detecting roll Last sh...

Page 602: ...h The pickup roller feed roller and separation roller are driven by the deck pickup motor M17 M18 F 8 32 T 8 20 1 Left deck pickup solenoid SL6 10 Right deck pickup solenoid SL7 2 Left deck limit sensor PS41 11 Right deck limit sensor PS34 3 Left deck lifter sensor PS43 12 Right deck lifter sensor PS36 4 Left deck stationary sensor PS47 13 Vertical path 1 sensor PS60 5 Left deck pickup sensor PS40...

Page 603: ... Fixing motor M4 Outside delivery motor M9 Delivery solenoid SL7 Transparency sensor front rear PS3 29 acceleration control used rotates at 1 3 speed 92 mm sec Print start STBY PRINT LSTR acceleration control used rotates at 1 3 speed 92 mm sec 1 pre registration stop STBY PRINT LSTR 1 1 1 1 2 3 rotates at 2 3 speed 184 mm sec Right deck pickup motor M17 Right deck pickup sensor PS33 Deck right pi...

Page 604: ...in service mode The left and right front decks may be switched to A4 B5 or LTR as follows 1 Change the position of the paper size guide plates of the deck 2 Register the new paper size in service mode Service Mode COPIER OPTION CST P SZ C1 Right deck paper size selection setting 0 A4 default 1 B5 2 LTR COPIER OPTION CST SZ C2 Left deck paper size selection setting 0 A4 default 1 B5 2 LTR ...

Page 605: ...per level sensor A PS37 PS44 Paper level sensor B PS38 PS45 Paper sensor PS35 SP42 Paper level sensor A Paper level sensor B Paper sensor Level of paper Indication on control panel ON ON OFF from 100 to about 50 of capacity OFF ON OFF from about 50 to about 25 of capacity OFF OFF OFF about 25 or less of capacity ON no paper Paper level 50 to 25 Paper level 25 or less of capacity B A B A B A Paper ...

Page 606: ...s not a transparency the transparency sensor front PS3 and the transparency sensor rear PS29 detect it The transparency sensor front and the transparency sensor rear serve to find out whether the arriving medium is a transparency or not if a plain paper is detected when the machine is in transparency mode or if a transparency is detected when the machine is in plain paper mode the machine will ide...

Page 607: ...aper to the duplexing left feeding assembly The paper is caused to arch in the duplexing left roller assembly for removal of any skew all of which takes place at the same time as horizontal registration detection Thereafter the duplexing left motor M11 goes on to move the paper to the re pickup standby position which starts at specific timing of operation to move the paper to the duplexing right f...

Page 608: ...aining off the reversing flapper is in up position so that the paper moves to the reversal vertical path assembly F 8 38 2 When the trailing edge of paper reaches a point about 20 mm from the reversing 2 roller the duplexing reversal motor M10 stops rotates in reverse to move the paper to the duplexing left feeding assembly F 8 39 SL5 OFF PS15 PS15 20mm M10 Stops rotates in reverse Reversal 2 roll...

Page 609: ...o butted against the duplexing left roller so that it arches F 8 40 4 When the paper moves past the duplexing left roller it stops when its leading edge reaches a point 35 mm from the duplexing left roller remaining in wait for the next operation F 8 41 M11 M10 Horizontal registration detection arching PS17 PS24 Duplex left roller M11 Re pickup standby position 35mm ...

Page 610: ...of time thereafter the duplexing left motor rotates to move the paper to the duplexing right feeding assembly and then to the registration roller assembly Paper will never stop in the duplexing right feeding assembly F 8 42 M12 M13 PS18 ...

Page 611: ...r to move to the point of 13x19 paper detection Inside the duplexing left feeding assembly the paper reaches the duplexing left sensor PS17 thereafter the horizontal registration motor M28 goes on and the horizontal registration sensor PS24 starts a search for the edge of the paper The search start position is set to a point of the paper edge in the cassette of A4 165 mm from the middle of the uni...

Page 612: ...rom the paper until it detects the absence of paper after it has been moved 2 mm from the paper it is then moved closer to the paper once again identifying the point at which paper is detected as the edge of paper F 8 45 2 2 If the absence of paper is identified the horizontal registration sensor is moved away by 2 mm from the paper and then back closer to the paper identifying the point at which ...

Page 613: ...Chapter 8 8 45 8 9 3 A5 5 Sheets in Circulation 0003 2875 F 8 47 F 8 48 1 2 4 3 Rotates in reverse 2 1 1 3 3 2 2 Re pickup standby position 1 1 6 5 8 7 4 4 3 3 2 2 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 614: ...Chapter 8 8 46 F 8 49 10 9 12 11 5 5 4 4 3 5 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 615: ...Chapter 8 8 47 8 9 4 A3 3 Sheets in Circulation 0003 2877 F 8 50 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 2 1 1 1 Rotates in reverse Re pickup standby position ...

Page 616: ...Chapter 8 8 48 F 8 51 2 1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 617: ...hen making single print of a single original When making multiple prints of a single original however face down if a finisher is installed If heavy paper 3 is selected If the source of paper is from the manual feed tray and the paper is not plain paper default size Face down When the selected mode of operation is other than the above however face down delivery may be selected for the above modes u...

Page 618: ...he duplexing feeding assembly F 8 53 2 A specific period of time after the reversal sensor PS14 goes on the duplexing reversal motor M10 rotates in normal direction it then stops when the trailing edge of paper reaches the reversal stop position 15 mm farther down the reversal confluence point F 8 54 M10 SL5 ON PS14 Rotation in normal direction M10 Stop SL5 OFF PS14 15mm Reversal stop position ...

Page 619: ...ceding paper moves past the curl removing roller by 20 mm the reversal shifting solenoid SL3 goes on to move away the reversal 1 roller in preparation for the arrival of the following paper The duplexing reversal motor M10 stops after the trailing edge of the paper has moved past the reversal 2 roller F 8 56 M10 Rotation in reverse M10 M9 Stop SL3 ON Reversal 2 roller 20mm Curl removing roller ...

Page 620: ...ic period of time after the reversal sensor PS14 goes on in response to the arrival of the following paper the duplexing reversal motor M10 starts to move in normal direction When the leading edge of the following paper moves past the reversal 1 roller by about 20 mm the reversal shifting solenoid SL3 goes off so that the following paper is moved to the reversal stop position Then the machine repe...

Page 621: ...ove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector cover 2 F 8 59 5 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the pickup unit cassette 3 4 2 F 8 60 8 11 2 Cassette Pickup Motor 8 11 2 1 Removing the Right Cover lower rear 0003 6626 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover lower rear 2 F 8 61 8 11 2 2 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 6627 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower...

Page 622: ... 2 to detach it in the direction of the arrow F 8 64 8 11 2 4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 0003 6634 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the cassette pickup motor 3 F 8 65 8 11 3 Cassette Lifter Motor 8 11 3 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 8332 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 8 66 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 623: ...rews 4 and detach the DC power supply unit 5 F 8 68 8 11 3 3 Removing the Cassette Lifter Motor 0003 5800 1 Slide out the cassette 3 or 4 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 3 screws 3 then detach the cassette lifter motor 3 F 8 69 8 11 4 Left Deck Lifter Motor 8 11 4 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 6675 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 8 70 1 2 4 5 1 3 2 2 ...

Page 624: ...ove the 4 screws 4 and detach the DC power supply unit 5 F 8 72 8 11 4 3 Removing the Left Deck Lifter Motor 0003 6677 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 3 screws 2 then detach the left deck lift motor 3 F 8 73 8 11 5 Right Deck Lifter Motor 8 11 5 1 Removing the Right Cover lower rear 0003 6655 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover lower rear 2 F 8 74 1 2 4 5 1 3 2 2 1 1 4 4...

Page 625: ...ner Bottle Base 0003 6657 1 Remove the waste toner bottle 1 F 8 76 2 Remove the 7 screws 1 and lift the waste toner bottle base 2 to detach it in the direction of the arrow F 8 77 8 11 5 4 Removing the Right Deck Lifter Motor 0003 6659 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 3 screws 2 then detach the right deck lifter motor 3 F 8 78 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 ...

Page 626: ... 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and free the harness 2 F 8 80 2 Disconnect the 16 connectors 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 to free the harness 3 3 Remove the 4 screws 4 and detach the DC power supply unit 5 F 8 81 8 11 6 3 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Motor 0003 6668 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the left deck pickup motor 3 F 8 82 1 1 1 2 1 2 4 5 1 3 2 2 1 1 4...

Page 627: ... rear 2 F 8 83 8 11 7 2 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 6648 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 8 84 8 11 7 3 Removing the Waste Toner Bottle Base 0003 6649 1 Remove the waste toner bottle 1 F 8 85 2 Remove the 7 screws 1 and lift the waste toner bottle base 2 to detach it in the direction of the arrow F 8 86 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 628: ... 8 Vertical Path Motor 8 11 8 1 Removing the Right Cover lower rear 0004 1074 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover lower rear 2 F 8 88 8 11 8 2 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0004 1076 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 8 89 8 11 8 3 Removing the Waste Toner Bottle Base 0004 1073 1 Remove the waste toner bottle 1 F 8 90 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 629: ...nnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the vertical path motor 3 F 8 92 8 11 9 Right Deck Pull Off Motor 8 11 9 1 Removing the Right Cover lower rear 0004 1078 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover lower rear 2 F 8 93 8 11 9 2 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0004 1079 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 8 94 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 630: ...h it in the direction of the arrow F 8 96 8 11 9 4 Removing Right Deck Pull Off Motor 0004 1080 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the right deck pull off motor 3 F 8 97 8 11 10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 8 11 10 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 8334 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 8 98 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 631: ...upply unit 5 F 8 100 8 11 10 3 Removing the Cassette Lifter Motor 0003 5803 1 Slide out the cassette 3 or 4 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 3 screws 3 then detach the cassette lifter motor 3 F 8 101 8 11 10 4 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor 0003 5804 1 Slide out the cassette 3 4 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and open the 2 wire saddles 2 3 Remove the screw 3 and detach the sens...

Page 632: ...el sensor 2 F 8 104 8 11 11 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 8 11 11 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 6669 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 8 105 8 11 11 2 Removing the Left Cover lower 0003 6670 1 Remove the 2 grip covers 1 2 Remove the 6 screws 2 and detach the left cover lower 3 F 8 106 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 633: ...move the 4 screws 1 from the left side F 8 107 2 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 F 8 108 3 Disconnect the 8 connectors 1 and open the wire saddle 2 F 8 109 4 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the AC driver box 2 F 8 110 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 634: ...hook 1 and detach the left deck paper level sensor F 8 113 8 11 12 Right Deck Pickup Assembly 8 11 12 1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit 0002 9781 1 Slide out the right deck 2 Remove the upper rear right cover 3 Open the lower right cover 4 Open the manual feed unit 5 Remove the screw 1 and open the manual feed unit wide F 8 114 6 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the connector cover 2 F 8 115 3...

Page 635: ... left deck and remove the 2 screws 1 from the left side of the compartment F 8 117 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 from the right side of the deck compartment F 8 118 4 Lift the left deck compartment 1 to detach F 8 119 5 Put back the 2 rails 1 into the machine F 8 120 6 In the same way detach the right deck compartment 7 Disconnect the connector 2 found at the rear of the left deck pickup assembly 1 F 8 ...

Page 636: ...ile supporting the bottom of the left deck pickup assembly slide out the pickup assembly 1 to detach F 8 123 8 11 14 Right Deck Pickup Feed Separation Roller 8 11 14 1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers 0003 8601 1 Slide out the right deck 2 From both sides of the deck compartment 1 remove the 2 screws each 2 then detach the deck compartment F 8 124 F 8 125 3 Push the 2 rai...

Page 637: ...he protrusion 2 indicated in the diagram faces the rear F 8 128 8 11 15 Left Deck Pickup Feed Separation Roller 8 11 15 1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Feed and Separation Roller 0003 8616 1 Slide out the right deck 2 Slide out the left deck 3 From both sides of the left deck compartment 1 remove the 2 screws each 2 then detach the left deck compartment F 8 129 F 8 130 4 Push the 2 rails 1 into th...

Page 638: ...he rear F 8 133 8 11 16 Cassette Pickup Feed Separation Roller 8 11 16 1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers 0003 8618 1 Slide out the cassette 3 4 2 Free the hook 1 and pull out the pickup roller 2 3 Remove the resin ring 3 and pull out the feed roller 4 4 Remove the resin ring 5 and pull out the separation roller 67 F 8 134 When mounting the pickup roller 1 be sure that the ...

Page 639: ...sed to hold the grounding wire in place disconnect the connector 2 and detach the harness retainer 3 F 8 137 4 Lift the manual feed unit 1 to detach F 8 138 8 11 18 Manual Feed Roller 8 11 18 1 Removing the Manual Feed Roller 0002 9766 1 Open the manual feed unit 2 Release the claw 1 and detach the gear 2 and the bushing 3 F 8 139 3 Remove the feeder upper cover 1 F 8 140 1 2 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 640: ...claw 1 and detach the gear 2 and the bushing 3 F 8 142 3 Remove the feeder upper cover 1 F 8 143 4 Remove the resin ring 1 and pull out the feed roller 2 to the front F 8 144 8 11 19 2 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller 0002 9780 1 Lift the paper guide to free the hook 1 then slide it to free the claw 2 thereby detaching the paper guide front 3 and the other paper guide rear 4 F 8 145 1 2 ...

Page 641: ...o facilitate the work F 8 146 3 Pick its tab 1 and pull out the separation roller 2 toward the rear F 8 147 8 11 20 Manual Feed Pre Regustration Motor 8 11 20 1 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 8323 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 8 148 3 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 8 149 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 ...

Page 642: ...8 11 20 3 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 8331 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 8 151 8 11 20 4 Removing the Right Cover lower rear 0003 8305 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover lower rear 2 F 8 152 8 11 20 5 Sliding the DC Controller Box 0003 6522 1 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the DC controller cover 2 F 8 153 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 643: ...ting the DC Controller Box 0005 7217 During assembly work be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows Connect the connector of the harness 1 first and then the other harness 2 Fix the harnesses 1 2 in place using the wire saddle 3 so that the harness 1 is on the left side of the harness 2 F 8 158 Supplementary Information If the harness 1 is away from the side plate 4 of the...

Page 644: ... HV1 transformer lid 2 F 8 159 F 8 160 2 Disconnect the 6 connectors 1 and free the harness from the 6 cable guides 2 F 8 161 3 Free the harness 1 from the 2 cable guides 2 then remove the screw F 8 162 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and lift the HV1 PCB 2 to detach F 8 163 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 ...

Page 645: ...t cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 8 165 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 8 166 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 8 167 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timi...

Page 646: ... detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 8 171 8 11 21 2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit 0003 7968 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the handle 2 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the fixing feeding front cover 4 F 8 172 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the duplexing left motor 4 together with its base F 8 173 1...

Page 647: ...e guide 2 10 Remove the screw 3 and slide the horizontal registration unit 4 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 8 177 8 11 22 Registration Motor 8 11 22 1 Removing the Fixing Feeding Driver PCB 0003 7031 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the handle 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the fixing feeding front cover 4 F 8 178 1 1 2...

Page 648: ...3 wire saddles 2 F 8 180 7 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 8 181 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 and shift the fixing feeding driver PCB 2 toward the front to detach F 8 182 8 11 22 2 Removing the Registration Motor 0003 7032 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the registration motor 3 F 8 183 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 649: ... feeding assembly 2 F 8 184 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 8 185 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 8 186 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 8 187 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing a...

Page 650: ...ill be free of damage F 8 190 8 11 23 2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit 0003 7978 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the handle 2 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the fixing feeding front cover 4 F 8 191 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the duplexing left motor 4 together with its base F 8 192 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 4 3 2 2 1 ...

Page 651: ...5 9 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and open the wire guide 2 10 Remove the screw 3 and slide the horizontal registration unit 4 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 8 196 8 11 23 3 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor 0003 7981 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and open the 2 wire guides 2 to detach the horizontal registration motor 3 F 8 197 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 4 2 1 2 1 3 ...

Page 652: ...the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 8 199 8 11 24 2 Removing the Duplexing Reversal Motor 0004 1086 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the duplexing reversal motor 3 F 8 200 8 11 25 Duplex Left Motor 8 11 25 1 Removing the Fixing Front Cover 0004 1087 1 Open the font cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Open the re reversal delivery cove...

Page 653: ...he screw 1 and detach the handle 2 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the fixing feeding front cover 4 F 8 203 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the duplexing left motor 4 together with its base F 8 204 5 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the duplexing left motor 2 F 8 205 2 1 2 3 3 2 1 4 3 4 3 2 2 1 2 1 ...

Page 654: ... the handle 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the fixing feeding front cover 4 F 8 206 5 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing feeding upper cover 2 F 8 207 6 Disconnect the 6 connectors 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 F 8 208 7 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 8 209 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 and shift the fixing feeding driver PCB 2 toward the front to detach F 8 210 3 2 1 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 ...

Page 655: ...ixing Feeding Driver PCB 0004 1083 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the handle 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the fixing feeding front cover 4 F 8 212 5 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing feeding upper cover 2 F 8 213 6 Disconnect the 6 connectors 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 F 8 214 7 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 8...

Page 656: ...Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws then detach the duplexing right motor 3 F 8 217 8 11 28 Outside Delivery Motor 8 11 28 1 Removing the Left Cover upper 0003 6681 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the left cover upper 2 F 8 218 8 11 28 2 Removing the Delivery Cover 0003 6682 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 8 219 2 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 657: ... 220 8 11 28 4 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 6684 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 8 221 3 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 8 222 8 11 28 5 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0003 6686 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the controller box cover 2 F 8 223 F 8 224 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 658: ...ller Box 0003 6687 1 Disconnect the 9 connectors 1 F 8 225 F 8 226 2 Free the harness from the 3 harness retainers 1 F 8 227 F 8 228 3 Remove the 9 screws 1 used to fix the main controller box in place F 8 229 F 8 230 F 8 231 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 659: ...During removal mounting be sure to take care not to damage the connector 2 found at the joint to the DC controller PCB F 8 233 8 11 28 7 Removing the Outside Delivery Motor 0003 6688 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws then detach the outside delivery motor 3 F 8 234 1 2 1 2 3 ...

Page 660: ...Chapter 8 8 92 ...

Page 661: ...Chapter 9 Fixing System ...

Page 662: ......

Page 663: ...he End of the Roller 9 17 9 3 3 External Heat Roller Drive Control 9 17 9 3 3 1 Overview 9 17 9 4 Fixing Cleaning Web Mechanisms 9 19 9 4 1 Overview 9 19 9 4 2 Web Retaining Mechanism 9 20 9 5 Protective Functions 9 22 9 5 1 Detecting Overheating Using Thermistors 9 22 9 5 2 Cutting Off the Power Using Thermal Switches 9 22 9 5 3 Errors 9 22 9 6 Parts Replacement Procedure 9 24 9 6 1 Fixing Unit 9...

Page 664: ... 6 10 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 9 48 9 6 10 2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch 9 49 9 6 10 3 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch 9 49 9 6 11 Upper Fixing Heater 9 50 9 6 11 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 9 50 9 6 11 2 Removing the Fixing Upper Heater 9 51 9 6 12 Lower Fixing Roller 9 52 9 6 12 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 9 52 9 6 12 2 Re...

Page 665: ...ct type middle sub thermistor THM4 contact type rear edge pressure roller main thermistor THM2 contact type middle sub thermistor THM5 contact type rear edge outside heating roller main thermistor THM3 contact type sub thermistor THM6 contact type front edge Protective mechanism The following mechanisms are used and the power to the fixing heater is cut upon detection of a fault monitoring of temp...

Page 666: ...n outside heating THM3 contact type temperature control overheating detection Sub thermistor fixing THM4 Contact type overheating detection pressure THM5 Contact type overheating detection outside heating THM6 Contact type overheating detection Thermal switch fixing TP1 contact type 220 8 deg C pressure TP2 contact type 220 8 deg C outside heating TP3 contact type 250 10 deg C Cleaning web driven ...

Page 667: ...Chapter 9 9 3 F 9 1 F 9 2 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 9 12 18 19 8 11 14 10 16 17 13 20 21 15 16 11 12 20 13 17 15 14 22 10 4 7 5 6 2 9 8 1 3 ...

Page 668: ...heater 15 Pressure thermal switch 5 Fixing sub heater 16 Outside heating thermal switch 6 Pressure heater 17 Cleaning web 7 Outside heating roller heater 18 Separation claw upper 8 Fixing main thermistor 19 Separation claw lower 9 Pressure main thermistor 20 Fixing inlet sensor 10 Outside heating main thermistor 21 Inside delivery sensor 11 Fixing sub thermistor 22 Web solenoid ...

Page 669: ... J1105 A5 J1105 A7 J1105 A8 J1105 A9 J1105 A10 DC controller PCB MAIN_HEAT_ON EX_FIX_P_MTR FIX_MTR FIX_WEB_SL EX_FIX_THM_EDGE EX_FIX_THM MAIN_THM PRS_THM PRS_THM_EDGE MAIN_THM_EDGE MAIN_TR_ERR SUB_HEAT_ON SUB_TR_ERR PRESS_HEAT_ON PRESS_TR_ERR EX_HEAT_ON EX_TR_ERR J1810 18 J1810 17 J1810 16 J1810 15 J1810 13 J1810 12 J1810 11 J1810 10 J1812 1 J1812 2 J1803 1 J1803 2 J1804 3 J1804 1 AC driver PCB M2...

Page 670: ...y 30 min after the fixing roller stops 5 When the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C the outside heating roller moves away from the fixing roller 6 During WMUP2 start up sequence the machine performs drum surface potential control primary transfer ATVC control and D MAX control Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Pressure heater H3 Outside heating roller heater H4 Fixing motor M4 Outside heati...

Page 671: ...e DC controller STBY LSTR STBY PRINT Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Pressure heater H3 External heating heater H3 Fixing motor M4 External fixing roller shift motor M22 Controlled to 200 deg C Controlled to 170 deg C 2 3 1 Engagement Controlled to 225 deg C Disengagement heater temperature control motor on heater alternate activation control heater full activation Fixing roller 200 deg...

Page 672: ...ting by turning on and off the pressure heater for every single cycle of the power supply using a control signal generated by the DC controller STBY LSTR STBY PRINT Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Pressure heater H3 External heating heater H4 Fixing motor M4 External fixing roller shift motor M22 Controlled to 200 deg C Controlled to 170 deg C 2 3 1 Engagement Controlled to 225 deg C Di...

Page 673: ...anisms used for down sequence prepared according to site environments and paper types the notations within the table indicate the following LV down sequence level deg C temperature of the fixing roller triggering down sequence PPM printing speed Toner fixing starts to fail when the temperature of the fixing roller drops to level 4 or below The machine therefore stops suspends printing when it dete...

Page 674: ... 9 5 b 100 V Model A4 Paper Room Temperature of Lower Than 20 deg C T 9 6 Plain paper Heavy paper 1 Heavy paper 2 Heavy paper 3 transparency LV deg C PPM LV deg C PPM LV deg C PPM LV deg C PPM Initial 68 Initial 68 Initial 68 Initial 40 1 174 60 1 184 40 1 184 40 1 184 40 2 173 50 2 180 30 2 180 30 2 180 30 3 172 35 3 176 20 3 176 20 3 176 20 4 170 Stop 4 173 Stop 4 173 Stop 4 173 Stop Recovery 18...

Page 675: ...in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY FX CROT Plain paper Heavy paper 1 Heavy paper 2 Heavy paper 3 transparency LV deg C PPM LV deg C PPM LV deg C PPM LV deg C PPM Initial 68 Initial 68 Initial 68 Initial 40 1 171 60 1 184 50 1 184 50 1 184 40 2 170 50 2 180 40 2 180 40 2 176 30 3 169 35 3 176 30 3 176 30 3 174 25 4 167 Stop 4 173 Stop 4 173 Stop 4 173 Stop Recovery 185 68 Recovery 200 68 Recovery 2...

Page 676: ...sed to control these individual heat rollers are as follows F 9 9 J1118 A7 to A10 J1118 B6 to B13 J1118 B3 to B4 J1124 B7 J1124 B4 J1124 A3 J1124 B3 J1124 B1 J1124 A5 J1105 A2 J1105 A3 J1105 A4 J1105 A5 J1105 A7 J1105 A8 J1105 A9 J1105 A10 DC controller PCB MAIN_HEAT_ON EX_FIX_P_MTR FIX_MTR FIX_WEB_SL EX_FIX_THM_EDGE EX_FIX_THM MAIN_THM PRS_THM PRS_THM_EDGE MAIN_THM_EDGE MAIN_TR_ERR SUB_HEAT_ON SU...

Page 677: ...eating roller heater is put under temperature control when the outside heating roller reaches 225 deg C on the other hand the fixing sub heater is put under temperature control when the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C As no more than 2 heaters may be turned on simultaneously while start up sequence is under way the pressure heater may be turned on only while either the outside heating roller heate...

Page 678: ...e outside heating roller moves away from the fixing roller when the fixing roller reaches 200 edge C 6 While start up sequence WMUP2 is under way the machine executes drum surface potential control primary transfer ATVC control and D MAX control 9 3 2 3 In Standby 0003 2895 When the machine is in standby the fixing roller is controlled to 200 deg C pressure roller to 170 deg C and outside heating ...

Page 679: ...ater H2 and the outside heating roller heater is controlled to 225 deg C by the outside heating roller heater F 9 14 STBY LSTR STBY PRINT Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Pressure heater H3 External heating heater H3 Fixing motor M4 External fixing roller shift motor M22 Controlled to 200 deg C Controlled to 170 deg C 2 3 1 Engagement Controlled to 225 deg C Disengagement heater temperat...

Page 680: ...2 heavy paper 3 164 to 250 g m2 or transparency at 1 3 speed 92 mm sec 2 Rotates at 1 3 speed 92 mm sec 3 Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1 3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops 4 In the case of the 120 230 V model the 400 W pressure heater is turned on at 200 W equivalent during printing by turning on and off the pressure heater for every single cycle of the power supply using a control si...

Page 681: ...ntrol 9 3 3 1 Overview 0003 2899 The outside heating roller helps the temperature control mechanism for the fixing roller by remaining in contact with the fixing roller during warm up printing and last rotation The outside heating roller is moved in contact with or away from the fixing roller by the drive of the outside heating roller shift motor M22 When the temperature of the fixing roller reach...

Page 682: ... on to move the outside heating roller away from the fixing roller The timing at which the outside heating roller is moved is monitored using the outside heating roller HP sensor PS21 for the following When the main power switch is turned on When the front cover upper right cover or lower right cover is opened closed When the power save mechanism power save mode low power mode sleep mode is disabl...

Page 683: ...the fixing upper roller is fed by means of a one way clutch fixing web solenoid SL2 The web is fed coinciding with the detection of the leading edge of paper by the registration sensor PS9 while printing is under way The remaining length of the web is checked by the following 2 ways F 9 17 Cleaning web SL2 ...

Page 684: ...MISC FIX WEB F 9 18 Whenever you have replaced the fixing web be sure to reset the following service mode item to 0 COPIER COUNTER MISC FIX WEB COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX WEB 9 4 2 Web Retaining Mechanism 0004 3925 The web retaining pad is used to hold the web in place i e to keep it from becoming slack when the fixing roller is rotated in reverse as when a paper jam is being removed The web retaini...

Page 685: ...u open the front cover and turn the fixing assembly release knob the web will become slack and possibly displaced Do not open the front door while the message is on the LCD If you must do not turn the fixing assembly releasing knob The web retainer is also away from the web when you force the front cover to open while printing or fixing idle rotation is under way during warm up be sure to keep thi...

Page 686: ... 9 5 3 Errors 0003 2903 Related Error E000 inadequate rise in temperature of the fixing assembly at power on The main thermistor THM1 THM2 THM3 has an open circuit or poor contact The thermal switch TP1 TP2 TP3 has an open circuit The heater H1 H2 H3 H4 has an open circuit The AC driver PCB is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty A check is made during initial multiple rotation E001 overheating ...

Page 687: ...t or poor contact The sub thermistor THM4 THM5 THM6 has an open circuit or poor contact The AC driver PCB is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty A check is made during initial multiple rotation E005 web take up error The fixing web has been taken up The web length sensor PS20 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty The fixing web solenoid is not connected E006 fixing assembly connection error...

Page 688: ...e fixing feeding assembly 2 F 9 20 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 21 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 22 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 23 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixi...

Page 689: ...nts to Note When Mounting the Fixing Assembly 0002 9355 When fitting the fixing assembly into the fixing feeding assembly take full care not to damage the 2 sensors 1 F 9 27 9 6 2 Fixing Roller 9 6 2 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003 3900 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding as...

Page 690: ...rs 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 31 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembly 1 F 9 32 8 Holding the 2 grips 1 detach the fixing assembly 2 F 9 33 When lifting the fixing assembly be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 34 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 691: ...heater F 9 36 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the heater cover 2 while moving the heater harness 3 out of the way F 9 37 4 Remove the screw 1 and detach the heater retainer 2 F 9 38 5 Remove the 4 screws 1 and move the heater harness 2 out of the way Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the heater cover 4 Then detach the heater 5 F 9 39 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 4 5 1 2 2 3 1 ...

Page 692: ...e the screw 1 and pull out the pin 2 then open the fixing assembly F 9 41 3 Remove 2 screws 1 and detach the upper inlet guide 2 F 9 42 4 Remove the 2 wires 1 and detach the fixing roller 2 together with the gear and the bearing F 9 43 F 9 44 5 Remove the ring 1 gear 2 bush 3 and bearing 4 from the front in the order indicated F 9 45 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 693: ...e to place print paper 2 under the edge of the guide To detach the paper after the work go thorough the following sequence close the fixing assembly while pushing the fixing assembly downward fit 2 pins tighten the screws and then pull on the paper to detach F 9 48 9 6 3 Pressure Roller 9 6 3 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003 3910 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 ...

Page 694: ...rs 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 52 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembly 1 F 9 53 8 Holding the 2 grips 1 detach the fixing assembly 2 F 9 54 When lifting the fixing assembly be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 55 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 695: ...ew 1 and detach the heater terminal cover 2 4 Remove the screw 3 and detach the heater retainer 4 F 9 58 5 Remove the screw 1 and free the heater harness 2 6 Remove the screw 3 and detach the heater retainer 4 then pull out the heater 5 F 9 59 9 6 3 3 Removing the Pressure Roller 0003 3914 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the pin 2 while pushing down on the fixing assembly F 9 60 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 696: ...3 4 Points to Note When Mounting the Pressure Roller 0005 8186 Be sure to mount the pressure roller 1 so that the lot number 2 found on its edge is found toward the front of the machine F 9 64 9 6 4 External Heat Roller 9 6 4 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003 2544 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther...

Page 697: ...rs 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 68 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembly 1 F 9 69 8 Holding the 2 grips 1 detach the fixing assembly 2 F 9 70 When lifting the fixing assembly be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 71 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 698: ...oks 2 of the side plate F 9 72 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the 2 wire saddles 3 F 9 73 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and free the 2 heater harnesses 2 from the wire guide 3 F 9 74 4 Remove the screw 1 and pull out the pin 2 then pull out the outside heating roller 3 F 9 75 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 ...

Page 699: ...w 1 9 Remove the screw 2 and detach the wire guide 3 10 Remove the screw 4 and detach the heater retainer 5 F 9 77 11 Pull the heater 2 out of the outside heating roller 1 F 9 78 When mounting the outside heating roller heater be sure that the length A of the heater cable 2 sticking out the heater holder 1 is no more than 4 mm F 9 79 1 2 5 4 3 2 3 5 1 4 1 2 1 A 2 ...

Page 700: ...2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 9 81 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 82 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 83 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 t...

Page 701: ...b length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 87 9 6 5 2 Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor 0002 9923 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the thermistor cover 2 F 9 88 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then move the harness out of the way and detach thermistor 3 together with the holder F 9 89 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the thermistor 2 F 9 90 1 2 1...

Page 702: ... be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light Otherwise re mount it F 9 91 F 9 92 9 6 6 Fixing Thermistor Lower 9 6 6 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003 2547 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 9 93 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cove...

Page 703: ... 9 96 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembly 1 F 9 97 8 Holding the 2 grips 1 detach the fixing assembly 2 F 9 98 When lifting the fixing assembly be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 99 9 6 6 2 Removing the Fixing Lower Thermistor 0003 0174 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the 4 w...

Page 704: ...holders 4 F 9 103 6 Remove the 2 screws 1 and free the harness 2 from the 2 wire saddles 3 F 9 104 9 6 6 3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor 0005 5546 After mounting the thermistor make sure of the following The surface of the thermal switch 1 must be parallel to the fixing roller Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light Otherwise re mount it F 9 105 F...

Page 705: ...ding assembly 2 F 9 107 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 108 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 109 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 110 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assem...

Page 706: ...ating Roller Thermistor 0002 9920 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing upper cover 2 F 9 114 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the wire saddle 3 F 9 115 3 Free the harness 1 from the wire saddle 2 then remove the screw 3 and detach the thermistor mounting plate 4 F 9 116 4 Free the harness 1 from the wire saddle 2 then remove the screw 3 and detach the thermistor mo...

Page 707: ...ust be parallel to the fixing roller Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light Otherwise re mount it F 9 119 F 9 120 9 6 8 Fixing Thermal Switch 9 6 8 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003 2550 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 9 121 4 Open the...

Page 708: ...tor base 4 F 9 124 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembly 1 F 9 125 8 Holding the 2 grips 1 detach the fixing assembly 2 F 9 126 When lifting the fixing assembly be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 127 9 6 8 2 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch 0003 0170 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the thermistor cov...

Page 709: ...the thermal switch 1 must be parallel to the fixing roller Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light Otherwise re mount it F 9 130 F 9 131 9 6 9 Fixing Locking Thermal Switch 9 6 9 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003 2551 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding...

Page 710: ...ng belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 135 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembly 1 F 9 136 8 Holding the 2 grips 1 detach the fixing assembly 2 F 9 137 When lifting the fixing assembly be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 138 2 1 2 3 1 4 3 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 711: ...esses 2 out of the way 4 Remove the screw 3 and detach the thermal switch F 9 141 9 6 9 3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch 0004 5057 After mounting the thermal switch before mounting the inlet guide check to make sure o the following The surface of the thermal switch 1 must be parallel to the pressure roller Be sure to check it by shining the thermal switch by a pen ...

Page 712: ... assembly 2 F 9 144 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 145 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 146 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 147 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembly ...

Page 713: ...etach the fixing upper cover 2 F 9 151 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and free the 2 heater harnesses 2 3 Remove the screw 3 and detach the thermal switch F 9 152 9 6 10 3 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch 0004 5059 After mounting the thermal switch check to be sure of the following The surface of the thermal switch 1 must be parallel to the outside heating roller Be ...

Page 714: ...ng assembly 2 F 9 155 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 156 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 157 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 158 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembl...

Page 715: ...will be free of damage F 9 161 9 6 11 2 Removing the Fixing Upper Heater 0003 3908 1 Remove the screw 1 and shift the thermistor cover 2 to detach F 9 162 2 Remove the faston 1 of the heater F 9 163 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the heater cover 2 while moving the heater harness 3 out of the way F 9 164 4 Remove the screw 1 and detach the heater retainer 2 F 9 165 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 716: ...eding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 9 167 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 168 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 169 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it ...

Page 717: ...ouch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 173 9 6 12 2 Removing the Fixing Lower Heater 0003 3917 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the heater terminal cover 2 F 9 174 2 Remove the screw 1 and free the heater harness 2 F 9 175 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the heater terminal cover 2 4 Remove the screw 3 and detach the heater retainer 4 F 9 176 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 718: ...ding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 9 178 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 179 5 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 180 6 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it t...

Page 719: ...assembly be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 184 9 6 13 2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater 0003 2561 1 Engage the ends of the 2 springs 1 on the hooks 2 of the side plate F 9 185 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the 2 wire saddles 3 F 9 186 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 ...

Page 720: ... then pull out the outside heating roller 3 F 9 188 5 Remove the screw 1 6 Remove the screw 2 and detach the wire guide 3 7 Remove the screw 4 and detach the heater retainer 5 F 9 189 8 Remove the screw 1 9 Remove the screw 2 and detach the wire guide 3 10 Remove the screw 4 and detach the heater retainer 5 F 9 190 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 5 4 3 2 3 5 1 4 ...

Page 721: ...g out the heater holder 1 is no more than 4 mm F 9 192 9 6 14 Fixing Web 9 6 14 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0003 2543 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Push the leaf springs 1 found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing feeding assembly 2 F 9 193 4 Open the reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 194 1 2 1 A 2 1 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 722: ...ng belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 196 7 Remove the screw 2 found at the rear of the fixing assembly 1 F 9 197 8 Holding the 2 grips 1 detach the fixing assembly 2 F 9 198 When lifting the fixing assembly be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm 1 so that the arm will be free of damage F 9 199 2 1 2 3 1 4 3 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 723: ...per cover 2 F 9 200 2 Remove the 1 screws 1 and detach the fixing web unit 2 F 9 201 9 6 14 3 Removing the Fixing Web 0002 9569 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the 2 fixings 2 then detach the fixing web 3 F 9 202 9 6 14 4 Attaching the Fixing Web 0002 9570 Attach the fixing web as shown F 9 203 2 1 2 1 1 3 2 ...

Page 724: ...ISC FIX WEB COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX WEB 9 6 15 Fixing Motor 9 6 15 1 Removing the Fixing Front Cover 0003 7052 1 Open the font cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Open the re reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 9 204 5 Remove the knob 1 and the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 205 9 6 15 2 Removing the Fixing Motor 0003 7054 1 Disconnect the 2 connect...

Page 725: ...ews 2 then detach the fixing front cover 3 F 9 208 9 6 16 2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Shift Motor 0003 7985 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and disconnect the 3 connectors 2 then after shifting the timing belt 3 to the front detach it together with the fixing motor base 4 F 9 209 2 Free the harness from the cable guide 1 then disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the screw 3 and detach the outside...

Page 726: ...212 5 Remove the screw 1 and detach the leaf spring 2 F 9 213 6 Turn the separation claw 1 in the direction of the arrow then free the hook of the spring 2 to detach it in upward direction F 9 214 9 6 18 Lower Separation Claw 9 6 18 1 Removing the Delivery Lower Separation Claw 0003 2572 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Open the reversal delivery cover F 9 215 4 Ope...

Page 727: ...w 1 from the front of the delivery assembly then pull out the pin 2 and slide the lower separation claw assembly 3 toward the front to detach F 9 218 7 Remove the screw 1 and detach the leaf spring 2 F 9 219 8 Free the hook of the spring 1 and detach the lower separation claw 2 F 9 220 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 728: ...Chapter 9 9 64 ...

Page 729: ...Chapter 10 Externals and Controls ...

Page 730: ......

Page 731: ... Battery 10 17 10 5 Parts Replacement Procedure 10 18 10 5 1 Hopper Drive Unit 10 18 10 5 1 1 Removing the Right Cover upper 10 18 10 5 1 2 Releasing the Front Cover 10 18 10 5 1 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 10 19 10 5 1 4 Removing the Hopper Assembly 10 20 10 5 1 5 Removing the Hopper Drive Assembly 10 20 10 5 2 Power Cord Base 10 21 10 5 2 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 10 21 10 5 2 2 Removi...

Page 732: ...the Secondary Transfer Unit 10 34 10 5 12 2 Removing the HV3 PCB 10 35 10 5 13 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 10 36 10 5 13 1 Removing Fixing Feeding Driver PCB 10 36 10 5 13 2 Fixing Feeding Driver PCB 10 37 10 5 14 Pickup Driver PCB 10 37 10 5 14 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 10 37 10 5 14 2 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 10 37 10 5 14 3 Removing Pickup Driver PCB 10 38 10 5 15 Switch PCB 10 38 10 ...

Page 733: ...oling Fan 1 10 48 10 5 20 Delivery Cooling Fan 2 10 48 10 5 20 1 Removing the Fixing Front Cover 10 48 10 5 20 2 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 2 10 49 10 5 21 Ozone Filter 10 49 10 5 21 1 Removing the Ozone Filter 10 49 10 5 21 2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Ozone Filter 10 50 10 5 22 Toner Filter 10 50 10 5 22 1 Removing the Toner Filter 10 50 10 5 23 Sub Toner Filter 10 51 10 5 23 1 Re...

Page 734: ...Contents ...

Page 735: ...as shown below and its functions include the following LCD display contrast adjustment touch switch input processing hard key input processing F 10 1 J1212A J1212B J511A J511B J1114 J1110 J1111 J6801 J6802 J1 J1112 J1113 Main controller PCB Touch panel Color LCD Control panel CPU Keypad PCB Control panel inverter Control panel ...

Page 736: ...uipped with a contrast adjustment volume VR6801 to enable the user to adjust the contrast of the LCD 10 1 4 Control Panel CPU 0003 2958 Monitoring Key Inputs communicates the inputs made on the keypad or function keys to the CPU on the main controller PCB Monitoring Touch Panel Inputs communicates the inputs made on the touch panel to the CPU on the main controller PCB Controlling the Buzzer Sound...

Page 737: ...not indicated 101 108 232 324 000 000 Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 100V 1 total 2 copy full color mono color 2 total A full color mono color 2 copy black and white 1 total A black and white 2 not indicated 102 231 148 222 133 000 Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 120V TW 2 total 1 total black and white 1 copy print full color lar...

Page 738: ...ounter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 240V CA 6 total 1 total black and white 1 copy full color mono color large copy full color mono color small print full color mono color large print full color mono color small 101 108 229 230 321 322 Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 230V FRN 7 total 1 total full color mono color large total full color mono color smal...

Page 739: ... 4031 4 F14 4041 4042 4060 4070 5 F14 4051 4054 6 F14 4061 4062 7 F14 4071 4072 8 F14 4081 4082 9 F14 4091 4091 10 F14 4021 4022 by default not indicated may be changed in serve mode if 0 is set for the following COPIER OPTION USER CNT SW if 1 is set for the following COPIER OPTION USER CNT SW Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 230V AMS 9 total 1 total full color mon...

Page 740: ...e 2nd side of a double sided print the machine increases the count when the trailing edge of paper is discharged outside the machine as indicated by the output of the following sensor T 10 12 b 1st Side of a Double Sided Print The machine assumes the end of printing on the 1st side of a double sided print to be when the duplexing left sensor PS17 goes on thus increasing the count Finisher Sensor p...

Page 741: ... feed fan 2 no no keeps paper on the feed belt FM11 feed fan 3 no no keeps paper on the feed belt FM12 feed fan 4 no no keeps paper on the feed belt FM5 fixing heat exhaust fan no yes discharges heat generated by the fixing assembly E805 0003 FM6 delivery cooling fan 1 no no cools the delivery assembly FM7 process unit cooling fan no yes cools the process unit E804 0002 FM8 controller cooling fan ...

Page 742: ...Chapter 10 10 8 F 10 2 FM12 FM11 FM1 FM2 FM4 FM3 FM6 FM7 FM9 FM8 FM5 FM13 FM14 FM10 ...

Page 743: ... is installed full speed rotation at all times if a delivery tray or a shift tray is installed rotates only in mono color transparency mode for the US mode full speed rotation for non US models half speed rotation 6 rotates when the scanning lamp goes on 7 rotates when the DF feed motor is on Primary charging suction fan FM1 Primary charging delivery fan FM2 Feed fan 1 FM3 Feeed fan 2 FM4 Feeed fa...

Page 744: ...nter power supply PCB DC power supply PCB DC power supply relay PCB generates DC power 24 V 13 V supplies DC power to the controller power supply PCB DC controller PCB pickup driver PCB fixing diver PCB high voltage power supply PCB reader unit finisher side deck fax board AC driver PCB supplies AC power to the printer power supply PCB and the fixing heater drive Environment switch PCB turns on an...

Page 745: ... deck heater 1 Reader heater 1 Inlet Outlet Drum heater driver Fuse FU101 100V 120V 2 5A 230V 1 25A Half wave full wave On Off Main controller Main controller Main controller DC controller DC controller DC controller Fixing feed driver Fax Finisher Reader FAX AC relay DC relay 3 5K side deck DC controller fan scanner motor Reader Finisher DC controller rotation developing drive DC controller rotat...

Page 746: ...wer Door open Fixing error Print Main power switch OFF ON ON ON ON ON all night 13VB OFF ON ON ON ON ON non all night 13VA OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 24VA 1 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 24VA 2 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 24VA 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 30VA 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON DC relay OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON AC relay OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ...

Page 747: ...nting Main power OFF OFF ON Cassette heater switch OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Drum Heater OFF OFF OFF OFF full wave full wave full wave full wave half wave half wave Cassette Heater OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF Reader unit Heater OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 13VA RL1 N O N C CST_HEAT_ON DRUM_HEAT_ON 13VA RL2 N O N C Environment switch PCB Environment switc...

Page 748: ...n power OFF Sleep Low power Standby Printing Main power OFF OFF ON Cassette heater switch OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Drum Heater half wave half wave half wave half wave full wave full wave full wave full wave half wave half wave Casset teHeater OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF Reader unit Heater ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Output 13VA 13VB 24VA 1 24VA 2 24VA 3 All night non all ...

Page 749: ... reset the protective circuit 10 4 3 2 Protection by a Fuse 0005 4708 Some PCBs of the machine are equipped with a fuse to protect against over current occurring in a load The fuse will melt in the presence of over current thereby cutting off the output of the power line T 10 21 Output 30VA 3 All night non all night non all night Rated output 30V Tolerance 5 PCB Fuse notation Rating Reference volt...

Page 750: ...fan 3 4 FM11 FM12 FU202 60V 1 5A 24VDC Feed fan 1 2 FM3 FM4 FU301 60V 1 5A 24VDC Reversal shifting solenoid SL3 Delivery solenoid SL5 FU401 60V 1 5A 24VDC Delivery cooling fan 1 FM6 FU405 60V 3 15A 24VDC Secondary transfer outside roller shift motor M20 FU701 50V 800mA 13VDC 5V DC DC converter circuit on Fixing feed driver PCB FU702 50V 800mA 13VDC 3 3 DC DC converter circuit on Fixing feed driver...

Page 751: ...e sure to use batteries indicated by the manufacture same name or equivalent Be sure to dispose of any used battery in strict accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer Do not use a battery which is not of a type specifically indicated same name or equivalent Dispose of any used battery according to the instructions of its manufacturer SRAM PCB manganese dioxide lithium battery 3 V 100 m...

Page 752: ...r upper 2 F 10 6 10 5 1 2 Releasing the Front Cover 0003 6709 1 Open the front cover 2 While pulling on the grip 1 fully open the manual feed cover 2 to the front F 10 7 If a side paper deck exists remove the 2 screws 1 and the latch plate front F 10 8 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the process unit cover 2 F 10 9 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 ...

Page 753: ...he 2 screws 1 binding of the front cover hinge and fully open the front cover 2 F 10 12 9 Close the right deck 10 5 1 3 Releasing the Hopper Assembly 0003 6710 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 F 10 13 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 10 14 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be...

Page 754: ...0003 6712 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and pick and detach the wire saddle 2 F 10 18 2 Close the hopper assembly 3 Remove the E ring 1 F 10 19 4 Open the hopper assembly and lift it to detach 10 5 1 5 Removing the Hopper Drive Assembly 0003 6713 1 Open the black toner supply cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the hopper inside cover 3 F 10 20 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 755: ...d detach the hopper drive assembly 2 F 10 23 10 5 2 Power Cord Base 10 5 2 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0004 5212 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 24 10 5 2 2 Removing the Left Cover lower 0004 5213 1 Remove the 2 grip covers 1 2 Remove the 6 screws 2 and detach the left cover lower 3 F 10 25 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 756: ...move the 4 screws 1 from the left side F 10 26 2 Disconnect the 4 connectors 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 F 10 27 3 Disconnect the 8 connectors 1 and open the wire saddle 2 F 10 28 4 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the AC driver box 2 F 10 29 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 757: ...en the black toner supply cover 1 F 10 31 2 Shift down the lever 1 and detach the black toner bottle 2 F 10 32 Once you have released the hopper assembly toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover Be sure to wipe off any such toner F 10 33 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 F 10 34 4 Close the black toner supply cover 1 then fully open the hopper assembly 2 F 10 35 1 2 1 ...

Page 758: ...e reader left cover 2 F 10 36 10 5 3 4 Removing the Control Panel 0003 4090 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 1 then detach the control panel inside cover 3 F 10 37 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 10 38 3 Slide the control panel 1 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 10 39 2 1 1 3 2 1 1 ...

Page 759: ...4 2 Sliding the DC Controller Box 0003 6210 1 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the DC controller cover 2 F 10 42 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and slide the DC controller box 2 to the left F 10 43 10 5 4 3 Removing the DC Controller PCB 0003 6223 1 Disconnect the 33 connectors 1 and remove the 10 screws 2 then as necessary open the cable guide F 10 44 2 Detach the DC controller PCB 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 760: ...arness 1 is on the left side of the harness 2 F 10 45 Supplementary Information If the harness 1 is away from the side plate 4 of the DC controller box wrong detection E070 0102 of the ITB home position tends to occur because of noise 10 5 5 Printer Power Supply PCB 10 5 5 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 8325 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 46 10 5 5 2 Removing ...

Page 761: ... 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 8326 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 49 10 5 6 2 Removing the Left Cover lower 0003 8288 1 Remove the 2 grip covers 1 2 Remove the 6 screws 2 and detach the left cover lower 3 F 10 50 10 5 6 3 Removing the Power Cord Base 0004 5215 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 from the left side F 10 51 4 5 1 3 2 2 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 ...

Page 762: ...nect the 8 connectors 1 and open the wire saddle 2 F 10 53 4 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the AC driver box 2 F 10 54 10 5 6 4 Removing the Leakage Breaker 0003 5822 1 Remove the 4 fastons 1 F 10 55 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the leakage breaker 2 F 10 56 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 763: ... lower 2 F 10 57 10 5 7 2 Removing the DC DC converter PCB2 0004 5254 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 10 58 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the DC DC converter PCB2 2 F 10 59 10 5 8 Relay PCB 10 5 8 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 6695 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 60 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 764: ...ower 0004 1301 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 62 10 5 9 2 Removing the DC Relay 0004 1296 1 Remove the 8 fastons 1 2 Pull the leaf spring 2 to the front and detach the relay 3 F 10 63 10 5 10 HV1 PCB 10 5 10 1 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 8318 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 10 64 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 1 1...

Page 765: ... detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 66 10 5 10 3 Removing the Right Cover upper rear 0003 8297 1 Detach the reader communications cable 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the right cover upper rear 3 F 10 67 10 5 10 4 Removing the Right Cover lower rear 0003 8709 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right cover lower rear 2 F 10 68 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 766: ...3 Release the hook 4 F 10 69 4 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and free the cable 3 from the cable guide 2 5 Release the hook 3 and detach the lid 4 F 10 70 6 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 and free the cable from the cable guide 2 F 10 71 7 Remove the 2 screws 1 and lift the HV1 PCB 2 to detach F 10 72 2 4 3 1 5 4 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 767: ...ivery cover 0003 6979 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 10 74 10 5 11 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 6980 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 10 75 10 5 11 4 Removing the HV2 PCB 0003 6982 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the cable guide 3 F 10 76 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 ...

Page 768: ... screws 4 and detach the HV2 PCB 5 F 10 78 10 5 12 HV3 PCB 10 5 12 1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit 0004 0910 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 While pushing the 2 hooks 1 frond on both sides of the fixing feeding assembly slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 fully F 10 79 4 Remove the screw 1 and detach the connector cover 2 F 10 80 2 1 1 3 4 4 5 1 2 1 1 1 ...

Page 769: ...ors 2 then detach the secondary transfer unit F 10 83 10 5 12 2 Removing the HV3 PCB 0004 0911 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the registration guide unit 3 F 10 84 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cover 2 F 10 85 3 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 and remove the 3 screws 2 then detach the HV3 PCB 3 F 10 86 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 3 ...

Page 770: ... the handle 2 4 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the fixing feeding front cover 4 F 10 87 5 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing feeding upper cover 2 F 10 88 6 Disconnect the 6 connectors 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 F 10 89 7 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 10 90 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 and shift the fixing feeding driver PCB 2 toward the front to detach F 10 91 3 2 1 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 ...

Page 771: ...r lower 0003 8328 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 93 10 5 14 2 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 0003 5796 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and free the harness 2 F 10 94 2 Disconnect the 16 connectors 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 to free the harness 3 3 Remove the 4 screws 4 and detach the DC power supply unit 5 F 10 95 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 4 5 1 3 2 2 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 ...

Page 772: ...itch PCB 10 5 15 1 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 6691 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 97 10 5 15 2 Removing the Left Cover lower 0003 6692 1 Remove the 2 grip covers 1 2 Remove the 6 screws 2 and detach the left cover lower 3 F 10 98 10 5 15 3 Removing the Switch PCB 0003 6693 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 10 99 2 4 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1...

Page 773: ...03 8321 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 10 101 3 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 10 102 10 5 16 2 Removing the Right Cover Upper rear 0003 6580 1 Detach the reader communications cable 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the right cover upper rear 3 F 10 103 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 ...

Page 774: ... controller box 2 to the left F 10 105 10 5 16 4 Removing the DC Controller Box 0003 8711 1 Open the 3 cable guides 1 and free the harness 2 F 10 106 2 Disconnect the 33 connectors 1 and open that 13 cable guides 2 then free the harness 3 F 10 107 3 Lift the DC controller box 1 to detach F 10 108 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 775: ...e saddle 3 so that the harness 1 is on the left side of the harness 2 F 10 109 Supplementary Information If the harness 1 is away from the side plate 4 of the DC controller box wrong detection E070 0102 of the ITB home position tends to occur because of noise 10 5 16 6 Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan 0003 6583 1 Disconnect the connect 1 and open the 2 cable guides 2 F 10 110 2 Remove the 3 screws...

Page 776: ...ge Fan 10 5 17 1 Removing the Rear Cover upper 0003 6599 1 Free the cable 2 from the 2 cable clamps 1 2 Remove the 2 screws 3 F 10 113 3 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the rear cover upper 2 F 10 114 10 5 17 2 Removing the Rear Cover lower 0003 6602 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 115 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 777: ...er 2 F 10 116 10 5 17 4 Removing the Left Cover middle 0003 6607 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 10 117 10 5 17 5 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0003 6609 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the controller box cover 2 F 10 118 F 10 119 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 778: ...er Box 0003 6612 1 Disconnect the 9 connectors 1 F 10 120 F 10 121 2 Free the harness from the 3 harness retainers 1 F 10 122 F 10 123 3 Remove the 9 screws 1 used to fix the main controller box in place F 10 124 F 10 125 F 10 126 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 779: ...nd at the joint to the DC controller PCB F 10 128 10 5 17 7 Removing the Fixing Delivery Fan 0003 6619 1 Remove the fixing heat discharge ozonefilter 1 F 10 129 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 5 screws 2 then detach the duct 3 F 10 130 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the fixing heat discharge fan 3 F 10 131 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 1 2 ...

Page 780: ...t 0003 5592 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and free the harness 2 F 10 133 2 Disconnect the 16 connectors 1 and open the 3 wire saddles 2 to free the harness 3 3 Remove the 4 screws 4 and detach the DC power supply unit 5 F 10 134 10 5 18 3 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 0003 5611 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the power supply unit upper cover 2 F 10 135 1 1 1 2 1 2 4 5 1 3 2 2 1 1 4 4 1 ...

Page 781: ...e Left Cover upper 0004 1045 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the left cover upper 2 F 10 137 10 5 19 2 Removing the Delivery Cover 0004 1046 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 10 138 10 5 19 3 Removing the Left Cover middle 0004 1047 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the 5 screws 2 and detach the left cover middle 3 F 10 139 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 ...

Page 782: ...oling fan 2 F 10 141 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the cable guide 3 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the delivery cooling fan 1 F 10 142 10 5 20 Delivery Cooling Fan 2 10 5 20 1 Removing the Fixing Front Cover 0004 1049 1 Open the font cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Open the re reversal delivery cover 1 and the middle cover 2 F 10 143 1 2 3 2 1 1 4 3 ...

Page 783: ...elivery Cooling Fan 2 0004 1050 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the delivery cooling fan 2 3 F 10 145 10 5 21 Ozone Filter 10 5 21 1 Removing the Ozone Filter 0003 3764 1 Remove the face cover 1 from the right cover upper rear F 10 146 2 Pull out the filter holder 1 F 10 147 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 1 1 ...

Page 784: ...eat Discharge Ozone Filter 0005 0740 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the rear cover lower 2 F 10 149 2 Remove the fixing heat discharge ozone filter 1 F 10 150 10 5 22 Toner Filter 10 5 22 1 Removing the Toner Filter 0003 4092 1 Remove the face cover 1 from the upper rear upper cover F 10 151 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 785: ... filter holder 1 F 10 153 10 5 23 Sub Toner Filter 10 5 23 1 Removing the Left Cover upper 0005 7956 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the left cover upper 2 F 10 154 10 5 23 2 Removing the Delivery Cover 0005 7958 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cover 2 F 10 155 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 786: ...the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the cable guide 3 F 10 157 2 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the delivery cooling fan 2 together with its base F 10 158 3 Disconnect the 5 connectors 1 and free the harness from the cable guide 3 4 Remove the 2 screws 4 and detach the HV2 PCB 5 F 10 159 10 5 23 5 Removing the Sub Toner Filter 0005 7961 1 Remove the sub toner filter 1 F 10 160 2 3 1 2 1 ...

Page 787: ...Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection ...

Page 788: ......

Page 789: ...rinter Unit 11 4 11 3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 11 5 11 3 1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 11 5 11 3 2 Scheduled Servicing reader unit 11 6 11 3 3 Scheduled Servicing printer unit 11 7 11 3 4 Shifting the Photosensitive Drum Phase 11 13 11 4 Cleaning 11 21 11 4 1 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Rear Guide 11 21 11 4 2 Cleaning the Registration Roller Registration Guide and Transpare...

Page 790: ......

Page 791: ...e of the machine will be considerably affected once they fail If possible plan any replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit The intervals indicated may vary depending on the site environment and user habit Checking the Timing of Replacement The timing of replacement may be checked using the following service mode items Copier COPIER COUNTER PRDC 1 Accessory COPIER COUNTER PRDC 2 11 1 2 Reade...

Page 792: ... 6 Pre transfer charging wire FB4 3687 000 AR 500 000 images 7 Pre transfer charging assembly wire cleaner 1 FL2 2427 000 1 500 000 images 8 Pre transfer charging assembly wire cleaner 2 FL2 2428 000 1 500 000 images 9 Primary grid wire FY1 0883 000 1 500 000 images 10 Fixing thermistor FK2 0013 000 1 500 000 prints 11 Pressure thermistor FK2 0013 000 1 500 000 prints 12 Outside heating roller the...

Page 793: ...Replace them as needed by referring to the table of estimated lives expressed in terms of the number of prints they make Making Checks When Replacing Durables Use the following service mode items to find out when to replace parts Machine COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 Accessory COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 11 2 2 Reader Unit 0000 9645 The machine s reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables ...

Page 794: ... 1 each 250 000 prints 14 Separation roller left right paper deck FC5 2528 000 1 each 250 000 prints 15 Pickup roller cassette 3 4 FC5 2524 000 1 each 250 000 prints 16 Feed roller cassette 3 4 FC5 2526 000 1 each 250 000 prints 17 Separation roller cassette 3 4 FC5 2528 000 1 each 250 000 prints 18 Primary transfer static eliminator FM2 0420 000 1 300 000 images 2 19 ITB FC5 1658 000 1 300 000 im...

Page 795: ...cord the counter reading and check the faulty prints 3 Make the following checks and clean adjust the items that are indicated T 11 3 4 Check the waste toner case If half full or more dispose of the waste toner in a vinyl bag or the like for collection or replace the waste toner case If you need to dispose of the waste toner be sure to do so in strict accordance with the regulations imposed by the...

Page 796: ...time be sure to fill out the blanks for FX UP RL and DV UNT K service counters 11 Fill out the Service Book and report to the person in change Be sure to update the history of checks on the leakage breaker in the Service Book 11 3 2 Scheduled Servicing reader unit 0003 4139 Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated herein T 11 4 The foreign values are estimates only and are subject to...

Page 797: ...03 4126 Do not use solvents or oils other than those permitted T 11 5 Unit Location Item Interval Remarks Externals and controls Ozone filter replace 250 000 images 1 Toner filter 2 Ozone filter Externals and controls Toner filter replace 250 000 images 1 1 2 ...

Page 798: ...Primary grid wire clean upon installation 250 000 images replace 500 000 images Charging assembly Charging wire cleaner 1 2 primary changing assembly replace 500 000 images Charging assembly Pre transfer charging assembly replace 1 000 000 images Charging assembly Pre transfer charging wire clean upon installation replace 500 000 images Charging assembly Charging wire cleaner 1 2 pre transfer char...

Page 799: ...ocking sheet 2 Developing drive gear 3 Developing roll 4 Bias roller toner collection case Black developing assembly Developing drive gear clean 250 000 prints Black developing assembly Developing roll clean 250 000 prints Black developing assembly Bias roller toner collection case clean 250 000 images Color developing assembly Developing cylinder check upon installation Color developing assembly ...

Page 800: ...sor window clean 250 000 images 1 Color toner cartridge placement sensor window Intermediate transfer assembly Patch image sensor window clean 250 000 images Intermediate transfer assembly ITB inside scraper roller when replacing primary transfer roller clean 195 000 images Intermediate transfer assembly area Pre transfer corona assembly rail thereunder clean 150 000 prints Unit Location Item Inte...

Page 801: ...y transfer rear guide 2 Feeding belt Feeding assembly Feeding belt clean 150 000 prints Feeding assembly OHP sensor clean 250 000 prints 1 clean upper lower OHP sensor using blow brush Feeding assembly Registration roller clean 250 000 prints Feeding assembly Registration guide clean 250 000 prints Hopper assembly Toner receptacle supply mouth clean 250 000 prints Fixing assembly Fixing web check ...

Page 802: ...rints replace 500 000 prints Fixing assembly Outside heating roller thermistor clean 150 000 prints replace 500 000 prints Fixing assembly Fixing thermal switch clean 300 000 prints replace 1 000 000 prints Fixing assembly Pressure thermal switch clean 150 000 prints replace 1 000 000 prints Fixing assembly Outsideheatingthermal switch clean 150 000 prints replace 1 000 000 prints Fixing assembly ...

Page 803: ...e main power switch and wait until the machine has entered a ready state 1 2 To stabilize the machine operation generate 5 test pattern printouts A3 double sided by executing the following in service mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE 16 Be sure not to forget to select a cassette loaded with A3 paper and double sided printing in service mode to select a particular cassette in service mode execute COPIER TES...

Page 804: ... and draw out the fixing feeding assembly 2 to the front F 11 2 2 3 Open the color toner supply cover 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the process cover 3 F 11 3 2 4 Remove the screw 1 and shift down the primary transfer roller locking lever 2 so that the primary transfer roller is freed F 11 4 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 805: ... the drum phase label 1 attached behind the process unit cover If there is no check mark on the label indicating the present phase position be sure to put a check mark F 11 6 F 11 7 1 2 2 1 COPIE R TEST PG TYPE 16 2 COPIE R FUNCTION INSTALL AINR OFF 1 3 4 COPIE R FUNCTION MISC P DR P ADJ OK 5 COPIE R FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT OK 6 PASCA L 1 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 1 2 3 4 1 COPIER TEST PG TYPE 16 2 ...

Page 806: ...wdriver remove the drum fixing screw 3 As shown be sure to remove the screw only after matching the protrusion 4 of the drum stop tool against the cut off 5 of the drum flange F 11 8 2 7 Fit the drum stop tool 1 in the drum flange 2 then turn the drum counterclockwise by 90 deg F 11 9 5 2 3 4 1 90 1 2 ...

Page 807: ...dentified by means of a marking of 1 to 4 dots on the flange At time of shipment from the factory dent A in the drum shaft is between and The following figures show the position of the drum flange before an after a shift is introduced F 11 11 2 1 A Position of the Flange Before the Phase Is Shifted at time of shipment Position of the Flange After the Phase Is Shifted after the shift work for the f...

Page 808: ...h a screwdriver Be sure to fix the protrusion 5 of the drum stop tool in place with a screw after matching it against the cut off 6 of the drum flange F 11 12 2 9 After checking the drum phase position put a check mark on the drum phase label 1 attached behind the process cover F 11 13 6 3 4 5 2 1 1 COPIE R TEST PG TYPE 16 2 COPIE R FUNCTION INSTALL AINR OFF 1 3 4 COPIE R FUNCTION MISC P DR P ADJ ...

Page 809: ...revious output in the case replace it with the new output 3 4 Execute auto gradation correction in user mode adjust cleaning auto gradation correction full correction Be sure to perform the foregoing steps to position the drum in phase whenever you are not sure whether the drum is in correct phase Related Service Mode Item 1 counter mode for phase shift work COPIER COUNTER MISC DRM PHAS Particular...

Page 810: ...e the indication of the foregoing count reading Settings 0 to 2 0 disable indication 1 indicate in service mode only factory default 2 indicate both on User screen and in service mode 3 confirmation mode for phase shift work COPIER DISPLAY ALARM 2 A record of the work will be indicated in terms of the number of times the work has been performed ...

Page 811: ...ne by one by moving lint free paper moistened with alcohol in the direction of the arrow in the figure 1 Do not dry wipe as the ribs are likely to become charged 2 The ribs of the secondary transfer rear guide are located near the static eliminating brush 3 do not move the lint free paper in the wrong direction to avoid trapping and bending the static eliminator F 11 15 ...

Page 812: ... Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 Push the leaf springs on both sides and slide the fixing feeding assembly farther out 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 and turn overt the transparency upper sensor unit 2 F 11 16 4 Remove the paper lint building up over the transparency sensor 1 using a blower brush F 11 17 1 2 1 ...

Page 813: ...ler upper stay 3 together with the grounding spring 4 while freeing the spring 2 off its hook F 11 19 8 Open the registration upper guide 1 and clean the back 1 of the upper guide and the lower guide 2 using lint free paper moistened with alcohol 9 Remove the paper lint building up on the transparency sensor 3 using a blower brush F 11 20 1 2 3 3 2 4 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 814: ...Chapter 11 11 24 10 Turn the upper registration roller 1 and the lower registration roller 2 to clean them with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 11 21 2 1 ...

Page 815: ...Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments ...

Page 816: ......

Page 817: ...harging Assembly 12 29 12 5 6 After Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 12 29 12 5 7 After Replacing the Pre Transfer Charging Wire 12 29 12 5 8 After Replacing the Pre Transfer Charging Wire 12 29 12 5 9 After Replacing the Waste Toner Box 12 29 12 5 10 After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade 12 29 12 5 11 After Repacking the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade 12 31 12 5 12 Replacing the Photosens...

Page 818: ... 43 12 7 4 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB main 12 44 12 7 5 After Repacking the SRAM Board 12 44 12 7 6 After Replacing the HDD 12 44 12 7 7 When Replacing the HV2 PCB 12 45 12 7 8 When Replacing the ATR Sensor Patch Image Read Sensor 12 46 12 8 Pickup Feeding System 12 46 12 8 1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration After Replacing the Pickup Cassette 12 46 12 8 2 Adjusting the Manual Fe...

Page 819: ...ial control mechanism COPIER OPTION BODY P0 CNT 0 Is the image better See 1 Execute the following COPIER FUNCTION DPC OFFSET Replace the DC controller PCB Is the setting between 0 and 30 Check the potential sensor harness Replace the potential sensor unit To image adjustment basic procedure 2 Turn off the main power switch 1 Short circuit CP82 found on the DC controller PCB and GND frame 2 Disconn...

Page 820: ...e mode set 1 to the following and execute the item COPIER option PO CNT 2 Execute image stabilization control in service mode i e execute COPIER FUNCTION MISC P INTR EX 3 If the sure to execute full correction in user mode under auto gradation correction to ensure optimum density When done be sure to set 1 to the service mode item potential control function otherwise image faults can occur ...

Page 821: ... PCB during copying operation Make the following selections in service mode primary current level of the primary charging assembly COPIER DISPLAY HV STS PRIMARY Using the Potential Control Conversion Table convert the reading in uA indicated during printing operation into a control voltage Refer to the result as conversion value A Measure the voltage GRID CNT at J111B 8 found on the DC controller ...

Page 822: ...power switch Unconditional execution of potential control mechanism Check the Laser output Image adjustment basic procedure 3 Turn on the potential control mechanism COPIER OPTION BODY P0 CNT 1 Check the following service mode settings COPIER DISPLAY DPOT LPWR Y COPIER DISPLAY DPOT LPWR M COPIER DISPLAY DPOT LPWR C COPIER DISPLAY DPOT LPWR K Check the voltage level of CP11 found on the DC controll...

Page 823: ...ing in V indicated during black printing operation into a control voltage Refer to the result as conversion value D Is the difference between the actual measurement of DEV DC CNT and the foregoing value D within 10 Replace the DC controller PCB To image adjustment basic procedure 5 Measure the voltage DEV_CL_DC_CONT at J1132A 9 found on the DC controller during full color printing operation Make t...

Page 824: ... COPIER OPTION BODY P0 CNT 0 Measure the voltage TR1CONT at J1132B 8 found on the DC controller PCB during black printing operation Make the following selections in service mode current level of primary transfer COPIER DISPLAY HV STS 1TR K1 Using the Potential Control Conversion Table convert the reading in uA indicated during black printing operation into a control voltage Refer to the result as ...

Page 825: ...ration Make the following selections in service mode current level of secondary transfer COPIER DISPLAY HV STS 2TR Using the Potential control Conversion Table convert the reading in uA indicated during black printing operation into a control voltage Is the difference between the actual measurement of TR CNT and 2TR as it is indicated in service mode between 20 Try replacing HVT3 Is the fault corr...

Page 826: ...2 9 35 8 6 9 95 2 1 5 1329 7 44 9 25 3 39 6 7 4 94 7 1 547 1323 1 49 1 27 6 43 3 8 94 3 1 594 1316 5 53 4 30 47 1 8 6 93 8 1 641 1310 57 6 32 3 50 8 9 1 93 3 1 688 1303 4 61 8 34 7 54 6 9 7 92 9 1 734 1296 8 66 1 37 58 3 10 2 92 4 1 781 1290 2 70 3 39 4 62 1 10 8 91 9 1 828 1283 7 74 5 41 7 65 9 11 3 91 5 1 875 1277 1 78 8 44 1 69 6 11 9 91 1 922 1270 5 83 46 4 73 4 12 4 90 5 1 969 1263 9 87 2 48 ...

Page 827: ...188 1092 9 197 2 109 9 174 8 27 4 77 9 3 234 1086 4 201 5 112 3 178 6 28 77 4 3 281 1079 8 205 7 114 6 182 3 28 5 77 3 328 1073 2 209 9 117 186 1 29 1 76 5 3 375 1066 6 214 2 119 4 189 8 29 6 76 3 422 1060 1 218 4 121 7 193 6 30 2 75 6 3 469 1053 5 222 6 124 1 197 3 30 7 75 1 3 516 1046 9 226 9 126 4 201 1 31 3 74 6 3 563 1040 3 231 1 128 8 204 9 31 8 74 2 3 609 1033 7 235 3 131 1 208 6 32 4 73 7 ...

Page 828: ...8 45 7 62 5 4 781 869 3 341 1 189 9 302 5 46 3 62 4 828 862 8 345 3 192 3 306 3 46 8 61 5 4 875 856 2 349 6 194 6 310 47 4 61 1 4 922 849 6 353 8 197 313 8 47 9 60 6 4 969 843 358 199 3 317 6 48 5 60 1 5 016 836 5 362 3 201 7 321 3 49 59 7 5 063 829 9 366 5 204 325 1 49 6 59 2 5 109 823 3 370 7 206 4 328 8 50 1 58 7 5 156 816 7 375 208 7 332 6 50 7 58 3 5 203 810 1 379 2 211 1 336 3 51 3 57 8 5 25...

Page 829: ...4 6 46 6 6 375 645 7 485 269 9 430 2 65 1 46 1 6 422 639 2 489 2 272 2 434 65 7 45 6 6 469 632 6 493 4 274 6 437 8 66 2 45 2 6 516 626 497 7 276 9 441 5 66 8 44 7 6 563 619 4 501 9 279 3 445 3 67 3 44 2 6 609 612 9 506 1 281 7 449 67 9 43 8 6 656 606 3 510 4 284 452 8 68 4 43 3 6 703 599 7 514 6 286 4 456 5 69 42 8 6 75 593 1 518 8 288 7 460 3 69 6 42 4 6 797 586 5 523 1 291 1 464 1 70 1 41 9 6 84...

Page 830: ...4 2 83 4 30 7 7 969 422 1 628 8 349 9 558 84 30 2 8 016 415 6 633 1 352 2 561 7 84 5 29 7 8 063 409 637 3 354 6 565 5 85 1 29 3 8 109 402 4 641 5 356 9 569 2 85 6 28 8 8 156 395 8 645 8 359 3 573 86 2 28 3 8 203 389 3 650 361 6 576 8 86 7 27 9 8 25 382 7 654 2 364 580 5 87 3 27 4 8 297 376 1 658 5 366 3 584 3 87 9 26 9 8 344 369 5 662 7 368 7 588 88 4 26 5 8 391 362 9 666 9 371 591 8 89 26 8 438 3...

Page 831: ...2 3 14 8 9 563 198 5 772 7 429 8 685 7 102 8 14 3 9 609 192 776 9 432 2 689 5 103 4 13 9 9 656 185 4 781 2 434 5 693 2 103 9 13 4 9 703 178 8 785 4 436 9 697 104 5 12 9 9 75 172 2 789 6 439 2 700 7 105 12 5 9 797 165 7 793 9 441 6 704 5 105 6 12 9 844 159 1 798 1 443 9 708 2 106 2 11 5 9 891 152 5 802 3 446 3 712 106 7 11 1 9 938 145 9 806 6 448 7 715 7 107 3 10 6 9 984 139 3 810 8 451 0 719 5 107...

Page 832: ... 1 11 156 0 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty 0 11 203 0 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty 0 11 25 0 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty 0 11 297 0 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty 0 11 344 0 Outside of warranty Outsi...

Page 833: ...f warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty 0 11 813 0 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty 0 11 859 0 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty 0 11 906 0 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty 0 11 953 0 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outsi...

Page 834: ...argin Adjustment 1st side Execute the following service mode to adjust the registration COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST F 12 11 2 Left Right Image Margin Adjustment Adjust the horizontal registration mechanically 3 Leading Edge Image Margin Adjustment 2nd side Execute the following service mode items to adjust the registration 2 5 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 4 0 1 5 1 0mm double sided copy 2nd side 4 ...

Page 835: ... F 12 15 move the adjusting plate toward the rear to increase the left margin move the adjusting plate toward the front to decrease the left margin 4 Tighten the screw 5 Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover 6 Put the cassette 3 or 4 back in the machine 2 5 4 6 8 1012141618 20 0 decrease the setting of REGIST an increase by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm Increase the setting o...

Page 836: ...s is as indicated 3 Tighten the screw 12 2 5 Front Deck 0003 8722 Make prints using the right deck and left deck as the source of paper and check to be sure that the left right margin is as indicated if not make the following adjustments 1 Adjusting the Left Right Margin for the Left Deck 1 Push the release button and slide out the left deck 2 Using a flat bladed screwdriver detach the left face c...

Page 837: ...nt left cover 2 F 12 20 10 Close the left deck when the gap is gone slide out the left deck once again and tighten the 4 screws you loosened in step 9 If there still is a gap go back to step 9 11 Close the left deck 2 Right Deck Left Right Margin Adjustment 1 Push the release button and slide out the right deck 2 Open the upper right color and the lower right cover 3 Loosen the 2 screws 1 then ins...

Page 838: ... is a gap go back to step 9 11 Close the right deck 12 3 Scanning System 12 3 1 After Replacing the CCD Unit 0003 9936 If you have replaced the CCD unit be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG to enter the correction value for CCD dependent RG color displacement in sub scanning direction COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU GB to enter the correcti...

Page 839: ...troller PCB if you are initializing the RAM of the reader controller without replacing the PCB Using the SST upload the backup data of the reader controller then after initializing the RAM download the data to eliminate the need for the following adjustments 1 Reader Unit Related Adjustments 1 Using the SST download the latest version of the system software R CON 2 Make the following selections in...

Page 840: ...value COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST P Y M C K 2 ADF Related Adjustments The machine uses the RAM on its reader controller to hold ADF related service data as such you must make the appropriate adjustments for the ADF whenever you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the RAM 1 Enter the settings indicated on the P PRINT printout you have previously generated for the following items a orig...

Page 841: ...aced the black developing assembly 1 Make the following selections in service mode black toner supply FUNCTION INSTALL TONER S 12 5 2 Points to Note When Mounting the Polarity Positioning Plate 0006 0541 Go through the following steps in strict sequence when mounting the polarity positioning plate 1 Let go of your hand so that the developing cylinder moves and stops on its own 2 Shift the polarity...

Page 842: ...2 then remove the developing assembly lid 3 F 12 30 3 Even out the starter by shaking the container about 10 times 4 Open the lid 2 of the starter bottle 1 then remove the middle lid 3 and close the lid F 12 31 5 Supply half the starter so that it is even in the lengthwise direction around the stirring screw inside the color developing unit F 12 32 6 Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times by hand i...

Page 843: ...s small enough to prevent insertion of a transparency F 12 37 When tightening the screw take full care so that no shavings caused by turning the screw into the lid of the developing assembly and the container will move into the container 11 Cut off the appropriate tab 1 to suit the color of the starter you have supplied The tab A in the figure is an extra tab F 12 38 12 Fit the color developing un...

Page 844: ...n may loop between 690 and 620 16 Execute the following service mode item COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT Store away the generated printout in the service book case If there is a previous printout dispose of it 17 End service mode and start user mode on the Auto Gradation Correction screen follow the instructions to execute auto gradation correction full 12 5 4 Replacing the Starter of the Color De...

Page 845: ...etach the funnel 2 of the starter bottle 1 then detach the middle lid 3 and put the funnel back on 2 F 12 42 9 Pour the starter along the length of the stirring screw inside the color developing unit so that it is about half full F 12 43 10 Turn the developing gear in its normal direction 5 to 6 by hand to even out the starter inside it 11 Pour the rest of the starter around the string screw insid...

Page 846: ...L AINR OFF 18 Select the appropriate mode item from the following to suit the color of the starter you have used then press the OK key if Y developing assembly COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y if M developing assembly COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET M if C developing assembly COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C A countdown is shown on the screen while this mode item is under way At the end the screen ...

Page 847: ...UNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN 12 5 7 After Replacing the Pre Transfer Charging Wire 0004 2672 Execute the following in service mode pre transfer charging wire cleaning COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN 12 5 8 After Replacing the Pre Transfer Charging Wire 0004 9316 1 Clean the charging wire and the shielding plates 2 Execute the following in service mode pre transfer charging wire cleaning COPIER FUNC...

Page 848: ... not make its way behind the intermediate transfer belt Otherwise the presence of blade lubricant behind the intermediate transfer belt can cause the ITB home position sensor to make wrong detection 4 Turn the drive gear 1 in he direction of the arrow so that the area of blade lubricant 2 is found as shown F 12 51 5 Mount the ITB cleaning unit 2 to the intermediate transfer unit 1 then fix it in p...

Page 849: ...lace it when one side has been used 2 Clean the area 1 of the retainer plate coming into contact with the cleaning blade and the blade plate 2 using alcohol then dry wipe it to remove any toner The fine particle of toner under the blade edge can put the blade out of alignment allowing toner on the photosensitive drum to remain on the drum in the form of residual toner F 12 54 3 Be sure to mount th...

Page 850: ...0004 8937 If you have replaced the photosensitive drum be sure to go through the following 1 Remove the drum heater and the drum heater PCB then mount them to the new photosensitive drum 2 Mount the photosensitive drum so that the lot number label 1 attached to its inner side is toward the front of the machine F 12 59 Memo There is a light difference in the inside diameter of the photosensitive dr...

Page 851: ... drum flange be sure to fix it in place with a screw where it was found in step 1 F 12 60 3 Check the drum phase label 1 attached behind the process unit cover F 12 61 See the following sample The cell with a check mark 1 indicates the present drum phase location In this case the marking 3 is located in relation to the protrusion 2 of the drum fixing member with its left at and right at F 12 62 1 ...

Page 852: ...taching the drum flange check the location of the marking 2 on the drum flange in relation to the lot No label 1 found on the inner side of the drum In the case of the figure the left of the marking is at and the right is at with the lot No label facing upward 2 When attaching the drum flange be sure to fix it in place with a screw where it was found in step 1 F 12 64 3 Check the drum phase label ...

Page 853: ...turning on the main switch COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITR ROT 12 5 16 After Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller 0004 4230 As the machine is used more and more the shavings from the primary transfer roller can start to collect on the rollers behind the belt When you have replaced the primary transfer roller be sure to clean the 6 rollers 1 and the scraper 2 indicated below The idler roller indicated ...

Page 854: ...r 12 12 36 Cleaning Procedure 1 Place the ITB cleaner drive unit 1 with its cover facing down then stand the ITB unit 2 F 12 69 2 Clean the rollers 1 and the inside scraper 2 using alcohol F 12 70 1 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 855: ... into the fixing feeding assembly take full care not to damage the 2 sensors 1 F 12 72 12 6 2 After Replacing the Fixing Roller 0004 5054 If you have replaced the fixing roller be sure to execute the following service mode item to reset the counter reading COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX UP RL 12 6 3 After Replacing the Fixing Web 0004 1786 1 After attaching the web take up its slack so that there will b...

Page 856: ...des of the inlet guide is 0 5 or less F 12 73 F 12 74 12 6 5 Points to Note When Mounting the Pressure Roller 0005 8345 Be sure to mount the pressure roller 1 so that the lot number 2 found on its edge is found toward the front of the machine F 12 75 12 6 6 Adjusting the Nip Pressure of the Pressure Roller 0005 9076 The nip is adjusted to a high degree of accuracy before the machine is shipped out...

Page 857: ...owing The surface of the thermal switch 1 must be parallel to the fixing roller Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light Otherwise re mount it F 12 78 F 12 79 12 6 9 Points to Note When Mounting the Shift Thermal Switch 0004 5058 After mounting the thermal switch before mounting the inlet guide check to make sure o the following The surface of the thermal switch 1 must be pa...

Page 858: ... Thermistor 0005 5549 After mounting the thermistor make sure of the following The surface of the thermal switch 1 must be parallel to the fixing roller Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light Otherwise re mount it F 12 84 F 12 85 12 6 12 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor 0005 5550 After mounting the thermistor make sure of the following The surface o...

Page 859: ...f you are initializing the RAM of the reader controller without replacing the PCB Using the SST upload the backup data of the reader controller then after initializing the RAM download the data to eliminate the need for the following adjustments 1 Reader Unit Related Adjustments 1 Using the SST download the latest version of the system software R CON 2 Make the following selections in service mode...

Page 860: ...d on the P PRINT printout you have previously generated for the following items a original stop position adjustment FEEDER ADJSUT DOCST b original feed speed magnification adjustment FEEDER ADUST LA SPEED 2 Make adjustments using the following items a ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment FEEDER FUNCTION SENS INT b tray width adjustment AB system FEEDER FUNCTION TRY A4 and FEEDER FUNCTION TRY A5R inch...

Page 861: ...R EX 6 Execute auto gradation correction in user mode adjust cleaning auto gradation correction full correction 7 You will have to dispose of the waste toner in the waste toner bottle After replacing the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM you have to dispose waste toner because you cannot enter a setting for the following in service mode COUNTER MISC WASTE TNR 12 7 3 Points to Note When Moun...

Page 862: ...trol panel indicates the message Turn Off and Then On the Power Switch on the Left on its control panel turn off and then on the power 3 Make the following selections in service mode and press the OK key to initialize the RAM COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR MN CON 12 7 6 After Replacing the HDD 0004 1730 A If NetSpot Accountant NSA Is Not Used 1 Format the HDD Start in safe mode i e turn on the main power w...

Page 863: ...setup system control group ID system control ID No 9 Turn off and then on the main power If you fail to set system control group ID and system control ID No you will not be able to set register card to device as part of the NetSpot Account setup work 10 Download the card ID While the machine is in a standby state download the card ID from NSA 11 Check the count control function In sure mode make t...

Page 864: ...ke sure that the left right margin is as indicated If not as indicated make the following adjustments 1 Press the cassette release button and slide out the cassette 3 or 4 to the front 2 Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover 3 Insert a screwdriver through the opening in the front right stay then loosen the screw 1 and adjust the position of the adjusting plate 2 F 12 97 move the adj...

Page 865: ...s as indicated 3 Tighten the screw 12 8 3 Adjusting the Front Deck Pickup Horizontal Registration 0003 9957 Make prints using the right deck and left deck as the source of paper and check to be sure that the left right margin is as indicated if not make the following adjustments 1 Adjusting the Left Right Margin for the Left Deck 1 Push the release button and slide out the left deck 2 Using a flat...

Page 866: ...t left cover 2 F 12 102 10 Close the left deck when the gap is gone slide out the left deck once again and tighten the 4 screws you loosened in step 9 If there still is a gap go back to step 9 11 Close the left deck 2 Right Deck Left Right Margin Adjustment 1 Push the release button and slide out the right deck 2 Open the upper right color and the lower right cover 3 Loosen the 2 screws 1 then ins...

Page 867: ...the following selections to register manual feed A4R width CPOIER FUNCTION CST MF A4R 2 3 Press the OK key to store the new A4R width 2 4 Record the A4R basic setting indicated on the control panel on the service label 3 Register the A4 paper width basic value as follows 3 1 Set the manual feed side guide to A4 3 2 Make the following selections to register manual feed A4 width CPOIER FUNCTION CST ...

Page 868: ...Chapter 12 12 50 ...

Page 869: ...Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images ...

Page 870: ......

Page 871: ... 13 16 13 3 2 2 Light Image Weak Density 13 20 13 3 2 2 1 Overall light image on black area uneven image 13 20 13 3 2 2 2 Low density Poor contact of connectors around process unit 13 21 13 3 2 3 Uneven Density 13 25 13 3 2 3 1 Uneven Density Along the Leading Edge in a Solid Color Image 13 25 13 3 2 3 2 Uneven Density in the Form of a Feedscrew in Color Images 13 27 13 3 2 3 3 Uneven Density in H...

Page 872: ...message 13 68 13 3 5 Error Code 13 69 13 3 5 1 E013 0001 Error Code How to clear waste toner full detection 13 69 13 3 5 2 E013 0001 Error Code How to change the waste toner detection timing 13 69 13 3 5 3 E020 E021 E061 E070 E078 E820 Error Code Poor contact of connectors around process unit 13 69 13 3 5 4 E020 03A0 E020 01A2 Error Code 13 73 13 3 5 5 E061 0001 Error Code 13 73 13 3 5 6 E070 0102...

Page 873: ...g the Placement of Paper 0001 6077 a Check to see that the amount of paper placed in the cassette and the manual feed tray is as indicated b If transparencies are used check to see if they are placed in the correct orientation 13 1 4 Checking the Durables 0001 6079 Check the Durables Table and replace those parts that have reached the end of the indicated lifetimes 13 1 5 Checking the Periodically...

Page 874: ...n excess load is imposed on the drive system Check the gears for wear and chipping Cassette Check to see if the cassettes are fitted properly Check also to see that an appropriate paper size is selected As necessary try a normal cassette to see if the problem if any stops Check to see that the movement of the cassette holding plate is smooth Check also to see that the holding plate is free of defo...

Page 875: ...lly Check the fuses on the PCBs to see if they have blown Check to see that the user knows how to use the machine correctly 13 1 7 Others 0001 6094 If a machine is brought in from a cold to a warm place its inside can develop condensation which will lead to various problems a condensation on the BD sensor can cause faults associated with E100 b condensation on the dust blocking glass can cause the...

Page 876: ... 6111 1 Set the copy count paper size and pickup mode single sided or double sided 2 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST PG 3 Make the following selections COPIER TEST PG TYPE 4 Enter the appropriate TYPE No using the keypad and press the OK key 5 Select the appropriate color using COLOR Y M C K output at 1 6 Set the density using DENS Y M C K valid only if TYPE 5 7 Press the...

Page 877: ...lt in the drum unit or the laser exposure system b Fogging If fogging is found only in the white area 2 suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system c White Line If a white line is found in the image suspect a fault in the developing system d Uneven Density at the Front Rear If uneven density is found at the front rear suspect a fault in the drum unit laser exposure system or tran...

Page 878: ...ller b Black Line If a black line is found suspect a scar in the photosensitive drum or dirt on the primary charging roller c White Line If a white line is found at the same location for all colors suspect a fault in the ITB unit or the secondary transfer outside roller If it is found in different locations or it is found in a specific color suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure s...

Page 879: ...ement If color displacement is found suspect a scar in the ITB and a fault in the drum unit b Right Angle Straight Lines If the right angles or straight lines are not correct suspect a fault in the laser exposure system a fault in the shape of the registration middle outside roller and a fault in the secondary transfer outside roller F 13 3 ...

Page 880: ...w too light suspect a fault in the developing system if the density of all colors is low too light suspect a fault in the laser exposure system and the transfer block b While Line If a white line is found in a specific color suspect a fault in the development system of that particular color c Uneven Density at the Front Rear If uneven density is found in a specific color suspect a fault in the dev...

Page 881: ...f individual colors YMCBk and fogging a Gray Balance Check the grayscale area to see if the densities of all colors are even b Gradation Check the gradation of individual colors YMCBk and for any difference in color c Fogging If fogging is found in the white area suspect a fault in the developing system a fault in the drum unit and poor adjustment of the laser exposure system F 13 6 Light area Whi...

Page 882: ...Chapter 13 13 10 13 3 Troubleshooting ...

Page 883: ...or Prints Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction Smeared of Colored Characters Lines Vertical Lies in Halftone Images Image Fault Occurring at Specific Intervals Missing Color White Spots at 51mm Intervals Vertical Lines Caused by an ITB Cleaning Fault Vertical Lines Soiling of the Left Right Margin on Double Sided Prints 1st side Oil Lines in Vertical Direction Stray Toner Soiling as Dots a...

Page 884: ... Message user requesting disabling of the message Jam Main Unit 0103 0104 Jam Code Neuissiedler large size RA3 pickup fault Error code E020 E021 E061 E070 E078 E820 Error Code Poor contact of connectors around process unit E020 03A0 E020 01A2 Error Code E061 0001 Error Code E070 0102 Error Code E070 0101 E070 0102 E070 0201 E070 0202 E070 0302 Error Code E542 8001 Error Code Item Symptoms ...

Page 885: ...ith high labor cost Field with low labor cost 1 Photosensitive drum dry wiping images with spots 2 Photosensitive drum cleaning blade 195 000 images replace replace 3 Photosensitive drum scoop up sheet 390 000 images 4 Photosensitive drum cleaner scoop up sheet 150 000 prints clean clean 5 Photosensitive drum cleaner assembly lower 150 000 prints clean clean 6 Pre transfer charging assembly rail 1...

Page 886: ...0 000 prints clean clean 7 Primary transfer roller 195 000 images replace replace 8 Primary transfer static eliminator 300 000 images 9 ITB replacement 300 000 images ITB cleaning of outer surface unit replacement clean clean 10 Secondary transfer inside roller 300 000 prints replace 11 Patch detection sensor cleaning 250 000 images clean clean 12 ITB inside roller scraper cleaning Primary transfe...

Page 887: ...00 images ITB cleaning of outer surface unit replacement clean clean 10 Secondary transfer inside roller 300 000 prints replace 11 Patch detection sensor cleaning 250 000 images clean clean 12 ITB inside roller scraper cleaning Primary transfer roller replacement clean clean 13 ITB cleaning blade 195 000 images replace replace 14 ITB cleaner scoop up sheet 150 000 prints replace replace 15 Seconda...

Page 888: ...nal pins can start to suffer from poor connection resulting in wrong operation detection Description A break in the harness can occur when the harness is disconnected connected about 30 times The following is a list of harnesses that are subject to a break with descriptions of symptoms expected when a break occurs T 13 6 Name part No Pin No Connection load notation Expected error condition symptom...

Page 889: ...toner 12 13 14 black toner level sensor TS1 2 min supply error E020 00FF black developing assembly excess toner supply The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner black developing assembly without toner image fault low density The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the absence of toner 15 16 NC 1 2 developing rotary locking solenoid SL10 E021 0002 The solenoid fails to ...

Page 890: ...e toner level sensor TS2 2 min supply error reset by opening closing the door hopper excess toner supply The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner hopper without toner black developing assembly inside without toner The job stops The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the absence of toner 6 7 black toner supply motor M25 hopper without toner black developing assembly i...

Page 891: ...Chapter 13 13 19 F 13 8 F 13 9 Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact 3 4 1 5 2 ...

Page 892: ... Finally the toner level became low and light image or uneven image occurred Field Remedy 1 Make sure that bit8 in service mode COPIER DC CON I O P009 shows 1 which means that the toner level sensor detects toner remaining 2 Pull out the AP kit from the main unit and unplug reinsert the 3P connector once again 3 Check the service mode value in Step 1 once again If bit8 shows 0 this symptom might h...

Page 893: ...nected about 30 times The following is a list of harnesses that are subject to a break with descriptions of symptoms expected when a break occurs T 13 7 Name part No Pin No Connection load notation Expected error condition symptom in response to error 1 ITB cleaner harness FM2 0946 connector J214L 1 2 3 4 ITB cleaner shift motor M21 E078 0001 The motor stops 5 6 7 ITB cleaning HP sensor PS23 E078 ...

Page 894: ... is wrongly detected in the absence of toner 15 16 NC 1 2 developing rotary locking solenoid SL10 E021 0002 The solenoid fails to operate 3 4 5 developing rotary solenoid sensor PS8 E021 0002 The sensor fails to operate 6 7 8 developing rotary HP sensor PS19 E021 0001 The sensor fails to operate 9 14 ATR sensor PS4 E020 A0 E020 A1 E020 A2 E020 A3 An error sensor value is detected 15 16 ATR sensor ...

Page 895: ...oner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner hopper without toner black developing assembly inside without toner The job stops The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the absence of toner 6 7 black toner supply motor M25 hopper without toner black developing assembly inside without toner The job stops The hopper is without toner 8 9 10 hopper open closed sensor PS28 message calling for r...

Page 896: ...Chapter 13 13 24 F 13 11 F 13 12 Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact 3 4 1 5 2 ...

Page 897: ...C lower the setting by 50 in COPIER ADJUST DENS P SGNL C To change the setting enter the value obtained by subtracting 50 from the present value i e not 50 For instance if the present value is 450 enter 400 2 When the machine has entered a ready state make 2 prints of a full page solid image of the color in question COPIER TEST PG TYPE 5 COPIER TEST PG DENS Y M C K for the color in question 255 fo...

Page 898: ...Chapter 13 13 26 Image Sample F 13 13 ...

Page 899: ...estion from the machine and fit its lid so that there is no gap Be sure to force the lid against the developing assembly so that there is no gap in the area 1 indicated in the diagram i e not permitting insertion of a transparency F 13 14 When tightening the screw be sure to take care so that the shavings of the lid of the developing assembly or its lid will not enter the assembly i e shavings occ...

Page 900: ...Chapter 13 13 28 Image Sample F 13 15 ...

Page 901: ...g glass In particular the cleaning pad tends to start deteriorating early about 100 000 images in a high temperature humidity environment Field Remedy 1 Clean the dust blocking glass 2 If the primary charging wire is approaching the end of its life replace it Be sure also to replace the cleaning pad at the same time 3 If the area of friction of the cleaning pad is worn or deformed replace th pad 4...

Page 902: ...re not satisfactory set all to 10 If you have made a change to the setting of the foregoing service mode item adjustment of potential to remove fogging caused by developing bias you must be sure to return it to the default setting 0 when you replace the toner or the developing assembly of the color in question If you fail to do so the images may once again start to have fogging Description This sy...

Page 903: ...an cause a shortage of transfer current causing white spots and uneven density in images Field Remedy Execute the following service mode to decrease the pre transfer charging bias COPIER ADJUST HV TR PRE TR set it to 250 Description This symptom is most conspicuous when a Bk solid image is copied on rough textured paper not of a recommended type Advise the user to avoid rough textured paper Image ...

Page 904: ... faithfully reproduce any uneven surface of the original communicated by its reader unit Moreover the machine s controller possesses characteristics that tend to amplify a minute difference in an area of high density causing any change in an area of a solid C original to be amplified and its print to show a coarse image F 13 19 ...

Page 905: ...e gamma correction table of the controller as follows 1 Set 3 to the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY GLUTLV C 2 Set 3 to the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY GLUTMX C Start Perform step 1 Perform step 3 Is the yellow area of the output image coarse Is the copy image too light Execute auto gradation correction full in user mode 1 Execute auto gradation correction full in us...

Page 906: ...actical problems to the user 13 3 2 3 7 Transfer Faults on Mono Color Prints 0006 3717 Cause The machine executes primary transfer ATVC control at specific intervals when making mono color prints When there is a change in the environment however the machine can at times fail to execute the control resulting in transfer faults Field Remedy Perform the following work Execute the service mode item us...

Page 907: ... mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE 2 Check the printed chart to find out which color is displaced The machine is designed as a C base machine use yellow to serve as the point of reference 3 Adjust the write start position of the displaced color in service mode if Y is displaced on the 1st side execute the following in service mode COPIER ADJUST IMAGE REG REG V Y if M is displaced on the 1st side execute th...

Page 908: ...r if you have replaced the DC controller PCB be sure to enter the values indicated on the service label range of adjustment 10 to 10 unit pixel at time of shipment 0 2 Changing the Primary Transfer Color to Color Current Level Set 2 to the following in service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR STS1 range of adjustment 5 to 0 unit 2 yA at time of shipment 0 A A Ref Ref Y M C Bk Full Y M C Bk Full NG OK ...

Page 909: ...en 2 color blue green red is used to form an image of characters or lines an excess of toner deposit can cause the layer of toner to grow too thick during the first transfer of the second color thus leading to smears of toner character edges on the intermediate transfer belt because of separation discharges Field Remedy Execute the following service mode item to decrease the amount of toner that i...

Page 910: ...and the amount of deposited toner may well be within allowance individually they can trigger the symptom when combined Improvements have been made so that the level of the symptom is equal to that found in past machines if the user points it out however provide the foregoing remedy The fault however is of a negligible level Image Sample F 13 24 ...

Page 911: ...in the form of lines Field Remedy Clean the photosensitive drum or replace it Replace the scoop up sheet of the photosensitive drum Note Fit the scoop up sheet of the photosensitive drum properly 1 Engage the hole at the rear of the scoop up sheet 1 of the photosensitive drum on the hook 2 then pull it toward the front and fix it in position using the screw 3 While doing so be sure that the tip of...

Page 912: ... NEVER in clockwise direction F 13 26 13 3 2 5 2 Image Fault Occurring at Specific Intervals 0005 4703 Description This image fault occurs in main scanning direction Field Remedy By referring to the following table of intervals clean or replace the part identified T 13 8 Roller intervals approx Part 60 mm black developing cylinder 37 mm color developing cylinder 51 mm primary transfer roller 63 mm...

Page 913: ...05 5813 Cause When a double sided print is made in a low humidity environment the secondary transfer voltage tends to increase while processing the 2nd side at times causing missing color because of an increase in the degree of discharge F 13 27 ...

Page 914: ...ng the CA 1 Test Sheet execute auto duplexing copying Is the fault 1 found on the 2nd side of the print Is the image on the print too light Execute auto gradation correction full in user mode Execute auto gradation correction full in user mode END Using the CA 1 Test Sheet execute auto duplexing copying Using the CA 1 Test Sheet execute auto duplexing copying No Yes No Yes ...

Page 915: ...Set the paper type in the following service mode item COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR1 1 plain paper 2 recycled paper 3 colored paper 4 punch paper 5 heavy paper 1 6 heavy paper 2 7 heavy paper 3 8 transparency 9 tracing paper 10 postcard 11 2 pane postcard 12 4 pane postcard 13 label sheet 3 Color Mode TR CLR1 Use the color mode in the following service mode item COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR CLR1 1 Bk 2 4C ...

Page 916: ...OPIER ADJUST HT TR TR DUP1 2 COPIER ADJUST HT TR 2TR TGT1 0 COPIER ADJUST HT TR 2TR SHR1 3 Step 2 Adjust the color balance using the following 4 service mode items thus decreasing the density of individual colors 1 Y Color Balance Adjustment Set 3 and execute the following service mode item COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ Y range of settings 8 to 8 2 M Color Balance Adjustment Set 3 and execute the follow...

Page 917: ...Replace the primary transfer roller 2 Clean the rollers inside the ITB unit and the scraper inside the intermediate transfer belt Cleaning the Rollers Inside the ITB Unit and the Scraper Inside the Intermediate Transfer Belt 1 Dry wipe the rollers 1 and the scraper 2 shown in the following figure with lint free paper F 13 30 Description The white spot in question tends to occur at intervals of abo...

Page 918: ...e tends to fail to remove all residual toner from the belt permitting some additive to remain and stick to the ITB leading to white spots in images Field Remedy Perform the following work Execute clean roller in user mode This mode item is designed to start black band sequence Note to increase the cleaning performance of the blade user mode adjust clean clean roller If executing the mode item fail...

Page 919: ...aking color prints of halftone images immediately turning on the main power The machine may be set so that it executes black band sequence a specific number of times when the main power is turned on To do so use COPIER OPTION BODY ITB CLN The settings are as follows 0 do not execute factory default 1 execute once 2 execute twice 3 execute 3 times Note It takes 60 sec for the machine to run this mo...

Page 920: ...l direction Field Remedy Clean the deflecting mirror as follows 1 Open the hopper assembly 2 Hold the mirror cleaning tool 1 as shown and fit it in the slit 2 mirror cleaning tool FL2 2474 F 13 33 3 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 4 Slide out the process unit 5 Pull on the grip 1 found on the edge of the dust blocking plate to detach the glass plate from the machine F 13 34 1 1 2 ...

Page 921: ...y 90 deg as shown step 1 7 Move the mirror cleaning tool 1 to the front and to the rear as shown to clean the laser mirror step 2 F 13 35 Description The vertical lines tend to grow thicker as the machine is used longer 1 1 2 1 2 2 Procedure1 Procedure2 ...

Page 922: ...prints 1st side Field Remedy Clean the sheet found at the lower rear of the fixing feeding assembly See the following figure 3 Note Check to see if any of the following is soiled with toner if soiled dry wipe it entire surface of the deck top plate 1 bend area of the deck top plate fan 2 sheet at fixing feeding assembly 4 locations 3 F 13 36 F 13 37 Description This symptom does not occur if the p...

Page 923: ... in service mode COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ C Set 3 to the following in service mode COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ K Caution If the image is too faint increase the setting by using the foregoing service mode items After performing this remedy be sure to execute full correction in user mode under auto gradation correction to ensure optimum density Remarks This symptom can occur when printing on the 2nd side...

Page 924: ...2 Cause When the transfer cleaning drive assembly is removed the force of the pressure spring causes the ITB cleaning blade to butt against the intermediate transfer belt The contact in turn will cause the coating of the blade to stick to the belt The coating will then be pressed against the photosensitive drum under the force of the primary transfer roller When the photosensitive drum cleaning bl...

Page 925: ...ess unit 2 Take out the primary charging assembly 3 Remove the 2 screws and detach the charging assembly rail F 13 40 4 As shown in the figure turn the photosensitive drum 1 counterclockwise while dry wiping its surface with lint free paper 2 F 13 41 Step 2 Replace the ITB cleaning blade and the photosensitive drum cleaning blade Description The coating on the photosensitive drum will appear white...

Page 926: ...hich the line is conspicuous change the setting to 30 in service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT Y change the setting to 30 in service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT M change the setting to 30 in service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT C 3 Once again generate test prints COPIER TEST PG TYPE 1 then check the output against the output generated in step 1 If there is no improvement go to step 4 4 De...

Page 927: ...tting using the foregoing service mode item range of settings 31 and 49 After you have performed the foregoing remedy be sure to execute auto gradation correction full image characteristic correction control in user mode Description This symptom tends to be conspicuous in M or C when making full color prints halftone In the case of M the symptom tends to occur about 25 to 30 mm from the leading ed...

Page 928: ...Shift SW1 SW2 DIP switch on the HV2 PCB to ON At time of shipment these switches are kept to OFF F 13 44 Description If SW1 is OFF and SW2 is OFF the AC component of the developing bias is 1 800 Vp p default If SW1 is ON and SW2 is ON the AC component of the developing bias is 1 600 Vp p A decrease in the AC component of the developing bias will limit the increase in potential occurring instantane...

Page 929: ...Chapter 13 13 57 Image Sample F 13 45 ...

Page 930: ...leaning Blade 0005 6902 Cause The ITB cleaning blade can bend when used in a high humidity environment causing a ghost image Field Remedy Replace the ITB cleaning blade Description This symptom tends to be conspicuous when an image with a high color ratio is copied Image Sample F 13 46 ...

Page 931: ...d to an error associated with E020 or can adversely affect color reproduction Field Remedy Use the following service mode item to execute primary transfer ATVC controller mechanism after idle rotation of the primary transfer roller Execute this service mode item immediately after the control panel screen comes on i e when the main power is turned on COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ITR ROT Description The s...

Page 932: ...Chapter 13 13 60 Image Sample image of a specific color is too light F 13 47 ...

Page 933: ...Chapter 13 13 61 image of a specific color is too dark F 13 48 ...

Page 934: ...Chapter 13 13 62 image is too light overall F 13 49 ...

Page 935: ...th the symptom being absent in the case of a mono solid image double sided prints are made Cause As the pressure roller is used more and more the rubber layer starts to soften gradually increasing the nip width and as a result causing the symptom to occur more readily Field Remedy Change the setting of the following from 0 default to 1 or 2 in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY FXLW TMP Memo 1 The ef...

Page 936: ...r the pressure roller If the user seldom uses heavy paper and is likely to complain each time the roller starts to wear out the setting need not be changed back to its initial value Note 3 If the fixing roller or the pressure roller has been used for more than 150 00 prints replacement of the roller is recommended F 13 50 ...

Page 937: ...e web retaining pad is mounted to the same shaft as the cam used to move the outside heating roller to and from the fixing roller while the outside heating roller is in contact with the fixing roller the pad is away from the web on the other hand when the outside heating roller is away from the fixing roller the pad is used to keep the web in place The machine indicates the message Printer is warm...

Page 938: ...Chapter 13 13 66 F 13 51 1 Web retaining pad 2 Cam 3 Cleaning web 4 Outside heating roller 5 Fixing roller 1 2 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 939: ...op controller box plate 1 bottom plate of the DC controller box 2 F 13 52 13 3 4 3 User Warning Message 13 3 4 3 1 Message Check the network connection Message Check the TCP IP 0006 4895 Case in the field Field Remedy If the host machine is not connected to network follow the steps below Change the service mode setting so as not to display the network error messages In service mode LEVEL 2 COPIER ...

Page 940: ...or use alcohol to clean them Memo If the machine is installed in a dusty place cleaning it on a periodical basis is desirable C Replace the reading glass D Replace the read roller Memo If you have replaced the rear roller be sure to perform the following white level adjustment DF height adjustment E Replace the CCD unit 13 3 4 3 3 Frequent DF reading Glass Cleaning Message user requesting disablin...

Page 941: ...10 000 default 3 320 000 4 460 000 2 Page counts between the warning message and E013 indication In service mode COPIER Adjust MISC WT ER LV select any number from 0 though 3 0 1 1 20 000 2 40 000 default 3 60 000 13 3 5 3 E020 E021 E061 E070 E078 E820 Error Code Poor contact of connectors around process unit 0005 9975 For details of error codes see the following E020 0080 E020 0180 E020 0280 E020...

Page 942: ...ttle The presence of a bottle is wrongly detected in the absence of a bottle 6 7 pre exposure LED LED1 image fault solid black E061 0005 The LED fails to go on 8 9 10 11 color toner level sensor PS25 message calling for replacement of toner The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner image fault low density E020 92 The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the absence of t...

Page 943: ...ck developing assembly without toner image fault low density The motor stops 3 4 5 hopper inside toner level sensor TS2 2 min supply error reset by opening closing the door hopper excess toner supply The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner hopper without toner black developing assembly inside without toner The job stops The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the abs...

Page 944: ...Chapter 13 13 72 F 13 53 F 13 54 Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact 3 4 1 5 2 ...

Page 945: ...0 times or more Cause The pins inside the connector tend to wear out when the connector 1 is disconnected and then connected a number of times left of the process unit F 13 55 Field Remedy Replace the connector together with its harness 13 3 5 5 E061 0001 Error Code 0005 4274 Cause The grounding wire 2 of HV1 1 has poor contact Field Remedy Connect the grounding wire correctly F 13 56 1 ...

Page 946: ...rom the side plate 2 of the DC controller box wrong detection E070 0102 of the ITB home position tends to occur easily because of noise Field Remedy When mounting the DC controller PCB or the DC controller box be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows 1 Connect the connector of the harness 1 first then the other harness 3 2 Fix the harnesses 1 3 in place using the wire sad...

Page 947: ...y was replaced Field Remedy Check the following contacts of the grounding spring If any of these contacts is deformed and thus the electrical conductivity is poor correct the spring 1 contact with the end of the primary transfer upstream roller 2 contact with the edge of the plate 3 contact with a plate around the secondary transfer assembly 4 contact with a plate around the secondary transfer ass...

Page 948: ... Finisher R2 is not closed the No 2 tray will interfere with the door when it moves up down causing an error particularly the door fails to close at its rear Field Remedy Close the saddle delivery tray door 1 particularly its rear firmly As necessary advise the user on the importance of closing the door firmly F 13 61 6 5 7 1 ...

Page 949: ...er supply clutch FK2 0033 CL 2 J1109 CL3 Black developing assembly clutch FK2 0033 CL 3 J1109 SL1 Manual feed pickup solenoid FK2 0115 SL 1 J1107 SL2 Fixing web solenoid FK2 0037 SL 2 J1118 SL3 Reversal shift solenoid FM2 0584 SL 3 J1307 1303 J1119 SL4 Left deck confluence solenoid FK2 0035 SL 4 J1307 1303 J1119 SL5 Delivery solenoid FM2 0488 SL 5 J1308 1303 J1119 SL6 Deck right pickup solenoid FK...

Page 950: ...J1106 SL11 Patch image read sensor shutter solenoid FK2 0100 SL 11 J1121 SL12 ATR sensor shutter solenoid FK2 0100 SL 12 J1106 Notation Name Connector No Parts No I O PART CHK Fixing feeding driver PCB DC controller PCB SL7 CL3 CL2 SL6 SL8 SL9 SL2 SL1 SL4 SL3 SL5 CL1 SL10 SL11 SL12 ...

Page 951: ...tors 0004 9333 Reader Unit T 13 11 T 13 12 F 13 63 Notation Name Description Parts No I O PART CHK E code M501 Scanner motor drives the No 1 No 2 mirror base FK2 0237 E202 Notation Connector No I F PCB Reader controller PCB M501 J306 307 J203 ...

Page 952: ...ration motor drives the manual feed pickup assembly pre registration front roller FL2 0477 MTR 6 M8 Registration motor drives the registration roller FL2 0476 MTR 8 M9 Outside delivery motor drives the outside delivery roller curl removing roller FM2 1244 MTR 9 M10 Duplexing reversal motor drives the reversing 1 2 roller duplexing inlet roller FL2 0478 MTR 10 M11 Duplexing left motor drives the du...

Page 953: ...er stirring motor stirs toner black inside the hopper assembly FK2 0015 MTR 23 E020 M25 Black toner supply motor supplies toner from the black toner bottle FK2 0015 MTR 25 E025 M26 Primary charging wire cleaning motor drives the primary wire cleaner FL2 0991 MTR 26 M27 Pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor drives the pre transfer wire cleaner FL2 0991 MTR 27 M28 Horizontal registration motor d...

Page 954: ...1119 M9 J1122 M10 J1310 1302 J1119 M11 J1312 1302 J1119 M12 J1310 1302 J1119 M13 J1311 1302 J1119 M14 J1405 1402 J1115 M15 J1406 1402 J1115 M17 J1405 1402 J1115 M18 J1407 1402 J1115 M19 J1406 1402 J1115 M20 J1308 1302 J1115 M21 J1108 M22 J1118 M23 J1108 M25 J1108 M26 J1106 M27 J1108 M28 J1308 1302 J1119 M29 J1404 1403 J1116 M30 J1404 1403 J1116 M31 J1404 1403 J1116 M32 J1404 1403 J1116 ...

Page 955: ...Chapter 13 13 83 F 13 64 M19 M32 M31 M30 M17 M14 M29 M6 M9 M10 M11 M12 M25 M13 M28 M20 M22 M21 M26 M27 M15 M2 M5 M4 M3 M8 M1 M18 M23 ...

Page 956: ...s 0005 0020 Reader Unit T 13 15 T 13 16 F 13 65 Notation Name Function Parts No I O PART CHK E code FM13 Reader cooling fan cools the reader assembly FH5 1061 Notation Connector No Interface PCB Reader controller PCB FM13 J313 J308 J202 FM13 ...

Page 957: ...FAN ON 5 E805 0003 FM6 Delivery cooling fan 1 cools the delivery assembly FK2 0124 P003 10 1 half speed 1 ON FAN ON 6 330001 FM7 Process unit cooling fan cools the process unit FL2 1185 FAN ON 7 E820 0002 FM8 Control cooling fan cools the inside of the controller box FH5 1033 MN CONT P001 1 ON FM9 Power supply cooling fan cools the DC power supply PCB FK2 0524 FAN ON 9 E804 0007 FM10 Delivery cool...

Page 958: ...6 J1308 J1119 FM7 J1108 FM8 J1113 FM9 J124 FM10 J1110 FM11 J1308 J1119 FM12 J1308 J1119 Notation Connector No Fixing feeding driver PCB DC power supply relay PCB DC controller PCB Main controller PCB main FM2 FM10 FM11 FM12 FM6 FM3 FM4 FM8 FM9 FM5 FM7 FM1 ...

Page 959: ...Jam E code Interface PCB Reader controller PCB PS501 Scanner HP sensor detects scanner home position FK2 0149 J310 J308 J202 PS502 ADF open closed sensor 1 detects the state open closed of the ADF FK2 0149 J310 J307 J203 PS503 ADF open closed sensor 2 detects the timing of original size detection FK2 0149 J310 J308 J202 PS501 PS502 PS503 ...

Page 960: ...7 14 1 paper present J1107 PS7 Last sheet sensor identifies the last sheet from the manual feeder FK2 0149 P007 15 1 paper present J1107 PS8 Developing rotary solenoid sensor detects the activation of the developing rotary solenoid FK2 0149 P004 12 1 ON rotary lock J1106 PS9 Registration sensor detects registration paper FK2 0149 J1305 J1302 J1119 xx0A 0D91 PS10 Post transfer sensor detects paper ...

Page 961: ...lor toner level sensor detects the remaining level of color toner FK2 0003 P009 9 1 toner present J1106 PS26 Color toner cartridge sensor detects the presence absence of a color toner cartridge FK2 0004 P009 12 1 set J1106 PS28 Hopper assembly open closed sensor detects the state open closed of the hopper assembly FK2 0149 P009 13 0 open J1108 PS29 Transparency sensor rear detects registration pap...

Page 962: ... xx02 except stationary PS41 Left deck limit sensor detects the left deck limit FK2 0149 P004 1 1 limit state J1113 PS42 Left deck paper sensor detects paper in the left deck FK2 0149 P004 0 1 paper present J1113 PS43 Left deck lifter sensor detects the left deck lifer FK2 0149 P004 2 0 pickup state paper prresent J1113 PS44 Left deck paper level sensor A detects the remaining level of paper in th...

Page 963: ...sensor detects paper in the cassette 4 FK2 0149 P006 8 1 paper present J1114 PS57 Cassette 4 lifter sensor detects the cassette 4 lifter FK2 0149 P006 10 0 pickup state paper present J1114 PS58 Cassette 4 paper level sensor A detects the remaining level of paper in the cassette 4 FK2 0149 P006 11 0 50 or less of capacity J1117 PS59 Cassette 4 paper level sensor B detects the remaining level of pap...

Page 964: ...02 1 0 open J1112 PS65 Drum HP sensor detects the home position of the photosensitive drum FK2 0149 J1109 Notation Name Description Parts No I O Connector No Jam E code Feed driver PCB DC controller PCB PS23 PS19 PS25 PS22 PS10 PS18 PS15 PS12 PS14 PS29 PS3 PS9 PS2 PS1 PS8 PS30 PS29 PS3 PS28 PS32 PS41 PS42 PS43 PS40 PS47 PS4 TS1 TS2 ...

Page 965: ...Chapter 13 13 93 F 13 69 PS64 PS21 PS17 PS24 PS6 PS5 PS7 PS26 PS33 PS36 PS34 PS35 PS13 PS20 PS61 PS31 PS60 PS55 PS49 PS50 PS56 PS54 PS48 PS63 PS62 PS57 PS51 PS66 ...

Page 966: ...Chapter 13 13 94 F 13 70 PS65 PS38 PS39 PS46 PS44 PS45 PS52 PS53 PS58 PS59 PS37 ...

Page 967: ...ssette heater switch turns on off the cassette heater deck heater FM2 0844 SW11 Upper right cover open closed switch detects the upper right cover FM2 0960 SW12 Front cover switch detects the front cover FM2 0398 P002 2 1 open SW13 Control key control key FG3 3004 INSTALL KEY 0 do not recognize control key function 1 recognize control key function J1208 SW14 Waste toner lock detection switch detec...

Page 968: ...Chapter 13 13 96 F 13 71 SW14 SW15 SW12 SW11 SW1 SW13 SW2 SW3 ...

Page 969: ...Chapter 13 13 97 13 4 6 Lamps Heaters and Others 13 4 6 1 Heaters Lamps and Others 0004 3243 F 13 72 H5 LED1 H7 ELB1 H4 H3 H2 H1 H502 H501 H6 LA1 HDD1 ...

Page 970: ...roller heated FK2 0045 100V E000 E001 E004 FK2 0050 120V FK2 0055 230V H4 Outside heating roller heater fixing auxiliary heater helps keep the fixing roller heated FK2 0047 100V E000 E001 E004 FK2 0052 120V FK2 0057 230V H5 Drum heater prevents condensation on the drum FL2 0419 100V FL2 0535 120V FL2 0536 230V H7 Cassette heater prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the cassette FH7 4740...

Page 971: ...e drum FK2 0005 LA1 scanning lamp illuminates originals FK2 0224 MISC R SCANLAMP E225 Notation Main controller PCB Inverter PCB Reader controller PCB AC driver PCB DC controller PCB H1 J1803 1810 J1105 H2 J1803 1810 J1105 H3 J1804 1810 J1105 H4 J1804 1810 J1105 H5 J1805 1810 J1105 H7 J1806 1810 J1105 H501 J1807 H502 J1807 ELCB1 J1801 HDD1 J2126 1204 LED1 J1106 LA1 J602 601 J206 Notation Name Descr...

Page 972: ...ription 1 BD PCB FM2 0394 laser scanner generates the BD signal 2 Potential control PCB FM2 0444 potential sensor unit converts the potential sensor output 3 Manual feed paper width PCB FH7 7600 detects the width of paper from the manual feeder 4 Laser driver PCB FM2 0394 laser scanner controls the drive of the laser unit 5 Potential sensor FM2 0444 potential sensor unit measures the surface poten...

Page 973: ... 19 Main controller PCB sub FM2 0535 connects the image signals from the reader units 20 Ethernet PCB FG3 2865 connects to the network 21 Main controller PCB main FG3 2857 processes image data for output to the printer unit 22 HDD WM2 5208 holds system software image data 23 Environment switch PCB FM2 0523 100 0550 120 0551 230 power code terminal assembly switches the heater 24 AC drive PCB FM2 0...

Page 974: ...Chapter 13 13 102 F 13 74 13 2 5 3 14 15 16 9 6 12 7 1 11 4 25 24 21 23 19 20 31 29 28 27 26 22 18 17 32 30 10 8 ...

Page 975: ...ded in the field are discussed Although normal some LEDs may emit dim light when they remain off becouse of leakege current Keep the following symbols in mind VR that may be used in the field VR that must not be used in the field 13 4 8 2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker 0004 1098 Points to Note When Checking the Output of the PCBs Normally an AC voltage is being applied to the terminals o...

Page 976: ...r 13 13 104 13 4 8 3 Main Controller PCB main 0005 0094 F 13 76 T 13 26 Notation Description LED2001 in operation LED2 3 3 V all night being supplied LED5 3 3 V non all night being supplied LED5 LED2 LED2001 ...

Page 977: ...Chapter 13 13 105 13 4 8 4 DC Controller PCB 0004 6239 F 13 77 T 13 27 Notation Description VR1 VR10 for factory LED1 9 in operation VR10 LED2 LED5 LED4 LED6 LED7 LED8 LED9 LED1 LED3 VR1 ...

Page 978: ...Chapter 13 13 106 13 4 8 5 HV1 PCB 0005 0082 F 13 78 T 13 28 13 4 8 6 HV2 PCB 0005 0085 F 13 79 T 13 29 Notation Description VR1 for factory Notation Description VR2 for factory VR1 VR2 ...

Page 979: ...Chapter 13 13 107 13 4 8 7 HV3 PCB 0005 0087 F 13 80 T 13 30 Notation Description VR1 for factory VR2 for factory VR1 VR2 ...

Page 980: ...Chapter 13 13 108 ...

Page 981: ...Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis ...

Page 982: ......

Page 983: ...E012 14 21 14 3 12 E013 14 21 14 3 13 E014 14 22 14 3 14 E020 14 22 14 3 15 E021 14 25 14 3 16 E023 14 25 14 3 17 E025 14 25 14 3 18 E032 14 26 14 3 19 E043 14 26 14 3 20 E051 14 26 14 3 21 E061 14 27 14 3 22 E070 14 27 14 3 23 E073 14 28 14 3 24 E077 14 28 14 3 25 E078 14 28 14 3 26 E079 14 28 14 3 27 E100 14 29 14 3 28 E110 14 29 14 3 29 E197 14 30 14 3 30 E202 14 30 14 3 31 E225 14 30 14 3 32 E...

Page 984: ...il 14 45 14 3 67 E604 14 49 14 3 68 E609 14 49 14 3 69 E674 14 49 14 3 70 E677 14 50 14 3 71 E710 14 50 14 3 72 E711 14 50 14 3 73 E713 14 51 14 3 74 E717 14 51 14 3 75 E719 14 51 14 3 76 E730 14 52 14 3 77 E731 14 53 14 3 78 E732 14 53 14 3 79 E733 14 54 14 3 80 E740 14 54 14 3 81 E743 14 54 14 3 82 E744 14 55 14 3 83 E745 14 55 14 3 84 E746 14 56 14 3 85 E747 14 56 14 3 86 E800 14 59 14 3 87 E80...

Page 985: ...on to the life of the fixing assembly E009 there is an error in the shift of the external heating roller E012 there is an error in the drum ITB motor E013 there is clogging by waste toner E014 there is an error in the fixing motor E020 there is an ATR error E021 there is an error in the rotation of the developing assembly E023 the developing sleeve motor does not rotate normally E025 there is an o...

Page 986: ...ear change motor finisher R1 R2 E530 there is an error in front alignment finisher R1 R2 E531 there is a stapling error finisher R1 R2 E532 there is an error in the shift of the stapler finisher R1 R2 E535 there is an error in the swing of the stapler finisher R1 R2 E537 there is an error in rear alignment finisher R1 R2 E540 there is an error in the up down movement of the upper tray finisher R1 ...

Page 987: ...eader E730 there is a PDL error E731 there is a UFR board error E732 there is a reader communication error E733 there is a printer communication error E740 there is an Ethernet board error E743 there is a DDI communication error E744 there is a language file boot ROM error E745 there is TokenRing board error E746 the accessories board is of the wrong type E747 there is an error in the ASIC for ima...

Page 988: ... Network Settings in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen then turn the machine s main power OFF and back ON again No response from the server Check the settings The specified server settings are incorrect or the server is not turned ON Alternatively the machine s TCP IP resources may be low Wait for a while and try browsing again If there is still no response from the server try s...

Page 989: ...e host name Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen Cannot connect to the selected server Check the settings The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address port 1 Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address Settings in TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings from the Additional Functions...

Page 990: ... addresses to search Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server is used in the search criterion Remove from the search criterion and search again The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute an acceptable search criterion There is an unequal number of and is not placed within Make sure that the characters for the search crite...

Page 991: ...t properly in the feeder or on the platen glass and repeat the whole procedure from the beginning 012 The document could not be sent because the receiving fax machine was out of paper Ask the receiving party to load paper into their fax machine 018 The receiving machine did not respond when your machine redialed Confirm that the receiving machine is able to communicate and try again The documents ...

Page 992: ...n after the other send jobs are complete 2 Do not send the document to too many recipients at the same time Send the document to a smaller number of recipients each time 703 The memory for the image data is full 1 Wait a few moments and try again after the other send jobs are complete 2 Erase documents stored in inboxes If the machine still does not operate normally turn the main power OFF and the...

Page 993: ...nal Functions screen Check that the SMTP server is operating properly Check the network status 753 A TCP IP error occurred while sending an e mail message Socket Select error etc Check the network cables and connectors If the machine still does not operate normally turn the main power OFF and then back ON again 754 The server is not functioning or the network is down The destination setting is not...

Page 994: ...ord is incorrect Check the destination setting 802 The name of the SMTP Server in E mail I Fax settings in Network Settings in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen is incorrect The DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen is incorrect Connection to the DNS server failed Check the name of th...

Page 995: ...neous connections are not possible Wait for a few moments before trying to send the data again or change the NetWare server to which you are sending your documents Alternatively stop the Pserver 818 The received data is not in a printable file format Ask the sender to change the file format and resend the data 819 You have received data that cannot be processed MIME information is incorrect Check ...

Page 996: ...otification mail was not sent because TCP IP Settings or E mail I Fax in Network Settings in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen have not been set or trouble has occurred in the mail server 1 Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP IP Settings and E mail I Fax in Network Settings in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen 2 Check the status of the...

Page 997: ... by the mail server for sending e mail or I fax 1 Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen to Off 2 Change the mail server settings so that the client certificate is not requested 843 There is large difference between the current time set in the KDC Key Distribution Center server and the one set in the machine 1 Change the current date and time in D...

Page 998: ...R FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0012 The temperature reaches 80 deg C but does not reach 110 deg C within 300 sec Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor thermal switch and heater then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0013 The temperature reaches 110 deg C but does not reach 140 deg C within 300 sec Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor the...

Page 999: ...0 sec Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor thermal switch and heater then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0030 After power on the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 420 sec Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor thermal switch and heater then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0031 The temperature reaches ...

Page 1000: ...r sub thermistor and heater for an open circuit and poor contact then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E002 The rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is not enough There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor THM1 THM2 THM3 thermal switch TP1 TP2 TP3 or heater H1 H2 H3 H4 The AC driver PCB or the DC contr...

Page 1001: ...ontact then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0043 During standby the temperature of the pressure roller drops below 120 deg C Check the main thermistor thermal switch and heater for an open circuit and poor contact then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0051 During copying the temperature of the fixing roller drops below 150 deg C Check the main thermistor thermal swit...

Page 1002: ...thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0006 There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater or the fixing main heater Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0007 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller he...

Page 1003: ...g sub heater fixing main heater or contact heater Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0010 The fixing roller thermistor has an open circuit Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0020 The outside h...

Page 1004: ...0 The drive solenoid of the fixing assembly is not connected Check the drive solenoid of the fixing web for disconnection then reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E006 The fixing assembly has a comparison error 0001 The fixing drawer has been identified as being disconnected Check the connector of the drive solenoid of the fixing web t...

Page 1005: ...de Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E013 There is clogging by waste toner 0001 There is a waste toner full error The waste toner inside the toner box result of software conversion is 90 or more of the capacity of the toner box 7100 cc i e the soft counter reading is 250000 or higher Check the amount of waste toner thereafter turn the main power off and then back on If you have replace...

Page 1006: ...d then on the main power then execute the intermediate transfer belt xx12 For INIT control service mode INISET at time of initial setup the Sig value is 960 or higher The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit The connector has poor contact The opening closing of the shutter is faulty The intermediate transfer belt is soiled Turn off and then on the main power then execute the intermediate t...

Page 1007: ...t xxA2 For ATR control the Sig value is 960 or higher The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit The connector has poor contact The opening closing of the shutter is faulty Turn off and then on the main power then execute the intermediate transfer belt xxA3 For ATR control the Ref value is 960 or higher The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit The connector has poor contact Turn off ...

Page 1008: ... then on the main power then execute the intermediate transfer belt xxDA For INIT control service mode INISET at time of initial setup the variation among the 72 night Sig value samplings is 100 or more The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit The connector has poor contact The stirring of toner is faulty Turn off and then on the main power then execute the intermediate transfer belt xxDB ...

Page 1009: ...orque caused by any of the following the developing rotary HP sensor is faulty the wiring of the DC controller PCB is faulty there is an excessive load on the developing assembly Turn off and then on the main power Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E023 The developing motor M23 does not rotate normally 0001 After motor start up a lock state is not detected for 1 sec or more Turn o...

Page 1010: ...t up a lock state is not detected for 1 sec or more The mechanical load such as on the feeding system is excessive Turn off and then on the main power Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E051 The horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific period of time The horizontal registration position is faulty 0003 0001 The horizontal registration home position is ...

Page 1011: ...B 1 1 speed XX 00 no distinction 00XX The home position of the intermediate transfer belt is not detected within a specific period of time 4 sec The ITB HP sensor is faulty Turn off the main power and check the DC controller PCB and the ITB HP sensor then turn on the main power 01XX The period of time between when the home position of the intermediate transfer belt is detected and the next home po...

Page 1012: ...ection Remarks E078 The home position of the transfer belt cleaner unit engagement is not detected 0001 The HP sensor does not go on within 5 sec after the start of a HP search Turn off and then on the main power Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E079 The home position of the outside heating roller engagement is not detected The outside heating roller engagement home position sens...

Page 1013: ...marks E110 There is a scanner motor error 0001 The FG signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the polygon scanner has been driven Turn off the main power and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse then turn on the main power 0002 The FG signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the polygon scanner has been driven the interval from when the mot...

Page 1014: ...s no signal indicating the start of 24V in the fixing assembly in the communication between the DC controller and the fixing feeding unit Turn off the main power and check the DC controller PCB wiring and the 24V system fuse then turn on the main power Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E202 There is an HP error 0001 An error is found during the forward trip of the HP search The sc...

Page 1015: ...off Check the power supply harness connector for connection then as necessary replace the power supply Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E240 There is a DDI P communication error 0000 There is a DDI P communication error error in communication between master and slave 0 Turn off the main power and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse then turn on the m...

Page 1016: ...um error Disconnect and connect the harness connector then replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller 0002 There is a reception status error Disconnect and connect the harness connector then replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller 0003 There is a reception interrupt error Disconnect and connect the harness connector then replace the reader controller PCB or the A...

Page 1017: ...tected in terms of the number of errors or the duration of the error in the communication between copier and finisher Turn off the main power and check the DC controller wiring of the finisher PCB and 24V system fuse then turn on the main power Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E503 There is an error in the communication within the finisher finisher R1 R2 0002 finisher to saddle u...

Page 1018: ...emarks E514 There is an error in the trailing edge assist motor finisher R1 R2 8001 The home position sensor does not go off when the trailing edge assist motor has been rotated for a specific period of time 1 Check the trailing edge assist home position sensor Is the sensor normal 2 Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the trailing edge assist motor Is the wiring normal 3 Chec...

Page 1019: ...change mechanism Is there a fault 4 Try replacing the gear change motor Is the problem corrected Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E530 There is an error in front alignment finisher R1 R2 8001 Th alignment motor has started to rotate e home position sensor does not go off within a specific period of time after the front 1 Check the pre aligning plate home position sensor Is the se...

Page 1020: ...emarks E532 There is an error in the shift mechanism of the stapler finisher R1 R2 8001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific period of time after the stapler shift motor has started to rotate 1 Check the stapler shift home position sensor Is the sensor normal 2 Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler shift motor Is the wiring normal 3 Check the pa...

Page 1021: ...wing home position sensor Is the sensor normal 2 Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor Is the wiring normal 3 Check the swing mechanism Is there a fault 4 Try replacing the swing motor Is the problem corrected Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E537 rear alignment error Finisher R1 R2 8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the sw...

Page 1022: ...motor Is the wiring normal 3 Is there a fault in the ascent descent mechanism of the tray 4 Try replacing the No 1 tray shift motor Is the problem corrected Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E542 lower tray ascent descent error Finisher R1 R2 8001 lower tray ascent descent motor clock error 1 Check the No 2 tray sensors 1 through 3 Are the sensors normal 2 Check the wiring between...

Page 1023: ...e wiring normal 3 Is there a fault in the shutter mechanism 4 Try replacing the stack edging motor or the shutter open close clutch Is the problem corrected 0003 hazardous area 1 Check the shutter home position sensor Is the sensor normal 2 Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stack edging motor and between the finisher controller PCB and the shutter open close clutch Is th...

Page 1024: ...tal registration sensor 1 Turn off and then on the main power 8004 There is an error in the light receiving voltage without emission of light horizontal registration sensor 1 Turn off and then on the main power 8005 There is an error in the light receiving voltage with emission of light horizontal registration sensor 2 Turn off and then on the main power 8006 There is an error in the light receivi...

Page 1025: ... positioning plate home position sensor PI7S is faulty Check the paper positioning plate motor M4S paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7S 0002 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not go off when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1 sec The paper positioning plate motor M4S or the paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7S is faulty Check the p...

Page 1026: ...ere is an error in saddle alignment 0001 The aligning plate home position sensors does not go on when the alignment motor has been driven for 05 sec during initialization 1 67 sec Check the alignment motor M5S aligning plate home position sensor PI5S 0002 The alignment plate home position sensor does not go off when the alignment motor has been driven for 1 sec Check the alignment motor M5S aligni...

Page 1027: ...e paper pushing plate motor M8S or the paper pushing plate home position sensor PI4 is faulty 8002 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not go off when paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec or more The paper pushing plate motor M8S or the paper pushing plate home position sensor PI4S is faulty 8003 The number of detection pulses of the paper pushing plate motor clock s...

Page 1028: ...ing closed the inlet cover switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing inlet cover sensor PI9S front cover open closed sensor PI2S delivery cover sensor PI3S Or the front cover switch MS2S or the delivery cover switch MS3S is open Check the inlet cover switch MS1S front cover switch MS2S delivery cover switch ...

Page 1029: ...00 HDD full 01 The machine cannot recognize the HDD The machine cannot find BOOTDEV at time of start up Remedy Turn off the main power and check the connection of the 2 cables from the HDD power SIDE then turn on the main power At that time check to see if the HDD rotates and power is supplied 02 The machine cannot find the system software or the main controller main PCB in BOOTDEV Remedy 03 The m...

Page 1030: ... mode data using the remote UI if xxyy 0801 0802 Remedy if xxyy FF01 FF02 Remedy 03 There is an HDD contact fault or an opening system error Remedy Turn off the main power and check the connection of the 2 cables power IDE from the HDD then turn on the main power At that time check to see if the HDD is rotating and power is supplied 11 21 There is an HDD contact faulty Remedy Turn off the main pow...

Page 1031: ...ER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD 2 Execute DOSDEV4 using the Service Support Tool 3 When the execution is over turn off and then on the main power D 1 Replace the main controller main board 2 Move the image memory SDRAM and the boot ROM from the old board to the new board E 1 Start up the machine in safe mode i e by turning on the main power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys 2 Execute HDD formatting ALL ...

Page 1032: ...o E I 1 By referring to Formatting the HDD enter the appropriate CHK TYPE in the following COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM 2 Make the following selections and press the OK key 3 When the execution is over turn off and then on the main power J 1 Enter 4 to the following COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 2 Make the following selections and press the OK key COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CHECK 1 to 5 min 3 When the ...

Page 1033: ...e 0008 The HDD does not increase to a specific temperature level within a specific time when the power is turned on Replace the HDD 0009 The HDD does not increase to a specific temperature level in relation to a sleep state Turn off and then on the power If the return operation fails replace the HDD Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E674 There is an error in the fax board 0001 The...

Page 1034: ...tion with the printer after the external controller has started up normally Turn off the main power and check the cable then turn on the main power If the machine fails to start up re install the system software of the external controller Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E710 There is an error in IPC initialization 0001 The machine fails to become ready within 3 sec after the IPC...

Page 1035: ...munication error is not reset Check the cable and reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E719 There is an error in the communication with the coin vendor card reader 0001 The coin vendor that is connected before the power is turned off is not recognized when the paper is turned on Check the cable and reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION ...

Page 1036: ... on the main power If the machine fails to reset replace the external controller open I F PCB or the main controller PCB 9005 There is an error it the connection of the video cable connected to the external controller Turn off the main power and check the open I F board and the cable then turn on the main power If the machine fails to reset replace the eternal controller open I F PCB or main contr...

Page 1037: ...n of the UFR board then turn on the main power If the machine fails to ret replace the UFR board or the main control PCB 3015 While a job is being processed there is no video data in the chip of the main controller PCB main although the software is operating without a problem Turn off and then on the main power If the machine fails to start up replace the main controller PCB Code Detail Cause Part...

Page 1038: ...C control PCB and the main controller PCB and check the power supply of the printer then turn on the main power Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E740 There is an Ethernet board error 0002 At time of start up the MAC address is found to be illegal A non Canon MAC address is detected Turn off the main power and replace the NIC then turn on the main power Code Detail Cause Particula...

Page 1039: ... main power and replace the boot ROM with one of the correct type then turn on the main power 3000 There is a mismatch in respect of the version of the boot ROM module The installed boot ROM dose not permit normal start up operation Upgrade the boot ROM or replace it Code Details Description Remedy E745 TokenRing board error 0001 When initializing the TokeRing driver the machine failed to initiali...

Page 1040: ...h reference to the engine ID Replace it with a scanner board of the correct type Code Detail Remedy E747 image processing ASIC or memory control communication control ASIC error 2029 1 turn off and then on the main power 2 replace the SDRAM 3 replace the main controller PCB 2028 2027 2026 1 turn off and then on the main power 2 replace the SDRAM 3 replace the main controller PCB 2121 2120 2119 1 t...

Page 1041: ...3 replace the main controller PCB 8706 8702 8701 1 turn off and then on the main power 2 replace the SDRAM 3 replace the main controller PCB 0919 8406 8402 1 turn off and then on the main power 2 replace the SDRAM 3 replace the main controller PCB 8401 PIU 0231 PRCPIU 0331 1 turn off and then on the main power 2 replace the SDRAM 3 replace the main controller PCB PIU 0230 PRCPIU 0330 1 turn off an...

Page 1042: ...9 SCCPOU 0629 SFCPOU 0829 1 turn off and then on the main power 2 replace the SDRAM 3 replace the main controller PCB POU 0528 SCCPOU 0628 SFCPOU 0828 1 turn off and then on the main power 2 replace the SDRAM 3 replace the main controller PCB POU 0527 SCCPOU 0627 SFCPOU 0827 1 turn off and then on the main power 2 replace the SDRAM 3 replace the main controller PCB POU 0526 SCCPOU 0626 SFCPOU 0826...

Page 1043: ...etection Remarks E804 There is any of the various types of fan errors 0004 There is an error in the controller cooling fan Turn off the main switch and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse then turn on the main switch 0007 There is an error in the power supply cooling fan Turn off the main switch and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse then turn on the ...

Page 1044: ...ystem fuse then turn on the main switch Code Detail Cause Particulars of detection Remarks E824 There is an error in the primary charging suction primary charging exhaust fan 0000 There is an error in the primary charging suction mechanism Turn off the main power and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse then turn on the main switch 0001 There is an error in the primary exhaust fan T...

Page 1045: ...ft deck pickup sensor PS40 does not detect stationary jam xx03 cassette 3 pickup sensor PS48 does not detect stationary jam xx04 cassette 4 pickup sensor PS54 does not detect stationary jam xx05 vertical path 4 sensor PS63 xx06 vertical path 3 sensor PS62 xx07 vertical path 2 sensor PS61 xx08 vertical path 1 sensor PS60 xx09 vertical path confluence sensor PS32 xx10 vertical path 0 sensor PS31 xx0...

Page 1046: ...xing inlet sensor PS11 detects residual jam only xx16 left deck stationary sensor PS47 detects residual jam only 0D91 transparency sensor front rear PS3 PS29 other than in transparency mode 0D91 registration sensor PS9 in transparency mode 0D92 plain paper detected by transparency sensor when transparency is selected as medium PS3 PS29 0D93 transparency detected by transparency sensor when a mediu...

Page 1047: ...nch registration sensor feed stationary jam LED5 PTR5 1104 delivery path sensor feed stationary jam P14 1200 timing jam P13 1500 stapler staple jam STP 1300 power on jam P13 P14 1400 door open jam DOOR 1644 punch jam LED5 PTR5 1645 punch power on jam LED5 PTR5 1791 saddle feed sensor feed delay jam P18S PI19S PI20S 1792 saddle delivery sensor feed delay jam PI11S 1793 saddle inlet sensor feed dela...

Page 1048: ...ed 500 mm if extra length 200 mm from the start of feed following a temporary stop before reading in the course of LTRR LGL identification in mix mode the read sensor detects paper when paper has been fed 514 mm beginning at the advance edging standby position 0007 delivery reversal sensor PI9 at time of switchback the delivery sensor does not detect paper when paper has been fed 50 mm from the st...

Page 1049: ... operation 0093 DF cover open closed sensor PI6 the cover is opened while the machine is in operation waiting for paper 0094 registration sensor separation sensor feed sensor delivery reversal sensor PI1 PI7 PI8 PI9 paper is detected within the path during pickup of the 1st sheet 0095 original placement sensor DF cover open closed sensor ADF open closed sensor 1 PI5 PI6 PS502 there is no paper in ...

Page 1050: ...tential control system 0001 potential control VD alarm 0002 potential control VL alarm 33 fan 0001 delivery cooling fan 1 alarm 0006 developing fan alarm 0010 reader cooing fan alarm 0011 fixing heat discharge fan alarm 0012 primary charging suction fan alarm 0013 primary charging exhaust fan alarm 0014 feed fan 1 alarm 0015 feed fan 2 alarm 50 ADF 0010 original separation alarm 1st original picku...

Page 1051: ...Chapter 15 Service Mode ...

Page 1052: ......

Page 1053: ... 1 8 FAX 15 6 15 2 1 1 9 NIB 15 6 15 2 1 1 10 PS PCL 15 6 15 2 1 1 11 LIPS 15 7 15 2 1 1 12 SDL STCH 15 7 15 2 1 1 13 OP CON 15 7 15 2 1 1 14 MN CON 15 7 15 2 1 1 15 BOOT ROM 15 7 15 2 1 1 16 DIAG DVC 15 7 15 2 1 1 17 RUI 15 7 15 2 1 1 18 PUNCH 15 7 15 2 1 1 19 LANG EN 15 7 15 2 1 1 20 LANG FR 15 7 15 2 1 1 21 LANG DE 15 7 15 2 1 1 22 LANG IT 15 7 15 2 1 1 23 LANG JP 15 7 15 2 1 1 24 GDI UFR 15 8 ...

Page 1054: ...her related 15 15 15 2 1 4 14 Jam Sensor ADF related 15 16 15 2 1 5 ERR 15 18 15 2 1 5 1 Overview 15 18 15 2 1 5 2 No 15 18 15 2 1 5 3 DATE 15 18 15 2 1 5 4 TIME1 15 18 15 2 1 5 5 DATE2 15 18 15 2 1 5 6 CODE 15 18 15 2 1 5 7 DTL 15 18 15 2 1 5 8 L 15 19 15 2 1 5 9 P 15 19 15 2 1 6 HV STS 15 19 15 2 1 6 1 Overview 15 19 15 2 1 6 2 PRI GRID 15 19 15 2 1 6 3 PRE TR 15 19 15 2 1 6 4 BIAS 15 19 15 2 1 ...

Page 1055: ...ION 15 28 15 2 3 1 2 CST STS 15 29 15 2 3 1 3 HV STS 15 29 15 2 3 1 4 CCD 15 29 15 2 3 1 5 DPOT 15 30 15 2 3 1 6 DENS 15 31 15 2 3 1 7 MISC 15 33 15 2 3 1 8 ALARM 1 15 33 15 3 I O I O Display Mode 15 34 15 3 1 Overview 15 34 15 3 2 DC CON 15 35 15 3 3 R CON 15 42 15 3 4 FEEDER 15 45 15 3 5 SORTER 15 47 15 3 6 MN CON 15 58 15 4 ADJUST Adjustment Mode 15 60 15 4 1 COPIER 15 60 15 4 1 1 ADJ XY 15 60 ...

Page 1056: ...5 73 15 4 1 5 2 SGNL Y 15 73 15 4 1 5 3 SGNL M 15 73 15 4 1 5 4 SGNL C 15 73 15 4 1 5 5 REF Y 15 74 15 4 1 5 6 REF M 15 74 15 4 1 5 7 REF C 15 74 15 4 1 5 8 PTOFST Y 15 74 15 4 1 5 9 PTOFST M 15 75 15 4 1 5 10 PTOFST C 15 75 15 4 1 5 11 P SGNL Y 15 75 15 4 1 5 12 P SGNL M 15 75 15 4 1 5 13 P SGNL C 15 76 15 4 1 6 BLANK 15 76 15 4 1 6 1 Overview 15 76 15 4 1 6 2 BLANK T 15 76 15 4 1 6 3 BLANK L 15 ...

Page 1057: ... 85 15 4 1 11 8 1TR OFS2 15 85 15 4 1 12 FEED ADJ 15 86 15 4 1 12 1 Overview 15 86 15 4 1 12 2 REGIST 15 86 15 4 1 12 3 ADJ REFE 15 86 15 4 1 12 4 BLK SML2 15 86 15 4 1 13 CST ADJ 15 87 15 4 1 13 1 Overview 15 87 15 4 1 13 2 MF A4R 15 87 15 4 1 13 3 MF A6R 15 87 15 4 1 13 4 MF A4 15 88 15 4 1 14 MISC 15 88 15 4 1 14 1 Overview 15 88 15 4 1 14 2 SEG ADJ 15 88 15 4 1 14 3 K ADJ 15 88 15 4 1 14 4 ATM...

Page 1058: ...IR 3 15 112 15 5 1 1 16 SPLY H 3 15 112 15 5 1 1 17 AINR OFF 15 113 15 5 1 2 CCD 15 113 15 5 1 2 1 Overview 15 113 15 5 1 2 2 DF WLVL1 2 15 113 15 5 1 3 LASER 15 114 15 5 1 3 1 Overview 15 114 15 5 1 3 2 POWER 15 114 15 5 1 4 DPC 15 114 15 5 1 4 1 Overview 15 114 15 5 1 4 2 DPC 15 114 15 5 1 4 3 OFST 15 114 15 5 1 5 CST 15 115 15 5 1 5 1 Overview 15 115 15 5 1 5 2 MF A4R MF A6R MF A4 15 115 15 5 1...

Page 1059: ... 15 5 1 10 15 W TN CLN 15 130 15 5 1 11 MISC R 15 130 15 5 1 11 1 Overview 15 130 15 5 1 11 2 SCANLAMP 15 130 15 5 1 12 MISC P 15 131 15 5 1 12 1 Overview 15 131 15 5 1 12 2 P PRINT 15 131 15 5 1 12 3 USER PRT 15 131 15 5 1 12 4 LBL PRNT 15 131 15 5 1 12 5 PRE EXP 15 132 15 5 1 12 6 DEV DR Y 15 132 15 5 1 12 7 DEV DR M 15 133 15 5 1 12 8 DEV DR C 15 133 15 5 1 12 9 D PRINT 15 133 15 5 1 12 10 1ATV...

Page 1060: ...6 1 1 BODY 15 146 15 6 1 1 1 Overview 15 146 15 6 1 1 2 PO CNT 15 146 15 6 1 1 3 MODEL SZ 15 146 15 6 1 1 4 FIX TEMP 15 146 15 6 1 1 5 PASCAL 15 147 15 6 1 1 6 CONFIG 15 147 15 6 1 1 7 TEMP TBL 15 147 15 6 1 1 8 W SCNR 15 148 15 6 1 1 9 RUI DSP 15 148 15 6 1 1 10 NW SPEED 15 148 15 6 1 1 11 ADJ LVL 15 148 15 6 1 1 12 INTROT 1 15 149 15 6 1 1 13 INTROT 2 15 149 15 6 1 1 14 AUTO DH 15 149 15 6 1 1 1...

Page 1061: ...171 15 6 1 4 1 Overview 15 171 15 6 1 4 2 COIN 15 171 15 6 1 4 3 DK P 15 171 15 6 1 4 4 CARD SW 15 171 15 6 1 5 INT FACE 15 172 15 6 1 5 1 Overview 15 172 15 6 1 5 2 IMG CONT 15 172 15 6 2 FEEDER 15 174 15 6 2 1 LS DBL 15 174 15 6 2 2 STAMP SW 15 174 15 6 3 SORTER 15 175 15 6 3 1 Overview 15 175 15 6 3 2 BLNK SW 15 175 15 6 3 3 MD SPRTN 15 175 15 6 4 BOARD 15 176 15 6 4 1 Overview 15 176 15 6 4 2 ...

Page 1062: ...L PRT 15 217 15 8 1 1 6 FAX PRT 15 217 15 8 1 1 7 RMT PRT 15 218 15 8 1 1 8 BOX PRT 15 218 15 8 1 1 9 RPT PRT 15 218 15 8 1 1 10 2 SIDE 15 218 15 8 1 1 11 SCAN 15 218 15 8 1 2 PICK UP 15 219 15 8 1 2 1 Outline 15 219 15 8 1 2 2 C1 15 219 15 8 1 2 3 C2 15 219 15 8 1 2 4 C3 15 219 15 8 1 2 5 C4 15 219 15 8 1 2 6 MF 15 219 15 8 1 2 7 DK 15 219 15 8 1 2 8 2 SIDE 15 219 15 8 1 3 FEEDER 15 220 15 8 1 3 ...

Page 1063: ... 15 FX LW TS 15 227 15 8 1 6 16 FX EX TS 15 227 15 8 1 6 17 OZ FIL2 15 227 15 8 1 6 18 TN FIL2 15 227 15 8 1 7 DRBL 1 15 228 15 8 1 7 1 Overview 15 228 15 8 1 7 2 LSR DRV 15 228 15 8 1 7 3 LSR MTR 15 228 15 8 1 7 4 SCN MTR 15 228 15 8 1 7 5 TRD CLN 15 228 15 8 1 7 6 TR BLT 15 229 15 8 1 7 7 TR ROLL 15 229 15 8 1 7 8 2TR ROLL 15 229 15 8 1 7 9 TR STC H 15 229 15 8 1 7 10 1TR STC 15 229 15 8 1 7 11 ...

Page 1064: ...45 DLV UCLW 15 234 15 8 1 7 46 DLV LCLW 15 234 15 8 1 7 47 OZ FIL5 15 234 15 8 1 7 48 TN FIL2 15 234 15 8 1 7 49 TN FIL5 15 234 15 8 1 7 50 FX SPACE 15 234 15 8 1 7 51 ITB SCRP 15 234 15 8 1 8 DRBL 2 15 235 15 8 1 8 1 DF PU RL 15 235 15 8 1 8 2 DF SP PD 15 235 15 8 1 8 3 DF FD RL 15 235 15 8 1 8 4 LNT TAPE 15 235 15 8 1 8 5 DF SP RL 15 235 15 8 1 8 6 LNT TAP1 15 235 15 8 1 8 7 LNT TAP2 15 235 15 8...

Page 1065: ...sponse to faults Level 2 items F 15 1 Initial screen layer 1 Level 1 2 item screen layer 1 Level 3 item screen layer 1 Level 3 item screen layer 1 User screen Initial screen layer 2 Reset key Previous Next page 2 8 Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen Select a Level 2 item Select an item Level 1 2 item screen layer 2 Level 3 item screen layer 2 item Level 3 item screen layer 2 Previous N...

Page 1066: ...erisk key on the control panel 2 Press the 2 and 8 keys of the keypad at the same time 3 Press the asterisk key on the control panel In response to the foregoing key operations the machine will bring up the following Initial screen F 15 3 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD DISPLAY I O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER status indication mode input output indication mode adjustment mode operation inspecti...

Page 1067: ...values are recorded in their respective service labels If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB or if you have initialized the RAM the adjustment values for ADJUST and OPTION will return to their default settings If there has been any change in a service mode item be sure to update its setting indicated on the service label As necessary make use of the space in the s...

Page 1068: ... 6 2nd 3rd Item Screen 0000 9789 F 15 7 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Initial item Touch to select an item VERSION USER ACC STS ANALOG CST STS JAM ERR 2nd item Touch to select an item 3rd item Touch to select an item Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display ...

Page 1069: ... case full NO PAPER paper absent ALERM alarm condition present READY JAM SERVICE WAITING DOOR COPYING ERROR Machine States Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O PREV NEXT OK xxxxx yyyyy aaaaa bbbbb toggles between and key press it to stop the ongoing operation stores input value numerical input range value before change Stop key press to clear an input Clear key press to start copying without le...

Page 1070: ...to check the ROM version of the reader controller PCB 15 2 1 1 4 PANEL 0001 0011 Use it to check the ROM version of the control panel CPU PCB 15 2 1 1 5 ECO 0001 0013 Use it to check the ROM version of the ECO PCB 15 2 1 1 6 FEEDER 0001 0014 Uses it to check the ROM version of the DADF controller PCB 15 2 1 1 7 SORTER 0001 0016 Use it to check the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB 15 2 1 ...

Page 1071: ...del xx yyC LIPS mode xx yyL PS PCL model xx yyN 15 2 1 1 16 DIAG DVC 0001 0033 Use it to check the ROM version of the self diagnosis device 15 2 1 1 17 RUI 0001 0034 Use it to check the remote UI 15 2 1 1 18 PUNCH 0001 1200 Use it to check the version of the punch unit 15 2 1 1 19 LANG EN 0001 0035 Use it to check the version of an English language file 15 2 1 1 20 LANG FR 0001 0037 Use it to chec...

Page 1072: ...cted 2 saddle finisher connected 15 2 1 2 4 DECK 0001 0055 Use it to check the state of connection of a paper deck 0 not connected 1 connected 15 2 1 2 5 CARD 0001 0056 Use it to check the state of connection of a card reader 0 card reader connected but card not inserted 1 card reader not connected or card reader connected and card inserted indicates 1 if ready for copying indicates 0 if not ready...

Page 1073: ...5 2 1 2 11 SEND 0001 0065 Use it to check the presence of the SEND function 0 SEND function absent 1 SEND function present 15 2 1 3 ANALOG 15 2 1 3 1 Overview 0000 9825 Use it to check the measurements taken by analog sensors 15 2 1 3 2 TEMP 0000 9826 Use it to check the machine inside temperature environment sensor in deg C 15 2 1 3 3 HUM 0000 9827 Use it to check the machine inside humidity envi...

Page 1074: ...he temperature of the center of the fixing lower roller unit deg C 15 2 1 3 8 FIX LE 0002 7221 Use it to indicate the temperature of the edge of the fixing lower roller unit deg C 15 2 1 3 9 FIX EXC 0002 7222 Use it to indicate the temperature of the center of the outside heating roller unit deg C 15 2 1 3 10 FIX EXE 0002 7223 Use it to indicate the temperature of the edge of the outside heating r...

Page 1075: ...Chapter 15 15 11 15 2 1 4 JAM 15 2 1 4 1 Overview 0001 0066 Use it to check jam data F 15 10 1 3 4 5 2 6 7 ...

Page 1076: ...No 0001 0069 Indicates the order of occurrence of the jam in question 1 through 50 the higher the number the older the jam 15 2 1 4 3 DATE 0001 0070 Indicates the date of the jam in question 15 2 1 4 4 TIME1 0001 0071 Indicates the time of the jam in question 15 2 1 4 5 TIME2 0001 0072 Indicates the jam recovery time 15 2 1 4 6 L 0001 0073 Indicates the location of the jam in question T 15 1 15 2 ...

Page 1077: ... 15 3 Code Description 1 cassette 1 2 cassette 2 3 cassette 3 4 cassette 4 5 side paper deck 6 manual feed tray 7 duplexing unit Code Type of jam 01xx delay jam 02xx stationary jam 0Axx residnal jam 0B00 door open jam 0B01 door open jam detection by software 0D91 size mismatch paper shorter than specified size 0D92 medium mismatch paper instead of transparency 0D93 medium mismatch transparency ins...

Page 1078: ...cy mode xx0A registration sensor PS9 when the mode is transparency mode xx0B post transfer sensor PS10 does not detect a stationary jam xx0C inside delivery sensor PS12 does not detect a stationary jam xx0D reversal sensor PS14 when in face down delivery mode xx0E outside delivery sensor PS13 xx0F reversal vertical path sensor PS15 xx11 duplex left sensor PS17 xx12 duplex confluence sensor PS18 xx...

Page 1079: ... delivery path sensor feed stationary jam PI34 1200 timing jam PI33 1500 stapler staple jam STP 1300 power on jam PI33 PI34 1400 door open jam DOOR 1644 punch jam LED5 PTR5 1645 punch power on jam LED5 PTR5 1791 saddle feed sensor feed delay jam PI18 PI19 PI20 1792 saddle delivery sensor feed delay jam PI11 1793 saddle inlet sensor feed delay jam PI22 17A1 saddle feed sensor feed stationary jam PI...

Page 1080: ... from the point of No 2 registration 0006 feed sensor PI8 the read sensor detects paper when a feed of 500 mm if extra length 200 mm has been made from the start of feed after a temporary stop at point of reading the read sensor detects paper when a feed of 514 mm has been made after the start of feed from the standby point in mix mode LTRR LGL identified 0007 delivery reversal sensor PI9 if not i...

Page 1081: ...s opened during operation while a drive mechanism is in operation 0093 DF cover pen closed sensor PI6 A cover is opened during operation in wait for paper 0094 registration sensor separation sensor feed sensor delivery reversal sensor PI1 PI7 PI8 PI9 Paper is detected in the path while the 1st sheet is being picked up 0095 original placement sensor DF cover open closed sensor ADF open closed senso...

Page 1082: ...gher the number the older the error 15 2 1 5 3 DATE 0001 0093 Indicates the date of the error in question 15 2 1 5 4 TIME1 0001 0094 Indicates the time of the error in question 15 2 1 5 5 DATE2 0001 9893 Indicates the error return time 15 2 1 5 6 CODE 0001 0095 Indicates the cover of the error in question 15 2 1 5 7 DTL 0001 0096 Indicates the detail code of the error in question if not 0000 ...

Page 1083: ...ge of primary charging assembly unit V Use it to indicate the level of current of the primary grid bias unit A 15 2 1 6 3 PRE TR 0002 7252 Use it to indicate the level of current of pre transfer charging unit micro A 15 2 1 6 4 BIAS 0002 7254 Use it to indicate the developing bias DC level unit V Location Classification 0 main controller 1 DADF 2 finisher 3 not used 4 reader unit 5 printer unit 6 ...

Page 1084: ...nit V 15 2 1 7 4 1TR DC4K 0004 9499 Use it to indicate the primary transfer DC Bk by 4C unit V 400 to 3000 V 15 2 1 8 DENS 15 2 1 8 1 Overview 0000 9819 Use it to check the concentration of developer inside the developing assembly 15 2 1 8 2 DENS Y 0000 9794 T 15 8 Use it to check the computed value of the density Y of the patch formed on the photosensitive drum indicates the discrepancy from the ...

Page 1085: ...ty C of the patch formed on the photosensitive drum indicates the discrepancy from the target value in Reference The value is updated when the machine executes toner supply operation after the main power switch is turned on Optimum 25 to 25 Use it to check the density standard Y M C of the developer on the developing cylinder Reference The value is updated when the machine executes toner supply op...

Page 1086: ...f shipment upon RAM initialization 2 15 2 1 10 ALARM 1 15 2 1 10 1 Overview 0001 7421 Use it to check the image ratio of the images formed using individual colors 15 2 1 10 2 IMG DT Y 0001 7422 Use it to check the average of the image ratios of the images formed using yellow 15 2 1 10 3 IMG DT M 0001 7423 Use it to check the average of the image ratios of the images formed using magenta 15 2 1 10 ...

Page 1087: ...date of the alarm in question TIME1 indicates the time of the alarm in question TIME2 indicates the alarm recovery time CODE indicates the code of the location at which the alarm in question occurred See the table on next page indicates the code of the alarm in question See the table on next page DTL Indicates the detail code of the alarm in question See the table on next page CNTR indicates the t...

Page 1088: ...d 0001 0002 0003 0004 0008 cassette 1 lifter error cassette 2 lifter error cassette 3 lifter error cassette 4 lifter error optional deck lifter error 33 fan 0011 fixing heat discharge fan 50 ADF 0010 indicates that the original separation alarm condition has occurred 3 times in sequence i e faulty pickup of the 1st original 61 finisher 0001 staple absent 62 saddle stitcher 0001 stitch staple absen...

Page 1089: ...ollected from the monitor output of the fixing thermistor main and the environment sensor Remarks The intervals of data collection may be set in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY ENVP IN F 15 13 T 15 15 Item Description No number of a data piece higher the number older the data piece DATE date of data collection TIME time of data collection D deg C machine inside temperature E machine inside humidit...

Page 1090: ...inal detected by the ADF Reference Indicates the detection in terms of paper size e g A4 LTR Use it to indicate the manual adjustment value light emission voltage of the post separation sensor Optimum range 179 or less Use it to indicate the manual adjustment value light reception voltage of the post separation sensor Optimum range paper present 154 or less paper absent 179 or more Use it to indic...

Page 1091: ... voltage of the read sensor Optimum range paper present 154 or less paper absent 179 or more Use it to indicate the manual adjustment value light emission voltage of the delivery reversal sensor Optimum range 905 or less Use it to indicate the manual adjustment value light reception voltage of the delivery reversal sensor Optimum range paper present 154 or less paper absent 179 or more ...

Page 1092: ...0001 0132 Use it to check the version of the Korean language file LANG NL 0001 0133 Use it to check the version of the Dutch language file LANG NO 0001 0134 Use it to check the version of the Norwegian language file LANG PL 0001 0135 Use it to check the version of the Polish language file LANG PT 0001 0136 Use it to check the version of the Portuguese language file LANG RU 0001 0138 Use it to chec...

Page 1093: ... of the secondary transfer static eliminator bias standard 0 unit yA PRE TR Y 0005 9884 Indicating the Current Output Level Y for the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly range of readings 650 to 0 PRE TR M 0005 9886 Indicating the Current Output Level M for the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly range of readings 650 to 0 PRE TR C 0005 9887 Indicating the Current Output Level C for the Pre Transfer Chargin...

Page 1094: ...K M 0001 1228 Use it to check the current value of the defogging potential M VBACK C 0001 1229 Use it to check the current value of the defogging potential C VBACK K 0001 1230 Use it to check the current value of the defogging potential K 2TR PPR 0001 0150 Use it to check the output value of the paper separation voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated last 2TR BASE 0001 0152 Use it ...

Page 1095: ...tial Use it to indicate the laser power level for Y used as the VL target potential for potential control range of settings 00 to FF hexadecimal notation LPWR K 0005 7037 Indicatating the K Color Laser Power Level result of potential cotrol used as VL target potential Use it to indicate the laser power level for K used as the VL target potential for potential control range of settings 00 to FF hex...

Page 1096: ...by the ATR sensor M latest 8 measurements DENS C H 0005 8974 Use it to check the history of measurements taken by the ATR sensor C latest 8 measurements DS S Y H 0004 9549 Use it to indicate the history of the results of patch image detection Y latest 8 DS S M H 0005 8962 Use it to indicate the history of the results of patch image detection M latest 8 DS S C H 0005 8963 Use it to indicate the his...

Page 1097: ...on 15 2 3 1 8 ALARM 1 LST DY Y 0004 9559 Use it to indicate the image duty for Y generated most recently range of display 0 to 100 LST DY M 0004 9560 Use it to indicate the image duty for M generated most recently range of display 0 to 100 LST DY C 0004 9561 Use it to indicate the image duty for C generated most recently range of display 0 to 100 ...

Page 1098: ...ed in the field area given on the pages that follow F 15 14 Guide to the Screen F 15 15 Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display DC CON R CON FEEDER SORTER MN CONT Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display P001 P002 P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 DC CON 1 3 READY xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx Bit0 Bit7 Address ...

Page 1099: ...en circuit 0 error 4 outside heating roller thermistor overheating 0 error 5 outside heating roller thermistor open circuit 0 error 6 thermistor related hard latch signal 0 error 7 reserved not used 8 for check 1 blown fuse 9 for check 1 blown fuse 10 DDI general input not used 11 DDI general input not used 12 DDI general input not used 13 DDI power 0 POWER ON 14 not used 15 interlock 24 V detecte...

Page 1100: ...or M3 lock detected 0 lock sync rotation 10 fixing motor M4 lock detected 0 lock sync rotation 11 primary charging suction fan FM1 lock detected 0 lock sync rotation 12 Primary charging assembly exhaust fan FM2 lock detected 0 lock sync rotation 13 Fixing heat exhaust fan FM5 lock detected 0 lock sync rotation 14 power supply motor lock detected 0 lock sync rotation 15 Delivery cooling fan 2 fm10 ...

Page 1101: ...rotary lock lock state solenoid FF 13 Drum HP sensor PS65 check 14 not used not used 15 not used not used P005 0 Cassette 3 paper sensor PS50 1 paper prevent 1 Cassette 3 limit sensor PS49 1 limit state 2 Cassette 3 lifter sensor PS51 L pickup state 3 Cassette 3 paper level sensor A PS52 0 full 4 Cassette 3 paper level sensor B PS53 0 full 5 not used not used 6 not used not used 7 not used not use...

Page 1102: ...not used 14 not used not used 15 not used not used P007 0 upper cassette size detection 0 0 active 1 upper cassette size detection 1 0 active 2 upper cassette size detection 2 0 active 3 upper cassette size detection 3 0 active 4 upper cassette size detection 4 0 active 5 not used 6 fixing web solenoid connection detection 0 connected valid only if solenoid at rest 7 color toner supply clutch conn...

Page 1103: ...ection 3 0 active 12 lower cassette size detection 4 0 active 13 for R D 14 for R D 15 for R D P009 0 waste toner error detection 1 not used 2 Web length sensor PS20 1 web absent 3 for R D 4 for R D 5 for R D 6 Process unit cooling fan FM7 lock detection 1 locked sync rotation 7 motor cooling fan detection not used 8 black toner level sensor TS1 1 toner present 9 Color toner level sensor ps25 1 to...

Page 1104: ...D 1 for R D 2 for R D 3 for R D 4 for R D 5 for R D 6 for R D 7 for R D P014 0 data on transmission to PC 1 data on reception for PC 2 flow control on communication with PC 3 flow control on communication with PC 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P015 0 for R D 1 for R D 2 DDI ready 3 DDI ready 4 ITOP_A sensor 5 ITOP interrupt 6 registration ON interrupt 7 rotary HP interrupt Address bit...

Page 1105: ... R D 7 CLK20 P018 0 LED_ON LED 1 CS3 CS for PIO 0 1 2 CS2 CS for RAM 3 CS1 CS for ASIC 4 CS0 CS for ROM 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P019 0 to 8 not used P020 0 to 8 not used P021 0 to 8 not used P022 0 to 8 not used P023 0 to 8 not used P024 0 to 8 not used P025 0 to 8 not used P026 0 to 8 not used P027 0 to 8 not used P028 0 to 8 not used Address bit Item Remarks ...

Page 1106: ... 1 ON 6 ADF read motor CLK 7 size senor ON 1 ON P002 0 shift motor CLK 1 24V power supply monitor 0 normal 2 not used 3 not used 4 scanner motor CLK 5 13V power supply monitor 0 normal 6 Canon Denshi switch 0 Canon Denshi 7 DDIS IF SCPRDY 0 operation ready P003 0 DDIS serial communication TxD 1 ADF serial communication TxD 2 DDIS serial communication RxD 3 ADF serial communication RxD 4 LED contro...

Page 1107: ...er motor Vref output 7 not used P005 0 PC connection IF TxD 1 PC connecting IF RxD 2 fan lock detection signal 0 enabled 3 DDIS IF SCTS 0 reception ready 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P006 0 not used 1 PCB check terminal 1 normal 2 DDIS IF OPTI1 0 active 3 DDIS IF OPTO1 0 active 4 ADF sensor interrupt input 0 active 5 copyboard open closed sensor interrupt input 0 1 copyboard cover c...

Page 1108: ...008 0 lamp ON signal 1 on 1 CCD drive ON signal 1 on 2 wait signal 0 wait 3 L light signal 0 active 4 H light signal 0 active 5 read signal 0 active 6 ADF serial communication LOAD 0 enabled 7 CPU clock output P009 0 not used 1 shading RAM chip select 0 selected 2 work RAM chip select 0 selected 3 ASIC registration chip select 0 selected 4 ROM chip select 0 selected 5 not used 6 not used 7 not use...

Page 1109: ...rsal motor current setting 1 1 delivery reversal motor current setting 2 2 release motor current setting 1 3 release motor current setting 2 4 stamp solenoid drive 1 ON 5 clutch drive 1 ON 6 original detection LED 1 ON 7 fan motor drive 1 ON P003 0 pickup motor current setting CUT 1 read motor current setting CUT 2 shift motor current setting 3 read motor mode setting 4 read motor current setting ...

Page 1110: ...release HP sensor 1 released 2 delivery reversal sensor 0 paper present 3 post separation sensor 0 paper present 4 LGL sensor 1 paper present 5 A4R LTRR identification sensor 1 AB 6 not used 7 original placement sensor 0 paper present P006 0 to 7 for R D P007 0 to 7 for R D P008 0 to 7 for R D P009 0 to 7 for R D P010 0 to 7 for R D P011 0 to 7 for R D Address bit Indication Remarks ...

Page 1111: ...et feed motor switch 1 0 ON 6 inlet feed stack delivery motor standby signal 1 ON 7 common solenoid ON signal 0 ON P002 STACKER 0 punch feed motor A 1 punch feed motor A 2 punch feed motor B 3 punch feed motor B 4 punch feed motor current switch 0 1 ON 5 punch feed motor current switch 1 1 ON 6 tray 2 motor clock 7 tray 1 motor clock P003 STACKER 0 for R D 1 for R D 2 for R D 3 for R D 4 for R D 5...

Page 1112: ...N signal 1 ON 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P006 STACKER 0 punch connection detection 0 ON 1 not used 2 not used 3 punch motor standby 1 ON 4 inlet sensor IRQ0 1 ON 5 paper trailing edge sensor IRQ1 1 ON 6 punch communication input IRQ2 0 ON 7 not used P007 STACKER 0 tray approach sensor 0 ON 1 tray 2 area sensor 1 0 ON 2 tray 2 area sensor 2 0 ON 3 tray 2 paper sensor 3 0 ON 4 tray ...

Page 1113: ...ray 1 shift motor power supply switch 1 0 ON 4 tray 2 shift motor CW 0 ON 5 tray 2 shift motor enable 1 ON 6 tray 2 shift motor power supply switch 0 0 ON 7 tray 2 shift motor power supply switch 1 0 ON P010 STACKER 0 not used 1 swing shift motor power supply switch 0 0 ON 2 swing shift motor phase A pulse output 3 swing motor phase B pulse output 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P011 S...

Page 1114: ...r 1 ON 3 handling tray paper sensor 1 ON 4 trailing edge assist HP sensor 1 ON 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P014 STACKER 0 rear alignment motor phase A 2 rear alignment motor phase B 3 rear alignment motor current switch 0 0 ON 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P015 STACKER 0 front alignment phase A 1 front alignment phase B 2 front alignment motor current swing 0 0 ON 3 not used 4 n...

Page 1115: ...t used 1 24V power supply monitor signal 0 normal 2 scanner motor drive signal 1 forward 0 reverse 3 for R D 4 for R D 5 13V power supply monitor signal 0 normal 6 not used 7 for R D P018 STACKER 0 for R D 1 for R D 2 for R D 3 for R D 4 LED control signal 1 ON 5 for R D 6 for R D 7 for R D P019 STACKER 0 not used 1 not used 2 original size detention 2 0 original present 3 not used 4 not used 5 fo...

Page 1116: ...ensor interrupt input 1 HP 7 copyboard open closed sensor interrupt input 1 1 cover open P022 STACKER 0 for R D 1 for R D 2 for R D 3 for R D 4 scanner motor driver power save 0 ON 5 ADF pickup motor clock interrupt input 0 1 alternating 6 ADF pickup motor clock interrupt input 0 1 alternating 7 not used P023 STACKER 0 lamp ON signal 1 ON 1 CIS drive ON signal 1 ON 2 for R D 3 for R D 4 for R D 5 ...

Page 1117: ...0 not used 1 not used 2 not used 3 not used 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P026 SADDLE 0 not used 1 not used 2 not used 3 not used 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used P027 SADDLE 0 not used 1 not used 2 not used 3 not used 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used Address Controller Bit Indication Remarks ...

Page 1118: ...t used 2 not used 3 not used 4 not used 5 not used 6 not used 7 not used Address Controller Bit Indication Remarks P031 SADDLE 0 saddle tray paper sensor 0 ON 1 paper positioning area paper sensor 0 ON 2 crescent roller HP sensor 0 ON 3 saddle delivery path sensor 0 ON 4 saddle path upstream sensor 1 ON 5 saddle path middle sensor 1 ON 6 saddle path downstream sensor 1 ON 7 saddle path sensor 1 ON...

Page 1119: ...033 SADDLE 0 inlet flapper solenoid 1 ON 1 saddle path switch flapper 1 1 ON 2 saddle path switch flapper 2 1 ON 3 intermediate feed solenoid 1 ON 4 5 6 inlet path sensor 1 ON 7 P034 SADDLE 0 rear staple motor normal direction 0 ON 1 rear staple motor reverse direction 0 ON 2 front staple motor normal direction 0 ON 3 4 folding roller HP connector open detection 0 ON 5 6 7 P035 SADDLE 0 DIPSW_1 0 ...

Page 1120: ...ON 1 LED1 1 ON 2 LED2 1 ON 3 LED3 1 ON 4 LEDY 0 ON 5 TRAY_MTR_CUR 0 ON 6 TRAY_MTR_B 0 ON 7 TRAY_MTR_A 0 ON P038 PUNCHER 0 DIPSW1 0 ON 1 DIPSW2 0 ON 2 DIPSW3 0 ON 3 4 PCH OUT 5 trailing edge sensor 1 ON 6 punch encoder clock 7 punch HP sensor 0 ON P039 PUNCHER 0 for R D 1 for R D 2 for R D 3 4 5 6 7 Address Controller Bit Indication Remarks ...

Page 1121: ...N 6 punch motor CCW 0 ON 7 punch motor CW 0 ON P041 PUNCHER 0 1 2 3 4 DIPSW4 0 ON 5 horizontal registration motor CUR 0 ON 6 for R D 7 P042 PUNCHER 0 LED1 0 ON 1 for R D 2 for R D 3 LED2 0 ON 4 front cover sensor 0 ON 5 for R D 6 PUSHSW2 0 ON 7 PUSHSW1 0 ON P043 PUNCHER 0 1 2 3 4 5 upper cover sensor 0 ON 6 7 Address Controller Bit Indication Remarks ...

Page 1122: ... 15 not used P003 0 IP TEST 0 normal 1 Test 1 Sync_Mask 0 Mask 1 normal 2 SRAM Mask 0 permit 1 prohibit 3 SUB Clock stop 0 stop 1 run 4 PCI PDL HDD soft reset 0 Reset 1 Normal 5 serial EEPROM CS 6 serial EEPROM SCK 7 serial EEPROM DIN 0 IPC 1 Gchip Serial 8 coin robot serial select 0 Normal 1 Livewake 9 DDI live wake 0 off 1 on 10 pickup count for coin robot assist 11 delivery count for coin robot...

Page 1123: ... F setting Model 1 11 not used 12 not used 13 not used 14 open I F board detection 0 present 1 absent 15 open I F board control CARD 0 ready 1 not ready P007 1 to 15 for R D 16 FAX OPTION 0 connected 1 not connected 17 to 23 for R D P008 0 to 2 not used 3 PSCNST printer drive signal 4 Printer Power Ready 0 Ready 1 not ready 5 to 7 not used 8 SPRTST signal printer start up signal 9 not used P009 0 ...

Page 1124: ...ting if an area outside the original is copied increase the setting an increase by 1 of the setting will move the image read start position by 0 1 mm in the direction of the training edge i e the image read area moves toward the trailing edge if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of ad...

Page 1125: ...at time of shipment factory measurement after RAM initialization 90 Attention1 If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label Use it to enter an adjustment value for the point of measurement for scanner shading Method of adjustment a decrease by 1 of the setting will move the point of measurement for shading by 0 1 mm in the direction of the leading edge if ...

Page 1126: ...ent factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 53 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label Use it to adjust the CCD read position for DF stream reading mode Method of adjustment an increase by 1 will move the image read position to the left by 1 mm if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader contr...

Page 1127: ...board glass See the figure below Range of adjustment 1 to 9999 at time of shipment factory measurement after RAM initialization W PLT X 8271 W PLT Y 8735 W PLT Z 9418 Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between R and G associated with the CCD unit Method of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter...

Page 1128: ...of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjustment 9 to 9 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label Use it to correct color displacement in sub ...

Page 1129: ...k mode at 50 reading Method of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjustment 256 to 256 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label Use it to in...

Page 1130: ...for ADF mode at 50 reading Method of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjustment 256 to 256 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label Use it...

Page 1131: ...e initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjustment 256 to 256 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label Use it to enter the shading target red for the DF normal origina...

Page 1132: ...t factory measurement after RAM initialization 1189 Attention If you have changed the setting be sure to record the new setting on the service label Use it to enter the shading target BLUE for the DF normal original read position Method of adjustmen Use this mode item to enter the factory measurement if an image fault occurs e g caused by soiling of the chart after executing COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF...

Page 1133: ... of adjustment 1600 to 600 at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the laser output max Method of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjustment 0 to 255 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Refe...

Page 1134: ...djustment 10 to 10 unit pixel at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only and must NOT be used in the field Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for K Method of adjustment a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge if you have initialized the RAM on t...

Page 1135: ...f shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only and must NOT be used in the field Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for K 2nd side in 2 sheet placement Method of adjustment a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge if you have initialized the RAM on the DC con...

Page 1136: ...nt factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only and must NOT be used in the field Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for M 2nd side in 2 sheet placement Method of adjustment a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller ...

Page 1137: ... to 800 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 512 Use it to enter the toner density signal initial value M Method of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjustment 200 to 800 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 512 Use it to enter the toner density signal initial ...

Page 1138: ...ntroller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjustment 462 to 562 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 512 Use it to enter the toner density signal reference value C Method of adjustment if you initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjus...

Page 1139: ...roller or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label Range of adjustment 48 to 48 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the density of toner on the intermediate transfer belt for INIT execution Y Method of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the...

Page 1140: ...ipment upon RAM initialization 500 Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non image width leading edge Method of adjustment Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or if you have replaced the SRAM PCB Range of adjustment 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement after RAM initialization 94 Use it to enter the adjustmen...

Page 1141: ...dge Method of adjustment Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or if you have replaced the SRAM PCB Range of adjustment 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement after RAM initialization 47 Use it to set the leading edge margin for the right deck Method of adjustment The value herein will be used to affect the value of BLA...

Page 1142: ...ment value upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the leading edge margin for the right deck Method of adjustment The value herein will be used to affect the value of BLANK T Range of adjustment 35 to 35 unit 0 1 mm at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the leading edge margin for the optional deck Method of adjustment The value herein will be used ...

Page 1143: ... it to apply an offset value on the text print read signal yellow for PASCAL control executed at time of auto gradation correction full correction Method of adjustment A higher value darkens the image after auto gradation correction full correction Range of adjustment 128 to 128 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to apply an offset value on the text print read signal magenta for...

Page 1144: ...correction Range of adjustment 128 to 128 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to apply an offset value on the test print read signal black for PASCAL control executed at time of auto gradation correction full correction Method of adjustment A higher value darkens the image after auto gradation correction full correction Range of adjustment 128 to 128 at time of shipment after RAM...

Page 1145: ...or balance used in user mode cyan Method of adjustment a higher value darkens the image a lower value lightens the image Range of adjustment 8 to 8 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the color balance of the user black Method of adjustment a higher value darkens the image a lower value lightens the image Range of adjustment 8 to 8 at time of shipment after RAM initiali...

Page 1146: ...adjustment 32 to 32 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the color balance and the light area density cyan Method of adjustment A lower value decreases fogging Range of adjustment 32 to 32 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the color balance and the light area density black Method of adjustment A lower value decreases fogging Range of adjustm...

Page 1147: ...o Conditions 15 4 1 11 2 PRE TR 0002 8488 T 15 95 Use it to adjust the primary charging current Range of adjustment 0 to 1400 unit yA at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 1099 Use it to adjust the primary charging assembly grid bias Range of adjustment 0 to 752 unit V at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 752 Use it to adjust the curre...

Page 1148: ... current measurement Method of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the high voltage PCB enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB Range of adjustment 1000 to 0 at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 442 Reference This i...

Page 1149: ...he transfer high voltage PCB 2 slope Method of adjustment if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the high voltage PCB enter the value indicated on the label Range of adjustment 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 492 Use it to correct th...

Page 1150: ...B Range of adjustment 50 to 50 unit 0 1 mm at time of shipment factory adjustment value after RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the horizontal adjustment for duplexing for factory use Method of adjustment an increase of 1 will move the image on the 2nd side to move toward the rear by 0 1 mm Range of adjustment 100 to 100 at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 0 Us...

Page 1151: ...e registering a value newly be sure to execute the following in service mode FUNCTION CST Range of adjustment 0 to 255 at time of shipment factory adjustment value after RAM initialization 125 Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray A6R Method of adjustment Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or if you...

Page 1152: ... in service mode FUNCTION CST Range of adjustment 0 to 255 at time of shipment factory adjustment value after RAM initialization 42 Use it to adjust the separation level used between text and photo in text photo map mode Method of adjustment If you want the machine to identify an original to be a photo original increase the setting If you want the machine to identify an original to be a text origi...

Page 1153: ...he machine to identify an original as a colored original decrease the setting Range of adjustment 3 to 3 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to set a threshold value referred to when issuing an error message in response to a waste toner box full condition An error cover E013 will be indicated when a specific number of prints have been printed after the value indicated in WT FL LV...

Page 1154: ...of prints 0 80000 image 1 140000 image 2 210000 image 3 320000 image 4 460000 image estimates at a color ratio of 10 and image duty of 5 varies depending on the color ratio image duty at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 2 Adjusting the Original Image Leading Edge Method of adjustment A higher setting will delay the image leading edge timing Range of adjustment 50 t...

Page 1155: ... of shipment upon RAM initialization 512 Use it to set the laser power for when potential control is off Y M C Method of adjustment set the laser power for Y M C with potential control off Range of adjustment 0 to 255 at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 112 Use it to set the laser power for when potential control is off feed speed at 1 3 Method of adjustment set th...

Page 1156: ... RAM initialization 0 If possible do not use it as long as machine operation is normal LLMT PTM 0005 6853 Use it to set a lower limit to path target density correction M range of adjustment 20 to 20 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 If possible do not use it as long as machine operation is normal LLMT PTC 0005 6850 Use it to set a lower limit to patch target density correction C range ...

Page 1157: ... the Y toner while in ATR control range of settings 108 to 108 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 P TG M 0005 6846 Use it to set an offset value for ATR control target value M Method of Adjustment Set an offset value for the target value of the Y toner density while in ATR control range of settings 108 to 108 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 P TG C 0005 6845 Use it to set a...

Page 1158: ...normal Use it to adjust the target contrast potential cyan Method of adjustment A higher setting causes the images to be darker Range of adjustment 50 to 50 unit 10 V at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Attention Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal Use it to adjust the target contrast potential K Method of adjustment a higher setting will make the image darker R...

Page 1159: ...Use it to adjust the potential M used to remove fogging Method of adjustment a higher setting will serve to reduce fogging Range of adjustment Y M C 30 to 30 unit 5V at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Attention if possible do not use it as long as machine operation is normal Use it to adjust the potential C used to remove fogging Method of adjustment a higher setting will serve to reduc...

Page 1160: ...ime of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Avoid its use if the operation is normal MD OFS Y 0001 1686 Use it to adjust heat color balance for the medium density range yellow range of adjustment 8 to 8 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal MD OFS M 0001 1688 Use it to adjust the color balance for the medium density range magenta...

Page 1161: ...the high density range cyan range of adjustment 8 to 8 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal HD OFS K 0001 1698 Use it to adjust the color balance for the high density range black range of adjustment 8 to 8 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Avoid its use as much as possible if the operation is normal 15 4 4 1 5 HV P...

Page 1162: ...ialization 498 Note This item is for use at the factory and must NOT be used in the field Use it to adjust the parameter settings for primary charging bias laser power at feed speed 1 3 Method of adjustment adjust the parameter setting for the primary charging bias laser power for when 1 3 feed speed is used Range of adjustment 0 to 100 in increments of 1 at time of shipment upon RAM initializatio...

Page 1163: ...hen the machine s operation mode matches the particulars of the settings of TR ENV TR PAPER TR CLR and TR DUP the secondary ATVC voltage will be offset according to the setting made using this service mode item Settings 10 to 10 unit 100V at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Reference The following 6 items make up a single set of items 2TR TGT 2TR SHR TR PAPER TR ENV TR CLR TR DUP Use it ...

Page 1164: ...ke color mode settings for secondary transfer ATVC 1 Bk mode 2 C mode Reference The following 6 items are grouped as a single set 2TR TGT 2TR SHR TR PPR TR ENV TR CLR TR DUP Use it to make simplex duplex pickup mode settings for secondary transfer ATVC 1 single sided 2 auto double sided 3 manual double sided Reference The following 6 items are grouped as a single set 2TR TGT 2TR SHR TR PPR TR ENV ...

Page 1165: ...transfer ATVC target current offset value C Range of adjustment 10 to 10 unit 0 5 yA at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value Bk mono Range of adjustment 10 to 10 unit 0 5 yA at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target cur...

Page 1166: ...se it to set the primary transfer static eliminator bias check the bias level using DISPLAY HV STS 2EL then set the appropriate bias level Range of adjustment 4000 to 0 unit V at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the offset value normal speed for the primary sheet to sheet target current Range of adjustment 10 to 10 unit 2 yA at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use...

Page 1167: ...ssembly Range of adjustment range of settings 200 to 200 in increments of 1 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the current Y for the pre transfer charging assembly Set the offset value M for the pre transfer charging assembly Range of adjustment range of settings 200 to 200 in increments of 1 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the current lev...

Page 1168: ... to enable or disable the color Y for the pre transfer charging assembly Settings 0 disable 1 enable at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the current Y of the pre transfer charging assembly turn on or off the switch C of the Y pre transfer charging assembly to enable or disable the color Y for the pre transfer charging assembly Settings 0 disable 1 enable at time of shipm...

Page 1169: ... at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the arching at the registration roller for heavy paper pickup up from the cassette or the deck other than multifeeder arching at the registration roller at 1 3 speed operation Particulars of Adjustment A lower setting arching at the registration roller will serve to limit noise however too low a setting can af...

Page 1170: ...ge of adjustment 2 to 2 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 1 Use it to adjust the count range of chrome pixels for ACS identification for DF stream reading Method of adjustment A higher setting increases the range of identification Range of adjustment 2 to 2 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the pre exposure LED current level for when potential control is off f...

Page 1171: ...63 Use it to set the length of time for pre exposure at time of last rotation Range of Settings Range of Settings 0 forced pre exposure last rotation disabled 1 30 sec 2 1 min 3 1 min 30 sec 4 2 min at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1 ...

Page 1172: ...eloping assembly at time of installation Methot of operation 1 Select the item to highlight and press the OK key the machine starts operation the machine begins a countdown 2 See that OK has appeared indicating that the operation is over Use it to stir the toner inside the developing unit Y Opening Select the item to highlight and press the OK key to start operation Use it to stir the toner inside...

Page 1173: ...o start operation Use it to start initial supply of toner from the toner cartridge M to the toner buffer assembly Opening Select the item to highlight and press the OK key to start operation Use it to start initial supply of toner from the toner cartridge C to the toner buffer assembly Opening Select the item to highlight and press the OK key to start operation Use it to set up a card reader 1 to ...

Page 1174: ...ey function will be recognized Use it to set up the Y color developing assemblies for the first time Method of operatoin 1 Select the item to highlight and press the OK key the machine will start operation the machine will start a countdown 2 See that OK appears indicating that the operation is over note The series of operations needed to initialize the Y M C color developing assembly will be exec...

Page 1175: ...ntrol primary transfer ATVC ITB cleaning secondary transfer power supply idle rotation toner stirring optical ATR initialization patch initialization Use it to set up the C color developing assemblies for the first time Method of operatoin 1 Select the item to highlight and press the OK key the machine will start operation the machine will start a countdown 2 See that OK appears indicating that th...

Page 1176: ... initialize the 3 color YMC developing assemblies will be executed at a time LED intensity correction potential control sensor offset adjustment potential control primary transfer ATVC ITB cleaning secondary transfer powered idle rotation toner stirring optical ATR initialization patch initialization Use it to stir the toner inside the developing assembly Y M C Method of operatoin Select the item ...

Page 1177: ...al multiple rotation 1 disable initial multiple rotation item under DC controller at time of shipment factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the ADF white level Method of operatoin Adjust the ADF white level as follows copyboard scan 1 Place the type of original most often used by the user on the copyboard glass and execute the following service mode item COPIER FUNCTI...

Page 1178: ... the laser for adjustment of the laser power Method of Operation 1 Select the item to highlight 2 Press the OK key To stop press the Stop key Use it to execute potential control Method of Operation Select the item to highlight and press the OK key to execute the operation The operation will stop automatically Use it to adjust the offset value of the potential measurement circuit Method of Operatio...

Page 1179: ...OPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4 RMF A6R MF A4 Method of operation 1 Place A4 paper in the manual feeder and adjust the size guide to A4R width 2 Using this service mode item select MF A4R to highlight and press the OK key so that the value will be stored after auto adjustment 3 Likewise perform steps 1 and 2 to register the basic value for A6R and A4 Use it to clean the intermediate transfer belt The f...

Page 1180: ...ec and will stop automatically Use it to clean the primary charging wire pre transfer charging wire a single round trip Method of Operation Select the item to highlight and press the OK key to start the operation The operation will stop automatically Note The primary charging wire pre transfer charging wire may be cleaned for a signal round trip Normally the wire is cleaned by 5 round trips about ...

Page 1181: ... item used to check the nip width of the fixing roller The nip is adjusted to a high degree of accuracy before the machine is shipped out of the factory and it cannot be adjusted in the field Do not turn the 2 hex bolts 1 found on the delivery side of the fixing assembly If you turned it by mistake be sure to turn it back to its initial position F 15 18 1 ...

Page 1182: ... manual feed tray 3 Select service mode and press the OK key The paper in the manual feed tray will be picked up 4 See that the paper is stopped between the fixing rollers and then is discharged in about 10 sec 5 Check to see if the nip width of the discharged paper is as indicated Standard The difference between a and b must be as follows Note 1 Measure a and b at points 15 to 20 mm from the edge...

Page 1183: ...e operation See that the front face of the touch panel goes on in the following sequence white black red green and blue 2 Press the Stop key to end the operation In the case of the printer model press the Clear key Use it to check the LEDs on the control panel Method of operation 1 Select it and press the OK key to start the operation See that the LEDs go on in sequence 2 Press LED OFF to stop the...

Page 1184: ... KEY CHK once again to end the key input check Key Indication on screen 0 to 9 0 to 9 reset RESET stop STOP user mode USER start START power save STAND BY clear CLEAR ID ID help counter check BILL Use it to adjust the coordinates of the analog touch panel Operation Match the points pressed on the touch panel and their corresponding coordinates on the LCD Execute this service mode whenever you have...

Page 1185: ...tch CL1 2 color toner supply clutch CL2 CL2 3 black development clutch CL3 CL3 8 deck feed clutch CL101 CL101 9 deck pickup clutch CL102 CL102 4 through 7 10 reserved 3 Press the OK key 4 Press CL ON to start checking the operation Use it to start a check on the selected clutch Operation 1 Select the item and press the OK key so that the clutch will repeat going on and off as follows on for 0 5 se...

Page 1186: ...n fan FM1 2 primary charging exhaust fan FM2 3 feed fan 1 FM3 feed fan 3 FM11 4 feed fan 2 FM4 feed fan 4 FM12 5 fixing heat discharge fan FM5 6 delivery cooling fan 1 FM6 7 process unit cooling fan FM7 8 reserved 9 power supply cooling fan FM9 10 delivery cooling fan 2 FM10 4 to 10 reserved 3 Press the OK key 4 Press CL ON to start checking the operation Use it to start a check on the selected fa...

Page 1187: ...on motor M6 7 reserved 8 registration motor M8 9 external delivery motor M9 10 duplexing reversal motor M10 11 duplexing left motor M11 12 duplexing center motor M12 13 duplexing right motor M13 14 right deck pull off motor M14 15 veridical path motor M15 16 reserved 17 right deck pickup motor M17 18 left deck pickup motor M18 19 cassette pickup motor M19 20 secondary transfer outside roller shift...

Page 1188: ...and close the front cover 2 Select the item and press the OK key for 10 sec ON OFF Horizontal Registration Motor 1 Select the item and press the OK key HP search starts end automatically Motors Other than Toner Cartridge Motor Y M C K and Horizontal Motor 1 Select the item and press the OK key for 10 sec ON OFF Use it to start a check on the selected motor Operation 1 Select the item and press the...

Page 1189: ... pickup solenoid SL6 7 deck left pickup solenoid SL7 8 cassette 3 pickup solenoid SL8 9 cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL9 10 developing rotary locking solenoid SL10 11 patch image read sensor shutter solenoid SL1C 12 ATR sensor shutter solenoid SL2C 14 deck feed clutch 15 deck pickup clutch 13 reserved 3 Press the OK key 4 Press SL ON to start checking the operation Use it to start the operation of t...

Page 1190: ... key 2 Turn off and then on the main power supply Use it to reset the RAM on the DC controller PCB Caution The contents of the RAM are removed when the main power switch is turned off and then on once again Method of operation 1 Obtain a printout of the service mode settings by making the following selections COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 2 Select the item and press the OK key 3 Turn off and then...

Page 1191: ...FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 2 Select the item and press the OK key 3 Turn off and then on the main power 4 As necessary enter the data indicated on the printout obtained by P PRINT Use it to reset the jam history Caution The jam history is removed when the OK key is pressed Method of operation 1 Select the item and press the OK key Use it to reset the error history Caution The error history is removed...

Page 1192: ...r readings controlled by the main controller PCB main For the readings that are reset see the description under COUNTER mode Caution The counter readings are removed when the OK key is pressed Method of operation 1 Select the item and press the OK key Use the item to reset the service counter readings controlled by the DC controller PCB COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 SORT COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 FIN STPR COP...

Page 1193: ...er settings Caution The settings are removed when the main power switch is turned off and then on again Method of operation 1 Select the item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power Use it to reset the RAM in the main controller PCB SRAM board Caution The contents of the RAM are removed when the main power switch is turned off and then on once again When this item is executed al...

Page 1194: ... on Method of operation 1 Select the item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power Use it to reset a waste toner box full alert error Overview If you have replaced the waste toner box execute this item to reset the alert error and initialize the counter used for the waste toner box detection mechanism Method of Operation Select the item to highlight and press the OK key to start ...

Page 1195: ... key to generate a printout Reference It takes about 15 sec for the machine to generate a printout Use it to obtain a printout of the user mode settings Method of operation 1 Select the mode 2 Press the OK key to generate a printout Reference It takes about 3 sec for the machine to generate a printout Use it to obtain a printout of the service label Method of operation 1 Place 4 LTR paper in the c...

Page 1196: ...t to move the developing assembly rotary to the point of replacement for the toner cartridge Y Method of operation 1 Select the item 2 Press the OK key so that the developing assembly rotary moves to the point of replacement for the toner cartridge Y Caution The machine is set in such a way that the user will not be able to remove a toner cartridge if it still contains toner The cartridge may be r...

Page 1197: ...r cartridge may be removed regardless of the presence absence of toner inside it Use it to move the developing assembly rotary to the point of replacement for the toner cartridge C Method of operation 1 Select the item 2 Press the OK key so that the developing assembly rotary moves to the point of replacement for the toner cartridge Y Caution The machine is set in such a way that the user will not...

Page 1198: ...midity and fixing temperature middle as colleted from the output of the environment sensor and non contact thermistor Use it to execute idle rotation of the primary transfer roller Reference Use it to force idle rotation of the primary transfer roller while applying a primary transfer bias so as to prevent a fault in primary transfer ATVC otherwise caused by changes in the environment When this se...

Page 1199: ...e indication will be ON when the shift tray is identified as being full otherwise it will be OFF 1 Remove the 3 face covers 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the delivery unit 3 Loosen the screw 1 and temporarily fix the 2 tray full sensors in place farthest from the paper F 15 20 4 On the point of detection of either of the tray full sensors place a stack of paper about 60 mm high F 15 21 ...

Page 1200: ...n place where the indication turns OK F 15 22 Memo If the indication does not change to ON even when the tray full sensor has been brought closest to the paper add a sheet of paper until it does F 15 23 7 Move the stack of paper to the point of detection of the other tray full sensor 8 Perform step 4 once again to adjust the position of the sensor 9 When done press the Stop key 1 ...

Page 1201: ... While connected to a PC the machine will indicate CONNECTED 4 See that that the notation has changed to HOLD to indicate that the communication has ended You may turn off the power while the indication is HOLD Use it to select the number of the partition that you want to check HD CHECK Method of operation 1 Select the item 2 Select the number of the partition you want to check using the keypad 0 ...

Page 1202: ...power while the progress bar is indicated Use it to check and correct the partition you have selected using CHK TYPE Method of operation 1 Select the item 2 Press the OK key 3 See the result 1 OK 2 NG hardware 3 NG software corrected sector switched sector Us it to initialize the partition you have selected using CHK TYPE Caution if you have selected 0 or 4 the selections will be invalid if you ha...

Page 1203: ...just the sensitivity of the individual sensors of the feeder Select the item and press the OK key to start feeder sensor initialization turning the screen indication to ACT The operation will end automatically turning the indication to OK Use it to check the motor and the like of the ADF on its own Operation 1 Press MOTOR CHK to highlight 2 Enter the number of the component using the keypad 3 Pres...

Page 1204: ...peration 1 Press FEED CHK to highlight 2 Enter the number of the component using the keypad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press FEED ON to start checking the operation Feed Mode 0 single sided operation 1 double side operation 2 single sided operation w stamp 3 double sided operation w stamp at time of shipment factory default upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to check the DF clutch on its own Press CL ON t...

Page 1205: ...ce again the indication will not change to STOP Use it to check the DF cooling fan Execute using FAN ON 1 Press FAN CHK to highlight 2 Enter the number of the component using the keypad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press FAN ON to start checking the operation Component Number 0 cooling fan Use it to start the operation of the selected fan Press FAN ON and press the OK key to start the operation of the fan...

Page 1206: ...he selected solenoid Operation The operation varies from model to model 1 Press SL to highlight then press the OK key to start motor operation 2 Press the OK key once again to stop the ongoing operation The operation will stop automatically in 5 sec however the indication will not change to STOP unless the OK key is pressed once again Use it to start motor operation Operation The operation varies ...

Page 1207: ...inst it while it rotates Operation 1 Press ROLL CLN to highlight 2 While the roller is rotating clean it by forcing lint free paper moistened with alcohol against it 3 Press ROLL CLN to highlight and press the OK key to stop the rotation of the roller Use it to check the movement of paper in the ADF on its own Operation 1 Press FEED ON and then press the OK key so that the ADF starts to move paper...

Page 1208: ...ect the item to highlight and press the OK key to start the operation Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value of the toner density signals SGNL REF of 3 colors YMC Method of Operation Select the item to highlight and press the OK key to start the operation Use it to execute the black band sequence Details of Control a sequence of operations will be executed to clean the intermediate ...

Page 1209: ...cute idle rotation of the secondary roller and the intermediate transfer belt to prevent the intermediate belt from turning into a particular shape 1 Select the item to highlight and press the OK key to start the operation ATR EX 0005 6579 Force ATR control Use it to force ATR control if the correction value for ATR control is lost as after E020 field servicing or after replacing the DC controller...

Page 1210: ...h the default magnification display function and the ADF original size detection function Caution The new settings become valid only when the main power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 AB 6R5E 1 INCH 5R4E 2 A 3R3E 3 AB INCH 6R5E Use it to change the plain paper down sequence Note The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 d...

Page 1211: ...ntry language destination and paper size configuration settings Caution The new settings become valid when the main power switch has been turned off and then on Method of operation 1 Select the item whose setting you want to change and press the key 2 See that each press on the key changes the setting 3 When all items are as you want press the OK key 4 Turn off and then on the main power switch Se...

Page 1212: ... display of copier screen on RUI at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to select a data transfer speed for connection to a network for service work Setting 0 Auto 1 100Base TX 2 10Base T at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to select an operation mode for patch detection Of the automatic adjusting sequences used decreasing increasing the frequency of potential cont...

Page 1213: ... RAM initialization 90 Use it to set intervals in terms of the number of sheets for process auto adjustment full at time of initial last rotation executed at specific intervals Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings range of settings 50 to 1000 in terms of A4 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 200 Use it to enable disabl...

Page 1214: ...d of adjustment A higher setting enables the detection of smaller particles of dust Range of adjustment 0 to 255 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 205 Use it to set the intervals at which logs are obtained for the machine inside temperature humidify and fixing temperature COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ENV PRT and COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT Range of Setting 0 to 480 min at time of shipment after RAM...

Page 1215: ...alid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 default margin 1 7 mm leading edge margin median value at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the duration of idle rotation for IDL T color developing assembly YMC otherwise executed first in the morning in a high humidity environment a setting toward will reduce the downtime associated with initial mult...

Page 1216: ...o finisher 1 20 cpm 2 10 cpm at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to change the intervals at which the fixing roller is rotated idly remedy against deformation of the roller The fixing roller is rotated idly for 1 sec once every 30 min default to prevent it from suffering deformation while the machine remains in standby Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power sw...

Page 1217: ...rson When needed the machine issues a message to prompt the work on the User screen and the Service Mode screen Use this mode item to enable disable the message Note The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then back on Settings 0 disable message 1 indicate only in service mode default 2 indicate on both User and Service Mode screens The message will go off ...

Page 1218: ...e disable the indication of the message Web Out on the user screen Settings 0 do not display 1 display at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1 Use it to set the software counter 1 on the user mode screen Setting 101 total 1 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 1 fixed cannot be changed Use it to change the type of software counter 2 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user ...

Page 1219: ... of the user or the dealer Range of setting 0 to 999 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 324 Reference The type of counter may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer Use it to change the type of software counter 5 on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer Range of setting 0 to 999 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Reference The type of c...

Page 1220: ...er than B4 is counted as large size paper COPIER OPTION USER B4_L_CNT copy local copy remote copy copy A local copy remote copy box print print PDL print report print box print print A PDL print report print scan black and white scan color scan T 15 282 000 s remote copy 500 s scan 100 s total copies 600 s box 200 s copies 700 s received prints 300 s prints 800 s report prints 400 s copier prints ...

Page 1221: ... double sided yes 021 remote copy mono color small double sided yes 022 remote copy black and white large double sided yes 023 remote copy black and white small double sided yes no No Description yes 101 total 1 yes 102 total 2 yes 103 total large yes 104 total small yes 105 total full color 1 yes 106 total full color 2 yes 108 total black and white 1 yes 109 total black and white 2 yes 110 total ...

Page 1222: ...206 copy A total 2 yes 207 copy A large yes 208 copy A small yes 209 local copy total 1 yes 210 local copy total 2 yes 211 local copy large yes 212 local copy small yes 213 remote copy total 1 yes 214 remote copy total 2 yes 215 remote copy large yes 216 remote copy small yes 217 copy full color 1 yes 218 copy full color 2 yes 219 copy mono color 1 yes 220 copy mono color 2 yes 221 copy black and ...

Page 1223: ... 1 yes 248 copy A mono color 2 yes 249 copy A black and white 1 yes 250 copy A black and white 2 yes 251 copy A full color large yes 252 copy A full color mall yes 253 copy A mono color large yes 254 copy A mono color small yes 255 copy A black and white large yes 256 copy A black and white small yes 257 copy A full color mono color large yes 258 copy A full color mono color small yes 259 copy A f...

Page 1224: ...o color small yes 287 local copy full color mono color 2 yes 288 local copy full color mono color 1 yes 289 local copy full color large double sided yes 290 local copy full color small double sided yes 291 local copy mono color large double sided yes 292 local copy mono color small double sided yes 293 local copy black and white large double sided yes 294 local copy black and white small doubles s...

Page 1225: ...color large double sided yes 328 print mono color small double sided yes 329 print black and white large double sided yes 330 print black and white small double sided yes 331 PDL print total 1 yes 332 PDL print total 2 yes 333 PDL print large yes 334 PDL print small yes 335 PDL print full color 1 yes 336 PDL print full color 2 yes 339 PDL print black and white 1 yes 340 PDL print black and white 2...

Page 1226: ... 411 copy print large yes 412 copy print small yes 413 copy print 2 yes 414 copy print 1 yes 415 copy print mono color large yes 416 copy print mono color small yes 417 copy print full color large double sided yes 418 copy print full color small double sided yes 419 copy print mono color large double sided yes 420 copy print mono color small double sided yes 421 copy print black and white large do...

Page 1227: ...612 box print full color small yes 613 box print mono to color large yes 614 box print mono color small yes 615 box print black and white large yes 616 box print black and white small yes 617 box print full color moo color large yes 618 box print full color mono color small yes 619 box print full color mono color 2 yes 620 box print full color mono color 1 yes 621 box print full color large double...

Page 1228: ...cale small yes 715 reception print black and white large yes 716 reception print black and white small 717 reception print full color grayscale large 718 reception print full color grayscale small 719 reception print full color grayscale 2 720 reception print full color grayscale 1 721 reception print full color large double sided 722 reception print full color small double sided 723 reception pri...

Page 1229: ...ort print full color grayscale 2 820 report print full color grayscale 1 821 report print full color large double sided 822 report print full color small double sided 823 report print grayscale large double sided 824 report print grayscale small double sided yes 825 report print black and white large double sided yes 826 report print black and white small double sided yes no No Description 901 cop...

Page 1230: ...nsmission scan total 7 color 932 transmission scan total 7 black and white 933 transmission scan total 8 color 934 transmission scan total 8 black and white 935 universal transmission scan total color 936 universal transmission scan total black and white yes 937 box scan color yes 938 box scan black and white yes 939 remote scan color yes 940 remote scan black and white 941 transmission scan fax c...

Page 1231: ...smission scan box black and white Use it to limit the use of a control card for a PDL job setting 0 disable 1 enable at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to set so that soft counters 1 through will count B4 as being of large size or small size Setting 0 small size 1 large size at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to disable the copy job reservation function when t...

Page 1232: ...d local print PDL print 1 count the following for PRINT report printout send local print PDL print at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to enable disable indication of the count button on the Sales Counter Check screen Settings 0 do not indicate 1 indicate at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1 Use it to switch between counter display items counters to use when set to 0 101...

Page 1233: ...at time of shipment after RAM initialization 2 UL at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 EUR at time of shipment after RAM initialization 2 other destination at time of shipment after RAM initialization 2 Use it to set the default color mode for BOX setting 0 ACS 1 full color 2 black and white JPN at time of shipment after RAM initialization 2 UL at time of shipment after RAM initializatio...

Page 1234: ... 0005 6766 T 15 303 15 6 1 3 3 P SZ C2 0006 0104 T 15 304 Use it to select and register paper size for the cassette 1 Settings 0 A4 1 B5 2 LTR at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to select and register paper size for the cassette 2 Settings 0 A4 1 B5 2 LTR at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 ...

Page 1235: ...gs 0 coin vendor not used control card permitted no charging 1 coin vendor charging used 2 remote counter charging used at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the paper size for the paper deck option setting 0 A4 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 1 not supported 2 LTR Use it to switch between UI screens for support of the coin vendor function setting 0 coin at tim...

Page 1236: ...se system control setup network setup TCP IP setup IP address setup BOOTP in use system control setup network setup TCP IP setup Ethernet driver setup auto detection system control setup network setup spool function in use If set to 3 or 4 the following settings will be OFF in addition to the foregoing system control setup network setup TCP IP setup RAW setup system control setup network setup TCP...

Page 1237: ...em control setup network setup TCP IP setup IP address setup RARP in use system control setup network setup TCP IP setup IP address setup BOOTP in use system control setup network setup TCP IP setup Ethernet driver setup auto detection system control setup network setup spool function in use If 3 or 4 is set the following settings will be OFF in addition to the foregoing items system control setup...

Page 1238: ...is not suited to ADF high speed duplex mode settings range 1 off do not execute high speed duplex mode use low speed duplex mode 0 on execute high speed duplex mode normal default Use it to specify the presence absence of the stamp This mode item indicates the presence absence of the stamp and is designed for use by the service person settings 0 stamp absent 1 stamp present at time of shipment upo...

Page 1239: ...3 MD SPRTN 0001 7260 T 15 312 Use it to set the marking width W for both sides of the crease for the saddle stitcher in use Setting 0 normal width 5 mm 1 large width 10 mm at time of shipment after RAM initialization 1 Use it to limit the finisher functions setting 0 normal 1 enable functional separation at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 W ...

Page 1240: ...ion in absence of UFR board 1 check presence of UFR board if absent indicate E code at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the intervals at which the primary charging wire pre transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned in a normal environment in terms of the number of copies The new setting will not be valid until the main power switch has been turned off and then back o...

Page 1241: ... 1 in high temperature humidity environment full speed at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to enable disable the function the machine uses to compute the scan area based on the selected paper size setting 0 OFF determine scan based on original size 1 ON determine scan area based on paper size at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to switch over down sequence tables...

Page 1242: ...setting 0 AB configuration at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 1 Inch configuration Use it to enable disable image gradation correction or image density correction executed after making a specific number of copies Note The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on again Setting 0 disable 1 execute every 200 prints up to initial 2000 prints 2 ex...

Page 1243: ...rned off and then back on Settings 0 increase by 100 1 increase by 150 2 increase by 20 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to select face up or face down delivery when multiple sets are specified When multiple sets are specified the machine uses face up delivery To ensure a specific level of stacking performance however the machine offers a mode for face down delivery This choice...

Page 1244: ...setting 0 no limit 0 to 999 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 500 Use it to execute the cleaning sequence designed to avoid soiling on the back of paper caused by the secondary transfer roller 77 mm back soiling preventive mode Settings 0 execute only in H H environment 1 disable in all environments 2 enable in all environments at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to cha...

Page 1245: ...after RAM initialization 25 Use it to change the POP reception port number Range of setting 0 to 65535 in increments of 1 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 110 Use it to set a special paper whose size may not be recognized by the DF setting 0 LEGAL at time of shipment after RAM initialization 1 FOOLSCAP 2 A FOOLSCAP 3 FORIO 4 G LEGAL 5 OFFICIO 6 E OFFICIO 7 A OFFICIO 8 B OFFICIO 9 A LEA...

Page 1246: ...LTR 2 A LTR 3 EXECUTIVE Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism Settings 0 LTR at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1 G LTR 2 A LTR 3 EXECTIVE Use it to set a special paper whose size may not be recognized by the DF setting 0 B5 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 1 K LEAGAL Use it to enable disable the control panel box screen setting 0...

Page 1247: ... to enable disable the display of the environment screen on the control panel setting 0 disable 1 enable at time of shipment after RAM initialization Use it to enable disable the display of the extended screen on the control panel setting 0 disable 1 enable at time of shipment after RAM initialization Use it to specify how halftone must be processed in photo mode setting 0 use error diffusion 1 us...

Page 1248: ...ting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then back on Settings 0 do not execute idle rotation 1 execute idle rotation for 30 sec 2 execute idle rotation for 60 sec at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Settings 3 through 6 are reserved currently invalid Use it to set a threshold for image density over which the machine will execute discharge sequence designed a...

Page 1249: ... setting will not be valid until the power switch is turned off and then on settings range 0 use high number screen gray compensation LUT default 1 use error diffusion gray compensation LUT 2 use high number screen normal LUT at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to select an image area flag for copy image If compression at a specific rate fails on the controller over a scan image i...

Page 1250: ... upon RAM initialization 10 Use it to enable disable network related error messages setting 0 disable enable at time of shipment after RAM initialization Use it to adjust the speed of the fixing roller If the arching of paper between the secondary transfer roller and the fixing roller is too great the trailing edge of the paper tends to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt causing...

Page 1251: ... 1 ON Use it to set the global support function for book mode original detection setting 0 normal 1 AB configuration Inch configuration mixed detection Use it to enable disable the switch over from CCD size detection to photo size detection for copyboard original size detection Attention The setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on settings range 0 disable p...

Page 1252: ...ic adjustment Settings 0 disable 1 force execution once 2 and 3 reserved input invalid at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set CRAM MD5 authentication under SMTP authentication setting 0 dependent on SMTP server 1 disable Use it to set GSSAPI authentication under SMTP authentication setting 0 dependent on SMTP server 1 disable Use it to set NTLM authentication under SMTP authen...

Page 1253: ...ependent on SMTP server 1 disable Use it to set LOGIN authentication under SMTP authentication setting 0 dependent on SMTP server 1 disable Use it to permit or not to permit replacement of the toner cartridge by the user when there still is toner in the cartridge Settings 0 do not permit replacement by user When the toner runs out in the case of black toner is running low a button will appear to p...

Page 1254: ... update has been made to do away with setting 2 as a result of recent findings i e the expected operation does not take place in some PDL or copy jobs although the setting exists in service mode it behaves like 0 Use it to set end edge correction for BkLUT for Tmic PDL and BkLUT for Copy under Tmic setting 0 PDL ON Copy OFF PDL ON Copy OFF at time of shipment after RAM initialization 1 PDL OFF Cop...

Page 1255: ... to automatically clean the primary charging wire Note The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then back on Range of settings 100 to 1000 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1000 Use it to set the environment table for black toner supply Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 var...

Page 1256: ...ts proper execution of ATVC If the level of current set by default is not high enough use this item to increase it Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 refer to environment sensor 1 60uA 2 70uA 3 80uA 4 90uA 5 100uA 6 110uA 7 120uA at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to change the duration of primary transfer...

Page 1257: ...then on Settings 0 refer to the environment table 1 40sec 2 60sec 3 120sec 4 180sec 5 300sec 6 420sec 7 600sec at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the duration of toner discharge executed as part of the ITB black band cleaning sequence Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 1 10 2 20 at time of shipment up...

Page 1258: ...at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1 Use it to change the intervals of 1 patch detection No 1 limit in terms of the number of prints Use it to change the intervals of patch ATR for the No 1 limit A higher limit will increase the downtime intervals but will affect the density On the other hand although a lower limit may decrease the downtime intervals the density will be more stable The fo...

Page 1259: ...deo counter cumulative count Use it to change the intervals of patch ATR in relation to the video counter cumulative count Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch is turned off and then on Settings 10 to 10 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to adjust the length of time for the detection of a disconnected connector or to adjust the potential sensor offs...

Page 1260: ...witch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 180 000 1 150 000 2 120 000 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Fixing Roller Error Level Change Use it to change the level at which an error is issued in relation to the fixing counter reading The level which is the result of offsetting the value set in the fixing upper roller warning level change mode COPIER OPTION BODY FXWRNLVL will be ...

Page 1261: ... x 40 prints at time of shipment RAM initialization 0 Use it to change the delivery speed Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 delivery speed with priority on FCOT 627 mm sec 1 delivery speed with priority on paper edge damage avoidance 267 mm sec at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to enable disable the mess...

Page 1262: ... formation in relation to the state on off of the gamma LUT auto correction function Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch is turned off and then on Settings 0 off do not apply gamma LUT auto correction 1 copy T mic apply gamma LUT auto correction 2 copy PDL T mic apply gamma LUT auto correction 3 all apply gamma a LUT auto correction at time of shipment upon RAM initi...

Page 1263: ...e it to set the intervals of smoothing executed as part of the gamma LUT auto correction function Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 30 1 35 2 40 3 45 4 50 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the black band used to prevent bending slipping of the transfer cleaning blade The machine is designed to dep...

Page 1264: ...f installation Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 off at all times spare 1 on only if H H default 2 on normally at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1 Use it to change the control temperature for the pressure roller Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Set...

Page 1265: ...uto correction mechanism of the controller when improvement is needed to correct coarseness of images read of a cyan solid original Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 2 4 1 2 0 2 1 6 3 1 2 4 0 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 for study by design dpt for study by design dpt for study by design dpt ...

Page 1266: ...amma LUT auto correction mechanism of the controller when improvement is needed to correct coarseness of images read of a cyan solid original Attention The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on Settings 0 2 4 1 2 2 2 2 0 3 1 8 4 1 6 at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 2 for study by design dpt for study by design dpt for study by design dpt fo...

Page 1267: ...30 deg C at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 2 Use it to set the time interval allowed before a low temperature error is identified Caution The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on again Settings 0 to 200 min at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 10 Use it to enable disable E code indication of a low temperature error Caution The new se...

Page 1268: ... at time of shipment after RAM initialization Use it to change the date indication setting 0 YYMM DD 1 DD MM YY 2 MM DD YY Use it to limit the individuals holding control cards for mail boxes setting 0 do not limit at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 1 limit Use it to specify how output is made when the tray becomes full setting 0 normal mode cut operation when the finisher tray becomes...

Page 1269: ...n original size or have the machine automatically detect the size of the original Settings 0 require input of original size from control panel 1 detect original size automatically at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to permit not permit the network scan function setting 0 do not permit 1 permit invalid if UFR board or open I F board is not connected Use it to enable disable displa...

Page 1270: ... disable display of log indication on off setup on the Additional Function screen setting 0 disable display of log display on off setup 1 enable log display on off setup Use it to set the PCL command COPIES Meru Pinatubo Hood compatibility mode Settings 0 control page by page according to COPIES command setting on pages 1 Meru Pinatubo Hood compatible mode 2 to 65535 space at time of shipment upon...

Page 1271: ... RAM initialization 0 Use it to remove the source indication of the transmission password on the Edit screen RUI address indication range of settings 0 do not remove source indication of transmission password on Edit screen 1 remove source indication of transmission password on Edit screen at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set the temperature control hysterisis width for the ...

Page 1272: ...in paper size groups By registering a special size for U1 U2 U3 or U4 you can cause the machine to treat the paper in question as special size paper Settings 24 Foolscap CST U2 default 25 Australian Foolscap 26 Officio 27 Ecuadorian Officio 28 Bolivian Officio 29 Argentine Letter U4 default 30 Argentine Letter R 31 Government Letter U1 default 32 Government Letter R 34 Government Legal U3 default ...

Page 1273: ...ent after RAM initialization 1 support priority on speed 2 support priority on upper limit If it is set to 1 the machine may not be ale to make an accurate stop based on an upper limit as it puts priority on the maintenance of engine performance If it is set to 2 the machine will be able to use proper control based on an upper limit but may suffer from a drop in engine performance depending on whi...

Page 1274: ...print job CPCA from PintMe application bundled with the PS print server unit Range of settings 0 to 9999999 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 Use it to set a path code for a print job CPCA from PrintMe application bundled with the PS print server unit Range of settings 0 to 9999999 at time of shipment after RAM initialization 0 0 do no indicate at time of shipment after RAM initializa...

Page 1275: ...for R D 12 YMCBk 64 gradation 13 for R D 14 full color 16 gradation 15 to 200 for R D at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Use it to set image mode when generating test prints Settings 0 T Mic w o end correction 1 SC1 w o end correction 2 SC2 w o end correction 3 T Mic w end correction only if Bk 4 SC2 w end correction if Bk 5 T Mic w gamma LUT auto correction 6 SCI w gamma LUT auto corre...

Page 1276: ... make the image darker at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 128 Use it to adjust the density of individual colors of a test print TYPE 5 Settings 0 to 255 a higher setting will make the image darker at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 128 Use it to adjust the density of individual colors of a test print TYPE 5 Settings 0 to 255 a higher density will make the image darker at time of ...

Page 1277: ...ndividual colors for individual TYPEs For example to generate M in mono set 1 to COLOR M and 0 to others Settings 0 do not generate 1 generate at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 1 Use it to set the output of individual colors for individual TYPEs For example to generate M in mono set 1 to COLOR M and 0 to others Settings 0 do not generate 1 generate at time of shipment upon RAM initializa...

Page 1278: ...Setting 0 full color output 1 mono color output Use it to select a source of paper for text print output Setting 1 cassette 1 2 cassette 2 3 cassette 3 4 cassette 4 5 side deck 6 manual feeder 7 and 8 not used Use it to set mode for text printing Setting 0 single sided at time of shipment after RAM initialization 1 double sided Use it to set a copy count for text printing Setting 1 to 999 at time ...

Page 1279: ...tion and obtain the remote host address IP address of a PC terminal on the user s network for PING 5 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING Then using the keypad on the control panel enter the IP address you obtained in step 4 and press the OK key and then the Start key The machine will indicate OK if the connection to the network is correct end of work If the machi...

Page 1280: ...fore it reaches the NIC offering a means to check the TCP IP settings of the machine itself 7 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING Then enter the local host address IP address of the machine and press the OK key If the machine indicates NG suspect a fault in the connection of the NIC or the NIC itself Check its connection or replace it as necessary If the machine ...

Page 1281: ...s its count when copying operation has been executed and paper is delivered outside the printer When the count exceeds 99999999 it returns to 00000000 15 8 1 1 5 PDL PRT 0001 0632 PDL Print Counter It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter when in PDL print mode It does not increase its count in the case of blank ...

Page 1282: ...ter It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter in report print mode It does not increase its count in the case of blank paper It increases its count by 1 for large and small sheets alike Its count may be reset When the count exceeds 99999999 it returns to 00000000 15 8 1 1 10 2 SIDE 0001 0640 Double Sided Copy Prin...

Page 1283: ... When the count exceeds 99999999 it returns to 00000000 15 8 1 2 5 C4 0001 0682 Cassette 4 Pickup Total Counter It indicates the number of sheets picked up from the cassette 4 lower cassette of the cassette pedestal When the count exceeds 99999999 it returns to 00000000 15 8 1 2 6 MF 0001 0683 Manual Feed Pickup Total Counter It indicates the number of sheets picked up from the manual feed pickup ...

Page 1284: ...am Related Counters 15 8 1 4 2 TOTAL 0001 0687 copier total jam counter 15 8 1 4 3 FEEDER 0001 0689 feeder total jam counter 15 8 1 4 4 SORTER 0001 0690 finisher total jam counter 15 8 1 4 5 2 SIDE 0001 0691 duplex unit jam counter 15 8 1 4 6 MF 0001 0692 manual feed pickup jam counter 15 8 1 4 7 C1 0001 0693 cassette 1 jam counter 15 8 1 4 8 C2 0001 0694 cassette 2 jam counter 15 8 1 4 9 C3 0001 ...

Page 1285: ...acement Reading Highlight the counter reading 1 and enter the reading indicated before the replacement F 15 26 fixing cleaning web counter count retained by DC controller PCB Operation If you have replaced the fixing web reset the counter reading If you have replaced the DC controller PCB enter the reading indicated before the replacement The count in this mode begins a count after a web less prel...

Page 1286: ...ou have disposed of waste toner reset the counter reading If you have replaced the DC controller enter the reading indicated before the replacement Remarks The counts are made as follows Duty 10 or less B W if small counted as 1 if large counted as 2 4C if small counted as 4 if large counted as 8 Duty 10 or more B W if small counted as 3 if large counted as 6 4C if small counted as 12 if large cou...

Page 1287: ...u have replaced the developing unit Bk initialize the reading If you have replaced the DC controller PCB enter the reading recorded before the replacement Caution Do not reset the reading or enter a new reading unless if you have done the foregoing Otherwise the machine may have to operate on incorrect image density producing foggy output or damaging the drum by carrier particles requiring you to ...

Page 1288: ... before the replacement Estimated life 500 000 prints toner life M Operation if you have replaced the developing assembly toner M reset the reading of the counter if you have replaced the DC control PCB enter the reading indicated before the replacement Estimated life 500 000 prints toner life C Operation if you have replaced the developing assembly toner C reset the reading of the counter if you ...

Page 1289: ...e indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on Estimated life 500 000 image count type type 1 Use it when shifting the photosensitive drum phase When the photosensitive drum is used without changing the home position in relation to the drum axis uneven density at drum intervals or lines can occur in output images To limit the symptom shift the phase of the photosensitive drum by 90 deg e...

Page 1290: ...indicates the number of times it has been replaced Estimated life 500 000 image count type type 1 15 8 1 6 8 PO CLN2 0006 2157 for the pre transfer charging wire cleaner2 indicates the number of times it has been replaced Estimated life 500 000 image count type type 1 15 8 1 6 9 PO UNIT 0005 6939 for the post charging assembly indicates the number of times it has gone on Estimated life 1 000 000 i...

Page 1291: ...ave passed Estimated life 500 000 image counter type type 3 15 8 1 6 15 FX LW TS 0005 6950 for the contact thermal switch indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 1 000 000 image counter type type 3 15 8 1 6 16 FX EX TS 0005 6952 for the external heating roller thermal switch indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 1 000 000 image count type type 3 15 8...

Page 1292: ...er PCB Main controller PCB TRD CLN TR BLT TR ROLL 2TR TOLL TR STC H 1TR STC ITB SUPS 2TR INRL CLN BLD CL SUPS CL SCRP C3 PU RL C3 SP RL C3 FD RL C4 PU RL C4 SP RL C4 FD RL LD PU RL LD SP RL LD FD RL RD PU RL RD SP RL RD FD RL M PU RL M SP RL FX IN BS FX WEB FX EX RL FX RW BS FX EX BS DLV UCLW DLV LCLW OZ FIL5 TN FIL2 TN FIL5 FX SPACE ITB SCRP DC controller PCB DV UNT C DV UNT Y DV UNT M FX UP RL F...

Page 1293: ...ransfer static eliminator has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved Estimated life 150000 prints count type type 3 15 8 1 7 10 1TR STC 0005 6960 indicates the number of times the primary transfer static eliminator has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved Estimated life 300000 image count type type 1 15 8 1 7 11 ITB SUPS 0005 6961 for the ITB cleaner scoop up sheet indicate...

Page 1294: ...sheets involved Estimated life 500000 prints count type type 5 15 8 1 7 19 DVG CYL 0005 6971 indicates the number of times the developing cylinder has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved Estimated life 1000000 prints count type type 3 15 8 1 7 20 DVG ROLL 0005 6972 indicates the number of tines the developing assembly roll has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved Estimat...

Page 1295: ...oller indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 250000 prints count type type 3 15 8 1 7 27 C4 PU RL 0005 6982 for the cassette 4 pickup roller indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 250000 prints count type type 3 15 8 1 7 28 C4 SP RL 0005 6983 for the cassette 4 separation roller indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 250000 pr...

Page 1296: ...ated life 250000 prints count type type 4 15 8 1 7 35 RD FD RL 0005 6991 for the right front deck feed roller indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 250000 prints count type type 4 15 8 1 7 36 M PU RL 0005 7251 for the manual feed pickup roller indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 120000 prints count type type 3 15 8 1 7 37 M SP RL 0005 6993 for th...

Page 1297: ...ng three 180 000 150 000 120 000 15 8 1 7 39 FX LW RL 0005 7020 for the fix lower roller indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 180000 prints count type type 2 15 8 1 7 40 FX IN BS 0005 7021 for the fixing heat insulating bush indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 500000 prints count type type 3 15 8 1 7 41 FX WEB 0005 7023 for the fixing web indica...

Page 1298: ...stimated life 500000 prints count type type 3 15 8 1 7 46 DLV LCLW 0005 7031 for the delivery lower separation claw indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 500000 prints count type type 3 15 8 1 7 47 OZ FIL5 0005 7032 for the fixing heat discharge fan indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 1000000 image count type type 1 15 8 1 7 48 TN FIL2 0006 2159 ...

Page 1299: ... single original for double sided mode the count is increased by 3 as feeding takes place 3 times for face back and idle large and small sizes are not distinguished 15 8 1 8 4 LNT TAPE 0005 7040 not used 15 8 1 8 5 DF SP RL 0005 7041 number of sheets passing the ADF feed separation roller Estimated life 80 000 prints for both single sided and double sided modes the count is increased by every sing...

Page 1300: ...double sided modes the count is increased by 1 for every signal original not the side large and small size are not distinguished 15 8 1 8 11 PD PU RL 0005 7062 for the paper deck pickup roller indicates the number of sheets that have passed Estimated life 250 000 prints 15 8 1 8 12 PD SP RL 0005 7064 for the paper deck separation roller indicates the number of sets that have passed Estimated life ...

Page 1301: ...controller PCB 15 8 1 8 18 PUNCH 0005 7081 for the puncher indicates the number of times it has gone on count retained by DC controller PCB 15 8 1 8 19 FN BFFRL 0005 7082 for the buffer roller indicates the number of times it has gone on count retained by DC controller PCB for every single sheet that passes the buffer roller the roller goes on once ...

Page 1302: ...Chapter 15 15 238 ...

Page 1303: ...Chapter 16 Upgrading ...

Page 1304: ......

Page 1305: ... Overview 16 27 16 4 1 2 Downloading Procedure 16 28 16 4 2 Downloading the System Software 16 40 16 4 2 1 Outline 16 40 16 4 2 2 Downloading Procedure 16 41 16 4 3 Downloading the RUI and Language Module 16 48 16 4 3 1 Outline 16 48 16 4 3 2 Downloading Procedure 16 50 16 4 4 Downloading the BOOT Software 16 56 16 4 4 1 Outline 16 56 16 4 4 2 Downloading Procedure 16 57 16 4 5 Downloading the Dco...

Page 1306: ......

Page 1307: ...ows a list of firmware and the associated way of upgrading T 16 1 Firmware Way of Version Upgrade Notes SST ROM DIMM replacement Main Body System system software Yes No Language language module Yes No RUI remote UI Yes No Boot boot program Yes Yes DCON DC controller Yes No RCON reader controller Yes No It also controls ADF reading Accessory G3FAX super G3FAX board P1 Yes Yes Fin_QR Finisher R1 Sad...

Page 1308: ... functions F 16 1 To use the SST you must first set the machine to download mode The machine s download mode consists of 2 types Initializing the HDD Downloading system software Uploading backup data Downloading backup data Backup data System software HDD setting information SST HDD Flash ROM Back up RAM PC for service work iR XXXX ...

Page 1309: ...d mode A With pressing 2 8 turn on the main power switch F 16 2 Use safe mode for the following after replacing the HDD if the system fails to operate normally Main power switch ON on keypad 2 8 on keypad 1 7 Boot ROM Safe mode program Boot program Download mode A Download mode B HDD COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD SYSTEM program In service mode normal mode program ...

Page 1310: ... of network settings user enviroment network settings Additional Function system contorol settings network settings service network settings IP address 172 16 1 160 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Function Download mode Normal mode download mode B Safe mode download mode A Formatting the HDD ALL BOOTDEV DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 DOSDEV5 Downloading system software System Langu...

Page 1311: ... XXXX iR XXXX SST in use Power OFF Power ON in response to 1 7 or 2 8 on keypad Power OFF Normal power ON User network enviroment User network enviroment Service PC Ethernet I F Ethernet I F Service network settings Service network settings User enviromsnt network settings User enviroment network settings settings are retained User envorment network settings settings retained Service network setti...

Page 1312: ... FIXIP in the upper right of the LCD to distinguish its state from normal F 16 4 A 1 1 Paper Select Finisher Two sided Auto Color Select Department S 100 1 Text Photo Map Copy Mail Box Options Send Interrupt System Monitor Special Features I Fax Memory X is on Copy atio eady to copy ...

Page 1313: ...ernet interface is enabled if a TokenRing board is installed and the TokenRing board is disabled You need not remove the TokenRing board when connecting the SST F 16 5 iR XXXX TokenRIng I F enabled Ethernet I F disabled TokenRIng I F disabled Ethernet I F enabled iR XXXX SST in use Power OFF Power ON in response to 1 7 or 2 8 on keypad User network enviroment TokenRIng Service PC ...

Page 1314: ...ware 1 Start up the PC 2 Set the system CD to the PC 3 Start up the SST 4 Click next under Controlling Data F 16 6 Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Controlling Data If you want to work on any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Uploading Registering and Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To exec...

Page 1315: ...Main Menu Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Selecting Data Control Item C XXxx Ver 01 10 XXxx Ver 02 01 XXxx Ver 03 01 XXxx Ver 20 02 XXxx Ver 01 16 XXxx Ver 01 25 XXxx Ver 01 28 BOOT Drive DCON iR XXXX Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Registering Firmware Stored firmware Registering firmware The list shows the firmware stored on the computer To register the firmware from the NewROM folder cl...

Page 1316: ...ted folder Could not find the information file ift To Previous Screen Register Firmware registration from the selected folder iR XXXX SYSTEM Japan Japanese v0128 iR XXXX SYSTEM USA English v0128 iR XXXX SYSTEM Japan Japanese v0128 iR XXXX Language All English v0128 iR XXXX Language All Japanese v0128 iR XXXX RUI All English v0128 iR XXXX RUI All Japanese v0128 iR XXXX DCON All Common v0132 q iR XX...

Page 1317: ...ompt and press the Enter key Check to see that the network settings are as follows IP address 172 16 1 160 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway any Results iR XXXX SYSTEM Japan Japanese v0128 Registered OK iR XXXX SYSTEM USA English v0128 Registered OK iR XXXX SYSTEM Japan Japanese v0128 Registered OK iR XXXX Language All English v0128 Registered OK iR XXXX Language All Japanese v0128 Registe...

Page 1318: ... 0 0 0 I P C o n f i g u ra t i o n M i c r o s o f t W i n d ow s 2 0 0 0 Ve r s i o n 5 0 0 2 1 9 5 C C o py r i g h t 1 9 8 5 1 9 9 9 M i n c r o s o f t C o r p E t h e r n e t a d a p t e r L o c a l A r e a C o n n e c t i o n C o n n e c t i o n s p e c i f i c D N S S u f f i x I P A d d r e s s 1 7 2 1 6 1 1 6 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 D e fa u l t G a t eway C C i p c o n f i g Command...

Page 1319: ...esponse to 2 8 on keypad 6 Start up the SST 7 Click To next under Downloading Uploading F 16 14 Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Controlling Data If you want to work on any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Uploading Registering and Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the foll...

Page 1320: ...el and Unit Model Check the selected model unit and click the Connect button Unit Interface Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Selecting Model Unit To Main Menu Connect iR XXXX iR XXXX BOOT DCON G3FAX HDFormat Language RCON RUI SYSTEM Available Model and Unit The list shows models and units that may be connected Select the PCB for the machine by clicking Selected Model and Unit Model Check the se...

Page 1321: ...ion Screen Set host name OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download mode Language Unit Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Checking the Start To Unit Selection Screen Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host ...

Page 1322: ...ice Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Checking the Start To Unit Selection Screen Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 OK A 01 25 iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit Connectedto Language Unit iR XXXX Model List of System Software for the Target of Connection The information needed for the job has been obtained Check the indicated descriptions and press OK Language Japanese Japan Country Region Version State...

Page 1323: ...settin up partitions on the HDD and formatting initializing them for use by the main controller F 16 21 HDD FSTDEV DOSDEV2 DOSDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 DOSDEV5 BOOTDEV Formatting All partitions only if in safe mode HDD after formatting HDD offerd as service part partitions are not set up FSTPDEV ...

Page 1324: ...ing initializing partitions that you have selected F 16 22 HDD FSTPDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 DOSDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 DOSDEV5 BOOTDEV Partitions on HDD May be formatted in normal mode May be formatted in safe mode After formatting requires downloading of the following System Language RUI ...

Page 1325: ...d up the next time and it takes as long as the following Formatting of FSTDEV 2 min approx Formatting of PDLDEV 5 min approx Formatting of All partitions 7 min approx The times vary according to the state of the HDD and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress bar Name of partition selected by the SST Partition that is formatted FSTDEV FSTDEV FSTPDEV DOSDEV DOSDEV2 DOSDEV3 DO...

Page 1326: ...pport Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Main Menu iR XXXX iR XXXX BOOT DCON G3FAX HDFormat Language RCON RUI SYSTEM Available Model and Unit The list shows models and units that may be connected Select the PCB for the machine by clicking...

Page 1327: ...ion Screen Set host name OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download mode HDFormat Unit Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Checking the Start To Unit Selection Screen Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host ...

Page 1328: ...ne and start the download mode HDFormat Unit Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Checking the Start To Unit Selection Screen Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 DOSDEV5 DOSDEV4 DOSDEV3 FSTDEV PDLDEV OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit Connectedto HDFormat Unit iR XXXX Model List of Partition Names of the Hard Disk Drive Partition The information needed for the job has been obtained Check the indic...

Page 1329: ...under All partitions enabled if in safe mode DOSDEV5 DOSDEV4 Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit HDFormat Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting a Job List of Partition Names of the Hard Disk Drive Selecting a HDFormat Job Click the job key for HDFormat Format the hard disk Format To Unit Selection Screen Partition ...

Page 1330: ... Connected Model and Unit HDFormat Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting Disk Partision List of Partition Names of the Hard Disk Drive Partition FSTDEV BOOTDEV Start Start Previous Screen Partition Selected Partition All Partitions Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit HDFormat Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting Disk Partition L...

Page 1331: ...el Connected Model and Unit HDFormat Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Formatting the disk FSTDEV Start Stop Previous Screen Partition Selected Partition Final Confirmation Formatting Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit HDFormat Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Formatting the disk FSTDEV OK Previous Screen Partition Selected Partition Resul...

Page 1332: ...e actual formattin of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time and it takes as long as the following Formatting of FSTDEV 2 min approx Formatting of PDLDEV 5 min approx Formatting of All partitions 7 min approx The times vary according to the state of the HDD and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress bar You must not turn off the machine s...

Page 1333: ...ng SST v2 01 or later Files to Register in the SST information file for batch downloading system software F 16 34 Various system software Boot System Language RUI G3FAX DCON RCON Collective downloading information file Register all files to SST iR XXXX SST ALL BOOT DCON SST V2 01 or later iR XXXX all fields associated with ALL ALL_HDF Batch Download SST V2 01 or later iR XXXX SST BOOT DCON 1 file ...

Page 1334: ...software pieces that have been registerd in SST in sequence to HDD System system software Language language module RUI Remote UI to each PCB Boot boot program DCON DC controller RCON reader controller 16 4 1 2 Downloading Procedure 0005 9074 Memo You can use either of the following two approaches for a downloading session as long as you have selected the appropriate downloading information file no...

Page 1335: ...Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data Service Support Tool Ver 2 01E DLM0 Main Menu Controlling Firmware Controlling Buckup Data To register firmware click the button on the right To remove stored firmware click th...

Page 1336: ...e firmware stored on the computer To register the firmware from the NewROM folder click the button on the right To register the firmware from the CD ROM click the button on the right Register from selected folder To Previous Screen Register from NewROM folder C ServTool iR XXXX ALL C iR XXXX ALL USen5401 ift iR XXXX Serv Tool c ALL Registration from the Selected Folder Select the drive Select the ...

Page 1337: ...lder Search Path to the selected folder Information file ift in the selected folder Copying files To Previous Screen Register Firmware registration from the selected folder O K iR XXXX_Language_XXja5402 iR XXXX_RUI_XXja5307 iR XXXX_Language_XXen5402 iR XXXX_RUI_XXen5307 iR XXXX_MEAPCONT_XXxx5402 Batch object files registration status No check Not registered Registratiion has been completed iR XXXX...

Page 1338: ... piece of system software that has not been registered is indicated by an appropriate notation for its path Be sure to use Registering Firmware for the work Device IP Interface Network 172 16 1 100 Job Download iR XXXX_SYSTEM_USen2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXja2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXen2101 Download iR XXXX_DCON_XXxx2007 Path Download iR XXXX_RUI_XXja1011 C ServTool iR XXXX RUI XXjav1...

Page 1339: ...rmatted the HDD the HDD will be in its initial state at this point 3 Start downloading BOOT 4 Turn off the copier and start it up again in normal mode 5 Start downloading DCON 6 Turn off the copier and start it up against in normal mode 7 Start downloading RCON Device IP Interface Network 172 16 1 100 Job Download iR XXXX_SYSTEM_USen2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXja2101 Download iR XXXX_Language...

Page 1340: ...Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data Service Support Tool Ver 2 01E DLM0 Main Menu iR XXXX iR XXXX BOOT ALL DCON G3FAX HDFormat Language RCON RUI ALL_HDF Available Model and Unit The list shows m...

Page 1341: ... same version skip ver down confirm confirm overwrite b is older Downgrade check and then download check and download download a and b of same version do not download check and download download b is new Upgrade download download download Device IP Interface Network 172 16 1 100 Job Download iR XXXX_SYSTEM_USen2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXja2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXen2101 Download iR X...

Page 1342: ...Start Skip Selected Version Language Country Region Version English USA 01 25 Start Previous Screen Device IP Interface Network 172 16 1 100 Job Download iR XXXX_SYSTEM_USen2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXja2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXen2101 Download iR XXXX_DCON_XXxx2007 Path Download iR XXXX_RUI_XXja1011 C ServTool iR XXXX RUI XXjav1011 iR XXXX Wait Turn off the copier then turn on Wait Tu...

Page 1343: ...XX_RUI_XXja1011 C ServTool iR XXXX RUI XXjav1011 iR XXXX Wait Turn off the copier then turn on Wait Turn off the copier then turn on iR XXXX Ver2 01 Common to C Boot and N Boot To Unit Selection Screen Start Batch Download Same Ver Skip Ver down Confirm Confirm Overwrite Confirm firmware versions H Batch download list Service Support Tool Ver 2 01E DLM0 Batch Download Control Screen Resume Pause F...

Page 1344: ...XXXX Ver2 01 Common to C Boot and N Boot To Unit Selection Screen Start Batch Download Same Ver Skip Ver down Confirm Confirm Overwrite Confirm firmware versions H Batch download list Service Support Tool Ver 2 01E DLM0 Batch Download Control Screen Resume Pause Finish Turn off the copier then turn on it with 1 and 7 keys holding down Enter download mode in the service mode Click Resume button to ...

Page 1345: ... selection screen F 16 49 iR XXXX Ver2 01 Common to C Boot and N Boot Result Download iR XXXX RUI XXjav1011 Skip Download iR XXXX RUI XXenv1011 Skip Download iR XXXX Boot XXxxv2002 Firm registered Download iR XXXX RCON XXxxv2101 Firm registerd To Unit Selection Screen Batch download list Service Support Tool Ver 2 01E DLM0 Batch Download Control Screen All processes have been completed ...

Page 1346: ...ime of downloading T 16 6 Country SST installation model NetWare Remarks 100V iRC6800 Not supported Installed at time of shipment to iRC6800 100V iRC6800N Supported Installed at time of shipment to iRC6800N 100V 120 230V iRC6800 Supported Installed at time of shipment to iR6800 120 230V 6800N 120 230V Notation Function System Main Program for main CPU System Sub Program for sub CPU ICC Profile col...

Page 1347: ...ding Procedure 0005 4918 Making a Check Work Jpn only Press the Counter Check key 1 on the control panel to check the model name 2 indicated on the LCD F 16 51 When checking the model name see the indication in parentheses F 16 52 1 2 ...

Page 1348: ...ool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Main Menu iR XXXX iR XXXX BOOT DCON G3FAX HDFormat Language RCON RUI SYSTEM Available Model and Unit The list shows models and units that may be connected Select the PCB for the machine by clicking Select...

Page 1349: ...on Screen Set host name OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download mode SYSTEM Unit Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Checking the Start To Unit Selection Screen Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host nam...

Page 1350: ... start the download mode SYSTEM Unit Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Checking the Start To Unit Selection Screen Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit Connectedto SYSTEM Unit iR XXXX Model The information needed for the job has been obtained Check the indicated descriptions and press OK Connected Model and Unit SYSTEM Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM...

Page 1351: ... the backup data of the machine Write the saved backup data to the machine Language Japanese Japan Country Region Version State Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit SYSTEM Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting a Version List of System Software for the Target of Connection System Software Versions Available for Selection Selected Version Click the appropriat...

Page 1352: ...Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit SYSTEM Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Downloading the SYSTEM List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language A 01 25 Japanese Japan Country Region Version State Result of Downloading Selected System Software 01 28 Language The check sums of all files have matched English USA Country Region Version File Name No...

Page 1353: ...em Language RUI Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit SYSTEM Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Downloading the SYSTEM List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language A 01 25 Japanese Japan Country Region Version State Selected System Software 01 28 Language English USA Country Region Version Stop Progress of Writing to the Hard Disk Data has been tra...

Page 1354: ...ersions are correct Selections may be made in Additional Function Common settings Language Switch 2 if the versions are not correct E744 will be indicated Turn off and then on the main power switch so that the system language will be used LCD Network PC Language RUI System RUI en RUI it RUI ja System Language Language XXen Language XXit Language XXja RUI XXen RUI XXit RUI XXja Version check Networ...

Page 1355: ...fic language may be selected for a specific PC Language Code Language de German en English fr French it Italian ja Japanese Download iR XXXX Language XXen XXja RUI XXen XXja SST PC for service iR XXXX Main controller block HDD BOOTDEV Language XXen Language XXja RUI XXen RUI XXja ...

Page 1356: ...der Downloading Uploading F 16 65 Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Controlling Data If you want to work on any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Uploading Registering and Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firm...

Page 1357: ...age Network Check the selected model unit and click the Connect button Unit Interface Service Support Tool Ver 1 73E DLM0 Selecting Model Unit To Main Menu Connect Available Model and Unit iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download mo...

Page 1358: ...en Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host name or IP address If you want to change select an appropriate name from drop down list or input character directly Click Save to save the name for reuse Click Delete to delete the name from list Delete Save Cancel OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit Connectedto If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the...

Page 1359: ...rget of Connection Language English All Country Region Version State Connected Model and Unit Language Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Connecting to the Machine Language Download To Unit Selection Screen Selecting a Language Job Click the job key for Language Write the Languate to the machine A 01 25 iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit Connectedto Language Unit List of Sy...

Page 1360: ...get of Connection Language Japanese Japan Country Region Version State H 01 25 Language List for the Target of Connection Language E n g l i s h A l l Country Region Version State 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting a Version OK iR XXXX XXen0128 4428 LANG 4228 4228 OK Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit Language Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver...

Page 1361: ...ed Model and Unit Language Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Downloading the Language List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language A 01 25 Japanese Japan Country Region Version State Selected Language 01 28 Language English All Country Region Version Stop Language List for the Target of Connection Language H 01 28 English All Country Region Version State Progr...

Page 1362: ...ding function be sure to select iRC6800 as the model name regardless of the type of Boot that is installed There is no need to change the model name to suit the type of Boot If you fail to downloading files you must replace the boot ROM SST PC for service Main controller block Download iR XXXX Boot iR XXXX Boot ROM Flash ROM DIMM may be upgraded by DIMM replacement LIPS Boot Flash ROM DIMM Copy Bo...

Page 1363: ...LM0 Controlling Data If you want to work on any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Uploading Registering and Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data Service Support...

Page 1364: ...el and Unit Model iR XXXX BOOT Network Check the selected model unit and click the Connect button Unit Interface Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Selecting Model Unit To Main Menu Connect iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download ...

Page 1365: ...n Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host name or IP address If you want to change select an appropriate name from drop down list or input character directly Click Save to save the name for reuse Click Delete to delete the name from list Delete Save Cancel OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit Connectedto If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the ...

Page 1366: ...ist of System Software for the Target of Connection Language Japanese Japan Country Region Version State BootROM of the Target of Connection Language Country Re Version 03 01 Common All iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit Connectedto Boot Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting a Job BootROM Download To Unit Selection Screen Selecting a BootROM Job Click the job key for...

Page 1367: ...ted at the bottom 20 02 Common All Version Previous Screen Start Langua Country Re Versi 01 10 Common All 02 01 Common All 20 02 Common All 03 01 Common All Language Country Region BootROM of the Target of Connection Language Country Re Version 03 01 Common All OK iR XXXX XXxx2002 F510 BOOT F510 F510 OK Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit Boot Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool ...

Page 1368: ...machine to start up F 16 85 If the machine fails to start up replace the boot ROM Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit Boot Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Downloading the BOOT Selected BootROM 20 02 Language Progress of Writing to the Hard Disk Data has been transferred and is now been written to the hard disk Now data writing Don t power off target Common All...

Page 1369: ...86 Unless the DC controller has started up normally not permitting downloading of Reader controller files Because the power supply control signal will not be validated not supplying the reader unit with power SST PC for service Reader unit iR XXXX Dcon Rcon Main controller block DC controller PCB Download Downloading possible only in normal mode Power supply controller signal Power cable CPU Reade...

Page 1370: ...oading Rcon files the version of DC CON must be indicated in service mode Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Controlling Data If you want to work on any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Uploading Registering and Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click...

Page 1371: ...Model iR XXXX DCON Network Check the selected model unit and click the Connect button Unit Interface Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Selecting Model Unit To Main Menu Connect iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download mode DCON Un...

Page 1372: ...n Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host name or IP address If you want to change select an appropriate name from drop down list or input character directly Click Save to save the name for reuse Click Delete to delete the name from list Delete Save Cancel OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit Connectedto If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the ...

Page 1373: ...ystem Software for the Target of Connection Language Japanese Japan Country Region Version State A 01 26 DCON List for the Target of Connection Language Common All Country Region Version State iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit Connectedto DCON Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting a Job A 01 25 List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language Japanese J...

Page 1374: ...Language Japanese Japan Country Region Version State A 01 26 DCON List for the Target of Connection Language Common A l l Country Region Version State 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting a Version OK iR XXXX XXxx0132 5C64 DCON 5C64 5C64 OK iR XXXX XXxx0132 A0A8 DCON A0A8 A0A8 OK Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit DCON Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool D...

Page 1375: ...or code is indicated be sure to download the appropriate system software Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit DCON Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Downloading the DCON List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language A 01 25 Japanese Japan Country Region Version State Selected DCON 01 32 Language Progress of Writing to the Hard Disk Data has been t...

Page 1376: ...d by way of the main controller block F 16 98 If downloading fails the flash ROM DIMM must be replaced iR XXXX G3Fax PC for service iR XXXX G3Fax Board Downloading Downloading possible only in normal mode G3Fax Flash ROM DIMM G3Fax Flash ROM DIMM Upgrading may be by DIMM replacement Main controller block CPU SST ...

Page 1377: ...Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Main Menu iR XXXX iR XXXX BOOT DCON G3FAX HDFormat Language RCON RUI SYSTEM Available Model and Unit The list shows models and units that may be connected Select the PCB for th...

Page 1378: ...and start the download made Set host name To Unit Selection Screen OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit G3FAX Unit Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Checking the Start If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download made 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host nam...

Page 1379: ... Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download made OK Connectedto iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit G3FAX Unit 172 16 1 100 iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit G3FAX Unit Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Connecting to the Machine The information needed for the job has been obtained Check the indicated descriptions snd press OK List of S...

Page 1380: ...age A 51 02 Common All Country Region Version State Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit G3FAX Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Slecting a Version List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language A 01 28 English USA Country Region Version State G3FAX List for the Target of Connection G3FAX Versions Available for Selection Selected Version Language A...

Page 1381: ...vice Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Downloading the G3FAX List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language A 01 28 English USA Country Region Version State Selected G3FAX Result of Downloading The check sums of all files have matched 51 02 Language Common All Country Region Version G3FAX List for the Target of Connection Language A 51 02 Common All Country Region Version State File Name...

Page 1382: ...ly F 16 108 If the G3fax board fails to operate be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM onthe G3fax board Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit G3FAX Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Downloading the G3FAX List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language A 01 28 English USA Country Region Version State Selected G3FAX 51 02 Language Progress of Writing t...

Page 1383: ...oller PCB it is a good idea to upload its data in advance and download it after replacement so that parts counter reading and the like may be retained F 16 109 Backup data File name selected at time of uploading DC controller PCB SramDCON bin Reder controller PCB SramRCON bin For R D Sublog txt PC for service Main controller block Main controller PCB main DC controller PCB SramRCON bin iR XXXX Sub...

Page 1384: ...ling Data If you want to work on any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Uploading Registering and Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data Service Support Tool Ver 1...

Page 1385: ...d Unit Model iR XXXX SYSTEM Network Check the selected model unit and click the Connect button Unit Interface Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Selecting Model Unit To Main Menu Connect iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download mod...

Page 1386: ...en Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host name or IP address If you want to change select an appropriate name from drop down list or input character directly Click Save to save the name for reuse Click Delete to delete the name from list Delete Save Cancel OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit Connectedto If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the...

Page 1387: ...e for the Target of Connection Language Japanese Japan Country Region Version State Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit SYSTEM Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting a Job A 01 25 List of System Software for the Target of Connection Selecting a SYSTEM Job System Software Download Recover the Backup system Upload the Backup Data Download the Backup Data To U...

Page 1388: ... saved from among data saved on he hard disk of the selected unit Click the appropriate data to save The selected data will be indicated at the bottom Backup Data Avanilable for Selection Model Unit Language SramDCON bin Data Type Selected Backup Data Country Region Version Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting Backup Data Save Discard SramDCON 1 File name c iR XXXX SYSTEM 172 16 1 100 A ...

Page 1389: ...Model Connected Model and Unit Unit Language Data Type Selected Backup Data Language Countr y Region Ve r s i o n Country Region Version S t a t e Connected to Japanese Japanese Japan 01 28 SramDCON b Japan List of System Software for the Target of Connection Result of Uploading The backup data has been saved Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Uploading Backup Data ...

Page 1390: ...olling Data If you want to work on any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Uploading Registering and Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data To Next Ending the Service Support Tool Ver Info To Next To execute any of the following operations click its appropriate button Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data Service Support Tool Ver...

Page 1391: ...d Unit Model iR XXXX SYSTEM Network Check the selected model unit and click the Connect button Unit Interface Service Support Tool Ver 1 81E DLM0 Selecting Model Unit To Main Menu Connect iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the machine Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable Turn on the machine and start the download mod...

Page 1392: ...en Set host name OK 172 16 1 100 The list indicates the last host name or IP address If you want to change select an appropriate name from drop down list or input character directly Click Save to save the name for reuse Click Delete to delete the name from list Delete Save Cancel OK iR XXXX Model Selected Model and Unit Connectedto If the following preparations have been made click OK Turn off the...

Page 1393: ...e Target of Connection Language Japanese Japan Country Region Version State Connectedto iR XXXX Model Connected Model and Unit SYSTEM Unit 172 16 1 100 Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting a Job A 01 25 List of System Software for the Target of Connection Selecting a SYSTEM Job System Software Download Recover the Backup system Upload the Backup Data Download the Backup Data To Unit Sele...

Page 1394: ... Language Countr y Region Version State Japanese Japan List of System Software for the Target of Connection Backup Data Avanilable for Selection Model Selected Backup Data File Name Data Type Data Time Unit Model Unit Language Country Region Version Service Support Tool DLM4 ver 1 81En Selecting Backup Data OK Result of Downloading The backup data has been transferred iR XXXX SYSTEM 172 16 1 100 A...

Page 1395: ...Chapter 17 Service Tools ...

Page 1396: ......

Page 1397: ...Contents Contents 17 1 Special Tools 17 1 17 2 Solvents and Oils 17 3 ...

Page 1398: ......

Page 1399: ...FY9 2002 A Use for electrical checks for adjustment of laser power in combination with the laser power checker Cover switch TKN 0093 A Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks CA1 test Sheet FY9 9030 A Used for adjusting checking images Loupe CK 0056 B Use...

Page 1400: ...t be kept by each group of about five engineers C Must be kept by each warkshop Mirror positioning tool FY9 3009 040 B Used for positioning mirror mounts Routing mirror cleaning tool FL2 2474 B Used for cleaning routing mirror Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks ...

Page 1401: ...al oil family lithium soap Molybdenum disulfide MO 138S Tool No CK 0427 500 g can Lubricating oil Mineral oil paraffin family Tool No CK 0524 100 cc Lubricating oil Lubrication e g drive areas friction areas Silicone oil Tool No CK 0551 20 g Lubricating oil EM 50L Lubrication e g gears Special oil Special solid lubricating agent Lithium soap Tool No HY9 0007 Libricating oil Lubrication e g scanner...

Page 1402: ...Chapter 17 17 4 ...

Page 1403: ...Apr 6 2004 ...

Page 1404: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for iR C6800 Series

Lanier LD360 Brochure & Specs preview
LD360
Brand: Lanier Pages: 6
Xerox PHASER 6121MFP Service Manual preview
PHASER 6121MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 532
Xerox Phaser 6120 User Manual preview
Phaser 6120
Brand: Xerox Pages: 174
Xerox Phaser 6115 MFP Repacking Manual preview
Phaser 6115 MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 6115 MFP User Manual preview
Phaser 6115 MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 219
Xerox PHASER 6010 Quick Use Manual preview
PHASER 6010
Brand: Xerox Pages: 5
Xerox Phaser 6140N Product Safety Data Sheet preview
Phaser 6140N
Brand: Xerox Pages: 3
Xerox Phaser 6128 MFP Installation Manual preview
Phaser 6128 MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 6128 MFP Evaluator Manual preview
Phaser 6128 MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 16
Xerox Phaser 6125 Specifications preview
Phaser 6125
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 7800 Training preview
Phaser 7800
Brand: Xerox Pages: 9
Xerox Phaser 7800 Quick Manual preview
Phaser 7800
Brand: Xerox Pages: 12
Xerox Phaser 7750 Adding Memory Manual preview
Phaser 7750
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 7750 Setup Manual preview
Phaser 7750
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 8500 Quick Manual preview
Phaser 8500
Brand: Xerox Pages: 4
Xerox Phaser 8500 Detailed Specifications preview
Phaser 8500
Brand: Xerox Pages: 4
Xerox Phaser 6500 User Manual preview
Phaser 6500
Brand: Xerox Pages: 162
Xerox Phaser 8560 Advanced Features Manual preview
Phaser 8560
Brand: Xerox Pages: 83

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands